RA3100
Omniace

Instruction Manual

1WMPD4004444D

CAUTION(1) Turn off the power when the operation is abnormal.
If it is impossible to trace the causes of an abnormal operation, please contact our sales representative.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
(3) This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. This manual may not be reproduced, modified, ortranslated without the written permission of A&D Company, Limited. No parts of this manual may betranscribed without permission.
(4) Please let us know if there are any points that are unclear or missing in this manual.
(5) A&D Company, Limited. will not be held responsible for any damages or loss of income caused by theoperation of this device or any direct, indirect, special, or inevitable damages caused by defects in the
product, even if there is notice that the corresponding damages may occur. We will also not be held
responsible for any third party claims of rights. At the same time, we will not be held responsible for any
loss of data. We will not be held responsible for any of such points as those indicated in item (4).
2020 A&D Company, Limited.
Omniace is a registered trademark of A&D Company, Limited.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows 10 IoT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Product names and company names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective owners in Japan and other countries.
Software owned by Adobe Corporation in the United States is used based on the SIL Open Font License.

Introduction

Introduction
We thank you for your purchase of our data acquisition product
OMNIACE RA3100 (hereinafter "the RA3100" or "this product").
This instruction manual explains cautions and methods for handling
the RA3100 and its optional input modules. Please read this manual
before operating this instrument. If you encounter any problems in the
manual, please contact our company.

<Instruction manual on CD>
Manual
RA3100 Instruction Manual

1WMPD4004444D

Contents
This manual
Explains how to handle and configure the RA3100.

3

Examining Contents in Package

Examining Contents in Package
When Opening Package

When opening the package in a warm room during the cold season, open the package after it hasreached room temperature to avoid any operational failure due to condensation on the surface of thisproduct.

Examining Contents in Package
This instrument is delivered after a thorough examination at the factory prior to shipment. However,please examine this product's condition and verify that no obvious shipping damage has occurred after
opening the package. Also, examine the specifications of the input units and accessories. If there are
any missing or damaged items, please contact our sales representative.

<Contents of RA3100 Package>
Name
Omniace main unit

Model/document
number
RA3100Quantity

Remarks1

AC 100 V to 240 V

1WMPD4004445

1

Describes cautions on use and operation
methods

Instruction Manual CD-ROM 1WMEK4010464

1

Includes the RA3100 Instruction Manual1

The cable selected at ordering thisproduct.

Simple Operation Manual

AC power cable
Thermal recording paper

YPS-106

1 rollRecording paper holder

5633-17942

30 m roll recording paper (5 rolls per box)
Recording paper both edges x 1 each<Contents in Module Package>
2ch Voltage Module

Model/document
numberRA30-101

4ch Voltage ModuleRA30-102

Name

Quantity

Remarks

Any onemoduleTwo sensor connector sets included

2ch High Speed Voltage Module RA30-103
2ch AC Strain ModuleRA30-104

16ch Logic ModuleRA30-105

2ch Temperature ModuleRA30-1062ch High Voltage ModuleRA30-1072ch Frequency ModuleRA30-1082ch Acceleration ModuleRA30-109

Remote control moduleRA30-112

4ch Voltage ModuleRA30-113"Before Using This Product"

1WMPD4004140

4

1WMPD4004444D

To Safely Use Products

To Safely Use Products
Safety Measures - Warnings and Cautions
This product is designed and tested to conform to the EN61010 standard.
This product is manufactured with safety in mind. However, accidents may occur due to misuse by theuser. To avoid such accidents, read this manual carefully before use. Observe the following warning andcautions when using this product. The following statements are used in this manual to call the readers'attention.
Be sure to observe the following instructions when using this product. The warranty does not coverdamages resulting from the actions against instructions, cautions, or warnings mentioned in thismanual. Besides, there are a lot of actions that are "cannot" and "do not". It is impossible to write allsuch descriptions in this manual. Accordingly, assume any actions to be "impossible" except the actions
explicitly described as "possible".

Meaning of Warning Signs
WARNING

This indicates a condition or practice that could result in personal injury or
loss of life, or may result in light injury or physical damage if thisequipment is misused due to neglect of a Warning.

CAUTION

This indicates a condition or practice that could result in light injury or
damage to the equipment or other property if this equipment is misused
due to neglect of a Caution.

Meaning of Symbols
symbols indicate cautions (including warnings).
Specific precautions are indicated inside figures (in the example on the left, a warning about
electrocution).
symbols indicate prohibited actions. Specific prohibited actions are indicated insideorwith nearby text or pictures. The example on the left indicates that disassembly is prohibited.
symbols indicate actions that must be taken. Specific actions that must be taken are
indicated insideor with nearby text or pictures. The example on the left indicates anaction that must be taken.

WARNINGPower
Make sure that the power supply is within the rating indicated on the rating plate attached to thisproduct.
If any voltage exceeding the rated voltage was supplied, there would be risk of damage to this product,or even a fire. Also, in order to prevent electric shock and hazards such as a fire, be sure to use only
the AC power cable supplied with this product.

1WMPD4004444D

5

To Safely Use Products

WARNING
Protective Grounding
Be sure to ground this product before supplying power. Grounding is necessary to use this productsafely, as well as to protect the user and peripheral equipment from injury or damage. Be sure toobserve the following instructions:
The AC power cable included with this product contains a ground lead. Connect the power cable into
only a 3-pin AC outlet with a ground pole.
When grounding, do not connect the grounding lead to a water pipe, as water pipes are not necessarily
conductive to the earth. Never connect the ground lead to a gas pipe either, as it is extremely
dangerous.
While the power is supplied to this product, do not cut or remove the protective grounding line.
Otherwise, safety of this product is not guaranteed.

Overvoltage Category (Installation Category)This product's Overvoltage Category is Category II. Do not use this product with higher categories, as
connecting it to the line of a distribution board, etc. (CAT III) or the lead-in wire of a main power line
(CAT IV) may lead to device failure.

Measurement Category
The measurement input terminal Measurement Category of this product differs according to theinstalled modules.
Use this product for measurement within the Measurement Category that meets the module
specifications. Do not use it with a Measurement Category that exceeds the module specifications.

Connection of Input Signals
Be sure to ground the grounding terminal of this product before connecting to the measurement target.
Also, when connecting this product to another measurement instrument, be careful not to exceed the
maximum allowable common mode input voltage range.
A voltage exceeding the range can cause damage to this product.

Use in Gaseous Atmosphere
Never use this product in a flammable or explosive atmosphere, or an atmosphere containing steam.
Use in such atmosphere will result in danger to users and this product.

Disassembling the Frame
It is dangerous to remove the frame of this product due to the high-voltage parts inside.
The frame must not be removed from this product other than by our service engineers.

Fuse at AC Power Supply Block
The fuse for this product cannot be replaced by the customer because it is located inside the main unit.
Please contact our sales representative if the fuse may be blown.

Handling of Back-up Battery (Cautions when Disposing)This product includes a coin-type lithium battery (primary cell).
When disposing of this product, please contact an A&D sales representative or distributor (see the endof this document for details).

6

1WMPD4004444D

To Safely Use Products

CAUTION
Caution in Handling
When using this product, always follow the precautions below. Improper handling may lead toerroneous operations and damages.
Users who are not familiar with the operation of this product should avoid using it.
Use this product at locations that satisfy the overvoltage requirement, the Category II (CAT II) of thesafety standard for electrical measurement instruments in EN61010-1.
This product has a Pollution Degree of 2.
This product is a Class A product for industrial environments.
Use in household environments may cause electromagnetic interference. In such cases, the user must
implement appropriate countermeasures.
Store this product in the following storage environments. Avoid storing in places where the temperature
could rise over the storage temperature and where there is direct sunlight exposure such as inside anautomobile.
Storage temperature range: -20 to 60°C

Storage humidity range: 20 to 85% RH (without

condensation)
Use this product in the following operating environments.
Operating temperature range: 0 to 40°C

Operating humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (without

condensation)
Do not use this product at the following locations. In addition, carefully check the environment whenusing this product.
Locations where the temperature and humidity rise due to direct sunlight or heaters
Wet locations
Locations where salt, oil, or corrosive gases exist
Dusty locations
Locations subject to strong vibrations
Locations with a strong electromagnetic field
This product is provided with ventilation openings in order to prevent overheating.
Ensure that the ventilation openings remain unobstructed by covers or materials. Otherwise, theinternal temperature of this product rises, causing malfunctions.
Do not place highly combustible objects such as paper near this product.
Be careful of power voltage fluctuations. Do not use this product when these are likely to exceed therated voltage.
If the power supply includes a lot of noise or high-voltage inductive noise, use noise filters to avoid
operation errors.
A solid-state drive is installed in this product.
Please don’t power off during normal operation of the SSD (while data is being saved/read), due to therisk of data destruction.

1WMPD4004444D

7

To Safely Use Products

CAUTION
This product uses an electrostatic capacitive touch panel.
Press the touch panel gently with your bare fingertip. The touch screen may not react if you arewearing gloves. Also do not use a sharp object or push with higher pressure than necessary. Pressing
three or more locations at once may cause misoperations. Be sure to press only one location when
making a selection or two locations with pinching in/pinching out.
LCD display
This product has a TFT color LCD for display. There may be cases where the light of pixels does notcome on or off in the LCD. In addition, the LCD includes unevenness slightly due to temperaturechanges. Please be aware that these cases are not disorders.
Use the chart recording paper specified by A&D. Use of a chart that is not recommended may cause
failure in printing or shorten the life of the thermal head.
Recording straight line waveforms or waveforms in solid black in the same position for an extended
period of time may shorten the life of the elements in that part of the thermal head. It is recommended
that the waveform recording position is occasionally changed.
Printing a waveform in solid black for an extended period of time causes printing waste of the recording
paper to remain in the thermal head, and may prevent printing. Periodically clean the thermal head.
When storing this product for an extended period of time, the recording paper feeding platen may
become deformed if the printer cover is locked and cause printing irregularities, but this does notindicate product failure.
When storing recording paper for an extended period of time before recording, remove the recording
paper from the main unit and insert it in a plastic bag, or as-is if it is still in its original packaging, andthen store it in a dark location with a temperature of 25°C or less and humidity of 70% RH or less.
When storing recording paper for an extended period of time after recording, file it in a dark location
with a temperature of 25°C or less and humidity of 70% RH or less. When using a file folder, make surethat it is made of a material that does not include plasticizer (such as polyethylene or polypropylene).
If the recording paper touches the following materials or products, the printing surface may change
color, lose color, or exhibit otherwise poor color performance.
Vinyl chloride products, organic compounds, adhesive tape, pencil eraser, rubber mats, magic
markers, felt-tip pens, correction fluid, carbon, diazo photosensitive paper, hand cream, hairdressing
products, cosmetic products, or leather products such as a wallet
Do not insert a pointed or sharp object into the ventilation openings of this product.
To clean this product, first turn off the power, place it in a well-ventilated location, and wipe this productusing soft cloth moistened with ethanol. Do not use benzene, petroleum solvents, or chemically treatedcloths, as they can cause deformation or discoloration.
When transporting this product, use the package and packaging material supplied at factory shipment,
or use a package and packaging material more shock-resistant than those supplied.
We recommend a periodical calibration to maintain the accuracy of the input units. More reliablemeasurements are possible by calibrating the input units once a year (extra cost option).

8

1WMPD4004444D

To Safely Use Products

CAUTION
Windows 10 IoTThis product adopts Windows 10 IoT as its operating system. Please read and understand thefollowing instructions carefully before use.
LicenseThe Windows 10 IoT operating system used in this product is provided with a license for embedded
use only.
This product cannot function as a general purpose PC, and it is limited exclusively for RA3100 use.
The embedded system of this product is not allowed to be duplicated and used.
Power on/off
This product enters the standby state when the AC power cable is connected, where it consumes a tiny
amount of standby power. When thePowerswitch on the panel is pressed, the main power starts

and this product enters the monitoring state.
When turning off the power, confirm that the internal SSD of this product is not being accessed.
When thePowerswitch is pressed, the [Shutdown] screen is displayed. Tap

Yesto shutdown

this product. Directly removing the power cable to turn off the power may damage the data on the SSD
and make the SSD unable to be used.
When this product will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the power cable after the
shutdown process is complete.
Use on a Network
Please consult your network administrator to make sure that other tasks are not affected by connecting
this product to the network.
Computer Viruses
This product does not include any virus search or removal software other than the standard Windows
functions, in order to ensure it maintains adequate performance. Take care when connecting thisproduct to a network or external media.
Other
We do not assume any responsibility or provide support for malfunctions if programs that are notprovided by us are installed into the system, the operating system settings are changed, or programs
are forcibly terminated via an input device such as a keyboard or mouse.

Disposing of the Used ProductIn the European Union

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical andelectronic products carrying the mark (right) must be disposed of separately from normalhousehold waste. This includes electrical accessories, such as chargers or AC adapters.
The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European
Union Member States.

Outside the European Union
If you wish to dispose of used electrical and electronic products outside the European
Union, please contact your local authority and ask for the correct method of disposal.

1WMPD4004444D

9To Safely Use Products

FCC Compliance Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Thisequipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which casethe user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

10

1WMPD4004444D

Symbols in This Manual

Symbols in This ManualTerms and symbols used in this manual denote as follows.
This indicates a condition or practice that could result in personal injury or loss of

WARNING

life, or may result in light injury or physical damage if this equipment is misused due
to neglect of a Warning.
This indicates a condition or practice that could result in light injury or damage to

CAUTIONthe equipment or other property if this equipment is misused due to neglect of a

NOTEThis indicates a condition or practice that could result in incorrect operation or

Tips

This indicates measurement limitations and additional explanations.

Caution.
damage to data if this equipment is misused due to neglect of a Note.

Reference page
A tap is the act of lightly touching an item such as a key displayed on the screenwith a finger.
Example Used for selecting or setting screen keys.
A swipe is the act of pressing the screen with a finger and moving it in a specificdirection.
Example Used on screens such as the [Thumbnail] screen and [Channel Setup]
screen.
A pinch in is the act of touching the screen with two fingers and moving those
fingers closer to each other, and reduces the screen.
Example Used to reduce the content displayed on the screen, waveform
amplitude, or time axis, etc.
A pinch out is the act of touching the screen with two fingers and moving those
fingers apart from each other, and enlarges the screen.
Example Used to enlarge the content displayed on the screen, waveform
amplitude, or time axis, etc.
__

key
key

[

] screen

Enclosed characters represent a key name on the operation panel.
ExampleSTART

Text enclosed in
ExampleCHindicates touch panel keys displayed on the screen.
key

Text enclosed in [] indicates the text of items on the screen.

Example [Module 1]

k (lower case)Example 1 kg

K (upper case)

1 KB

1WMPD4004444D

key= 1000 g= 1024 bytes

11Warranty

Warranty

Warranty - General
We ship our products after conducting quality control, which covers from design to manufacturing. It is,however, possible that failures may occur in this products. If this product does not operate correctly,
please make a check of the power supply, cable connections, or other conditions before returning thisproduct to us.
For repair or calibration, contact our sales agency. Before returning, be sure to inform us of the model(RA3100), serial number, and problematic points.
The following is our warranty.

Limited Warranty
1.

Warranty period:

One year from our shipment.

2.

Warranty scope:

The warranty only covers the main unit of this product.
We will repair the defects of our product free of charge within the warranty period;
however, this warranty does not apply in the following cases.
Damage or faults caused by incorrect use
Damage or faults caused by fire, earthquake, traffic accident, or other natural
disasters
Damage or faults caused by a repair or modification that is carried out by someone
other than a service representative of A&D
Damage or faults caused by use or storage in environmental conditions that should
be avoided
Periodical calibration
Damage or faults caused during transportation.
The thermal printing head may not be covered by the warranty even within thewarranty period, depending on the usage conditions.
Usage conditions: 30 million printing pulses or more or recording length 30 km or
longer
The internal SSD, fan, and backup coin-type battery are treated as consumables
and not covered by the warranty.
Data recorded on the SSD and external media is not covered by the warranty,
regardless of the cause and type of product failure. Make sure to back up yourrecorded data.

3.

Liability:

We do not assume any liability for equipment other than A&D equipment.

12

1WMPD4004444D

CONTENTS

CONTENTSINTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................... 3
EXAMINING CONTENTS IN PACKAGE ........................................................................................................... 4
TO SAFELY USE PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 5
DISPOSING OF THE USED PRODUCT ........................................................................................................... 9
FCC COMPLIANCE INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 10
SYMBOLS IN THIS MANUAL........................................................................................................................... 11
WARRANTY .................................................................................................................................................... 12
1.

NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH BLOCK ................................................................................ 20
1.1.

Name of Each Block ................................................................................................................. 20

1.2.

Display Block ............................................................................................................................ 22

1.3.

Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................... 23

1.4.

Interface Block .......................................................................................................................... 24

1.5.

Input Module Block ................................................................................................................... 24

1.6.

Screen and Setup Menu........................................................................................................... 25

1.6.1.

Side menu ............................................................................................................................ 25

1.6.2.

Control Bar ........................................................................................................................... 26

1.7.

Screen Input Operations .......................................................................................................... 28

1.7.1.

Rotary Knob .......................................................................................................................... 28

1.7.2.

Numeric Value Input Dialog .................................................................................................. 28

1.7.3.

Selection Palette Dialog ....................................................................................................... 29

1.7.4.

Software Keyboard ............................................................................................................... 292.

PRE-MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES ..................................................................................... 30
2.1.

Before Switching On the Power ............................................................................................... 30

2.1.1.

Installation and Usage Environment..................................................................................... 30

2.1.2.

Installing Optional Modules .................................................................................................. 32

2.1.3.

Paper Loading ...................................................................................................................... 33

2.1.4.

Connecting an External Device ............................................................................................ 37

2.2.

Turning the Power On/Off......................................................................................................... 38

2.2.1.

Connecting the AC Power Cable .......................................................................................... 38

2.2.2.

Turning On the Power .......................................................................................................... 38

2.2.3.

Confirming Normal Startup ................................................................................................... 39

2.2.4.

Setup Date and Time ............................................................................................................ 39

2.2.5.

Preparing for More Precise Measurements ......................................................................... 39

2.2.6.

Turning Off the Power .......................................................................................................... 39

3.

FLOW OF MEASUREMENT ....................................................................................................... 40
3.1.

4.

Flow of Measurement ............................................................................................................... 40
CONFIGURING MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................. 41

4.1.

Selecting the Measurement Mode ........................................................................................... 41

4.1.1.

Characteristics ...................................................................................................................... 41

4.1.2.

Functional Differences between Measurement Modes ........................................................41

4.1.3.

Selection Method .................................................................................................................. 42

1WMPD4004444D

13

CONTENTS
4.2.

Reducing the Input Sensitivity and Connecting the Input Cable ..............................................43

4.3.

Setting the Input Channel ......................................................................................................... 45

4.3.1.

Channel setup sub menu (for RA30-101) ............................................................................ 45

4.3.2.

Setup the input channels ...................................................................................................... 46

4.4.

Selecting the Recording Method .............................................................................................. 51

4.4.1.

Recording to Recording Paper Only..................................................................................... 51

4.4.2.

Recording to a File and Recording Paper ............................................................................ 51

4.5.

Recording Setup ....................................................................................................................... 52

4.5.1.

Setup the Sampling Speed ................................................................................................... 52

4.5.2.

Sampling Speed of Recording Device ................................................................................. 53

4.5.3.

Maximum Recordable Times ................................................................................................ 54

5.

TRIGGER SETUP ....................................................................................................................... 57
5.1.

Trigger Types ............................................................................................................................ 57

5.2.

Memory trigger ......................................................................................................................... 57

5.2.1.
5.3.
5.3.1.
5.4.
5.4.1.
6.

Memory Trigger Setup .......................................................................................................... 57
Pre-Trigger ............................................................................................................................... 60
Pre-Trigger Setup ................................................................................................................. 60
Start Trigger .............................................................................................................................. 61
Start Trigger Setup ............................................................................................................... 61
MEASURING INPUT SIGNALS .................................................................................................. 62

6.1.

State Transition of Main Unit Operation ................................................................................... 62

6.2.

Monitor Display and Pen Recording ......................................................................................... 63

6.2.1.

Monitor Display Function ...................................................................................................... 63

6.2.2.

Pen Recording ...................................................................................................................... 66

6.2.3.

Text to Print Function ............................................................................................................ 68

6.3.

Starting and Ending Recording ................................................................................................ 72

6.3.1.

Recording Setup ................................................................................................................... 72

6.3.2.

Starting and Ending Recording ............................................................................................ 79

6.3.3.

Pausing Recording and Scrolling Back ................................................................................ 80

7.

PLAYBACK RECORDED DATA .................................................................................................. 81
7.1.

Select Recorded Data .............................................................................................................. 81

7.2.

Playback Recorded Data.......................................................................................................... 82

7.2.1.

Playback Screen Operations ................................................................................................ 83

7.2.2.

Thumbnails ........................................................................................................................... 83

7.2.3.

Cursor ................................................................................................................................... 85

7.2.4.

Printing Out ........................................................................................................................... 86

7.2.5.

Selecting a Memory Block .................................................................................................... 86

7.3.
7.3.1.
7.3.2.

X-Y Waveform .......................................................................................................................... 87
X-Y Display Setup ................................................................................................................ 87
X-Y Control ........................................................................................................................... 88

7.4.

FFT Analysis ............................................................................................................................. 89

7.5.

Search Function ....................................................................................................................... 91

7.5.1.

Search Types and Operations .............................................................................................. 91

7.5.2.

Search Method Types and Settings ..................................................................................... 93

7.5.3.

Peak Value Search (Maximum/Minimum) ............................................................................ 95

7.5.4.

Peak Value Search (Local Maximum/Local Minimum) .........................................................96

7.5.5.

Level Search (LEVEL UP/LEVEL DOWN) ........................................................................... 98
14

1WMPD4004444D

CONTENTS
7.5.6.

Window Search (INTO WIN/OUT WIN) .............................................................................. 100

7.5.7.

Logic Search....................................................................................................................... 103

7.5.8.

Trigger Search .................................................................................................................... 104

7.5.9.

Mark Search ....................................................................................................................... 104

7.5.10.

Search Display Menu ......................................................................................................... 105

7.6.

Jump Function ........................................................................................................................ 106

7.6.1.

Jump Types and Operations .............................................................................................. 107

7.6.2.

Jump Condition Types and Settings ................................................................................... 108

7.6.3.

Data beginning, center, end ............................................................................................... 109

7.6.4.

Date Setup .......................................................................................................................... 109

7.6.5.

Time Setup ......................................................................................................................... 110

7.6.6.

POINT(samples) ................................................................................................................. 110

7.6.7.

Cursor ................................................................................................................................. 111

8.

SETUP DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 112
8.1.

Create a config file ................................................................................................................. 113

8.2.

Recording Setup ..................................................................................................................... 114

8.2.1.

Recording ........................................................................................................................... 114

8.2.2.

Channel List ........................................................................................................................ 114

8.2.3.

Sheet Setup ........................................................................................................................ 118

8.2.4.

Printer ................................................................................................................................. 122

8.2.5.

Other setup ......................................................................................................................... 126

8.3.

Main Unit Setup ...................................................................................................................... 127

8.3.1.

Environment Setup ............................................................................................................. 127

8.3.2.

Communication Setup ........................................................................................................ 129

8.3.3.

Display Setup ..................................................................................................................... 137

8.3.4.

Other ................................................................................................................................... 138

8.4.

Management........................................................................................................................... 139

8.4.1.

File Management ................................................................................................................ 139

8.4.2.

Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 149

8.4.3.

Operation History................................................................................................................ 151

8.4.4.

Version Management ......................................................................................................... 152

9.

USING OPTIONAL MODULES ................................................................................................. 153
9.1.

2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101) ............................................................................................ 153

9.1.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 153

9.1.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 153

9.1.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 154

9.1.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 156

9.2.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102) ............................................................................................ 157

9.2.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 157

9.2.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 157

9.2.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 158

9.2.4.
9.3.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 159
2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103) ........................................................................ 161

9.3.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 161

9.3.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 161

9.3.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 162

9.3.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 164

1WMPD4004444D

15

CONTENTS
9.4.

2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104) ......................................................................................... 165

9.4.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 165

9.4.2.

Connection Method ............................................................................................................ 165

9.4.3.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 166

9.4.4.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 168

9.4.5.
9.5.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 170
16ch Logic Module (RA30-105) ............................................................................................. 180

9.5.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 180

9.5.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 180

9.5.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 183

9.5.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 184

9.5.5.

Options ............................................................................................................................... 186

9.6.

2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106) .................................................................................... 189

9.6.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 189

9.6.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 189

9.6.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 190

9.6.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 192

9.6.5.
9.7.

Spare Parts ......................................................................................................................... 196
2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107) .................................................................................... 197

9.7.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 197

9.7.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 197

9.7.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 198

9.7.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 200

9.8.

2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108) ....................................................................................... 201

9.8.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 201

9.8.2.

Relationship between Channels and Settings .................................................................... 201

9.8.3.

Setting the Input Voltage and Measurement Mode ............................................................ 202

9.8.4.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 203

9.8.5.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 213

9.9.

2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109) .................................................................................... 214

9.9.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 214

9.9.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 214

9.9.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 215

9.9.4.

Cables ................................................................................................................................ 219

9.9.5.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 220

9.10.

Remote Control Module (RA30-112) ...................................................................................... 222

9.10.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 222

9.10.2.

Installation .......................................................................................................................... 222

9.10.3.

Channel setting................................................................................................................... 223

9.10.4.

Output terminal for waveform confirmation ........................................................................ 224

9.10.5.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 224

9.10.6.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 225

9.10.7.

Options ............................................................................................................................... 230

9.11.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113) ............................................................................................ 233

9.11.1.

Overview ............................................................................................................................. 233

9.11.2.

Setting the Input Channel ................................................................................................... 233

9.11.3.

Measurement Setup ........................................................................................................... 234

9.11.4.

Reference Materials ........................................................................................................... 236
16

1WMPD4004444D

CONTENTS
10.

APPENDIX ................................................................................................................................ 237

10.1.

Version Information ................................................................................................................ 237

10.2.

Sampling Data Format ........................................................................................................... 238

10.2.1.

Normal Sampling ................................................................................................................ 238

10.2.2.

P-P Sampling ...................................................................................................................... 238

10.3.

Sampling................................................................................................................................. 239

10.3.1.

Internal Sampling................................................................................................................ 239

10.3.2.

External Sampling .............................................................................................................. 239

10.3.3.

Relationship between Sampling Speed and Chart Speed .................................................239

10.4.

Scale Conversion (Physical Quantity Conversion)................................................................. 240

10.5.

Wave Inversion ....................................................................................................................... 241

10.5.1.

Use in Conjunction with Scale Conversion ........................................................................ 241

10.6.

FFT Analysis ........................................................................................................................... 242

10.6.1.

Analysis Function ............................................................................................................... 242

10.6.2.

AVG process ....................................................................................................................... 245

10.6.3.

Units of Analysis Results .................................................................................................... 247

10.7.

Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser ..................................................................... 248

10.7.1.

Computer System Requirements ....................................................................................... 248

10.7.2.

Preparations ....................................................................................................................... 248

10.7.3.

Connection Method ............................................................................................................ 248

10.7.4.

Remote Screen................................................................................................................... 249

10.7.5.

Info Screen ......................................................................................................................... 250

10.7.6.

Remotely Operating the RA3100 from a Web Browser .....................................................251

10.7.7.

Switching the Web Browser Display Language.................................................................. 252

10.8.

Downloading the Data of this Product via FTP ...................................................................... 253

10.8.1.

Preparations ....................................................................................................................... 253

10.8.2.

Download Method............................................................................................................... 253

10.9.

Transferring Data .................................................................................................................... 254

10.9.1.

Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 254

10.9.2.

Sampling Data .................................................................................................................... 255

10.9.3.

Measurement data block .................................................................................................... 256

10.10.

Remote Control ...................................................................................................................... 258

10.10.1.

Starting/Stopping Recording .............................................................................................. 258

10.10.2.

Starting/Stopping Pen Recording ....................................................................................... 259

10.10.3.

Starting/Stopping Feeding .................................................................................................. 260

10.11.

Relationship between AD Count Value and Measured Value ................................................261

10.12.

Converting AD Count Values to Physical Quantities .............................................................. 263

11.

MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................ 264

11.1.

Managing/Handling Recording Paper and Printer Recorded Data.................................................264

11.1.1.

Replacing Recording Paper and Monitoring Remaining Paper .........................................264

11.1.2.

Storing Recording Paper .................................................................................................... 265

11.1.3.

Printer Block Errors ............................................................................................................ 265

11.2.
11.2.1.

Backing Up Recorded Data .................................................................................................... 266
Internal SSD Errors ............................................................................................................ 266

11.3.

Display Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 266

11.4.

Thermal Head Cleaning/Life................................................................................................... 267

11.4.1.

Cleaning ............................................................................................................................. 267

11.4.2.

Life ...................................................................................................................................... 267

1WMPD4004444D

17

CONTENTS
11.5.

Platen Roller Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 267

11.6.

Power Outages ....................................................................................................................... 267

11.7.

Battery Replacement .............................................................................................................. 267

11.8.

Fan Replacement ................................................................................................................... 268

11.9.

Cautions for Disposing This Product ...................................................................................... 268

11.10.

Troubleshooting and Inspection ............................................................................................. 268

12.

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 270

12.1.

General Specifications ........................................................................................................... 270

12.1.1.

Main Unit Basic Specifications ........................................................................................... 270

12.1.2.

General Specifications ....................................................................................................... 271

12.2.

Functional Specifications ........................................................................................................ 273

12.2.1.

Measurement Function ....................................................................................................... 273

12.2.2.

SSD Recording ................................................................................................................... 274

12.2.3.

Memory Recording ............................................................................................................. 274

12.2.4.

Printer Recording................................................................................................................ 275

12.2.5.

Trigger Function ................................................................................................................. 275

12.2.6.

Waveform Monitor Function ............................................................................................... 276

12.2.7.

X-Y Waveform .................................................................................................................... 277

12.2.8.

FFT Analysis ....................................................................................................................... 278

12.2.9.

Setup/Record management ............................................................................................... 279

12.2.10.

Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 280

12.2.11.

Communication Setup ........................................................................................................ 281

12.2.12.

Other Setup (Maintenance/Operation History/Version Management) ................................282

12.3.

Module Specifications ............................................................................................................ 283

12.3.1.

2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101) ........................................................................................ 283

12.3.2.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102) ........................................................................................ 284

12.3.3.

2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103) .................................................................... 285

12.3.4.

2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104) ..................................................................................... 286

12.3.5.

16ch Logic Module (RA30-105).......................................................................................... 287

12.3.6.

2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106) ................................................................................ 288

12.3.7.

2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107) ................................................................................ 290

12.3.8.

2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108) ................................................................................... 292

12.3.9.

2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)................................................................................. 295

12.3.10.

Remote Control Module (RA30-112) .................................................................................. 298

12.3.11.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113) ........................................................................................ 300

12.4.

Exterior ................................................................................................................................... 301

12.4.1.

Main Unit Exterior ............................................................................................................... 301

12.4.2.

2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101) Exterior ........................................................................... 302

12.4.3.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102) Exterior ........................................................................... 303

12.4.4.

2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103) Exterior .......................................................304

12.4.5.

2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104) Exterior ....................................................................... 305

12.4.6.

16ch Logic Module (RA30-105) Exterior ............................................................................ 306

12.4.7.

2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106) Exterior................................................................... 307

12.4.8.

2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107) Exterior .................................................................. 308

12.4.9.

2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108) Exterior ...................................................................... 309

12.4.10.

2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109) Exterior ................................................................... 310

12.4.11.

Remote Control Module (RA30-112) Exterior..................................................................... 311

12.4.12.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113) Exterior ........................................................................... 312
18

1WMPD4004444D

CONTENTS
13.

OPTIONAL PARTS .................................................................................................................... 313

13.1.

List of Cables .......................................................................................................................... 313

13.2.

List of Probes/Clamp Meters .................................................................................................. 314

13.3.

Accessory ............................................................................................................................... 315

13.4.

List of Spare Parts .................................................................................................................. 315

SOFTWARE LICENSE INFORMATION ........................................................................................................ 316

1WMPD4004444D

19

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.1. Name of Each Block

1.

Name and Function of Each BlockThis product consists of the following blocks.

1.1.

Name of Each Block

Front view

Handle (retractable)

SD card slot
Display Block

USB
Operation panel

Power switch
Corner pad

USB
SCREEN LOCKLAN
Video output DVI-D

KEY LOCKCOM
Interface Block

Printer block
Input module(9 slots)

AC power socket

Left view

Right view

20

1WMPD4004444D

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.1. Name of Each Block

Top view
Handle (retractable)

Rear view
Stand

1WMPD4004444D

21

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.2. Display Block

1.2.

Display BlockThis product has a TFT color LCD display with touch panel.
The LCD displays the waveform monitor and setup keys, and users can configure setup by directly
touching the panel.
Waveform monitor

Side menu

Scroll the waveform
Tap the screen
to setPinch in (reduce)/pinch out (expand) the waveform
Control Bar

Waveform monitor: You can observe the state of the input signal and play back the recorded data on
the waveform monitor. Pinch in/out to enlarge or reduce the waveform or scroll the
waveform.
Side menu:

Used to switch the display screen, configure the various input modules, configure
the recording conditions, configure recording, set triggers, and display digital data,
etc.

Control bar:

The control bar provides a menu for the functions frequently used with the
waveform monitor, such as the basic control of sampling, etc., thumbnail display,
cursor display, and the pen recorder function.

NOTE

The pen recorder control function enables waveform recording to a printer using operations thatsimulate a conventional pen recorder.
This product uses an electrostatic capacitive touch panel. The touch screen may not react if you arewearing gloves.

22

1WMPD4004444D

1.3.

Operation PanelSD

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.3. Operation Panel(1) SD card slot
Used to save recorded data to an SD memory card, etc.

(2) USB
Used to save recorded data to USB memory, etc. in the same manner as to an SD
memory card.
(3) Rotary knob
Used to select the module ranges and setting values by turning it clockwise andcounterclockwise.
When the rotary knob is enabled, the area around the knob lights in the blue colorof the normal mode.
Push the rotary knob to switch the area around the knob to the orange of the fineadjustment mode.
Push it again to return the area around the knob to the blue color of the normal
mode.

PRINT

(4)

PRINT keyPress this in the measurement state to start pen recording and again to end
recording.
Press it during playback to print the waveform between cursors A and B on themonitor.
Press and hold it to print a copy of the screen (screenshot), which can be saved tothe main unit or external media in the .png file format.

(5)

TRIG keyPress the key to output a forced trigger.
The TRIG LED lights when a trigger is detected.

(6)START key
Starts recording.

(7)

STOP keyEnds recording.

TRIG

START

STOP
DISK

(8) DISK access light
The LED lights when accessing the internal SSD (for reading or writing).
(9)

1WMPD4004444D

Power switch
Turns the power of the main unit on/off.
The [Shutdown] screen is displayed when turning the power off. Press the OK
key to complete the shutdown process.
If this Power switch is pressed again while the [Shutdown] screen is displayed,
this product automatically shuts down.

23

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.4. Interface Block

1.4.

Interface Block

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) KEY LOCKDisables the operation panel keys to prevent misoperations.
(2) SCREEN LOCKDisables the touch panel keys to prevent misoperations.
(3) USB
Used to save recorded data, etc. Supports USB 3.0.
(4) LAN
Used to perform remote control from an external PC via LAN.
(5) DVI-D
The video output terminal.

NOTE
Connect an external monitor with the power off.
(6) COM
Used to perform remote control from an external PC via RS-232C.

1.5.

Input Module Block
Up to nine modules can be installed to the input module block of thisproduct.
For information on using each module, see "9. Using Optional Modules"
Slot 1and "12. Specifications".

Slot 2Standard signal input modules can be installed in any of Slot 1 to Slot 9.

Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5

Select and install a module according to the target for measurement.
The RA30-112 (remote control module) can only be installed to Slot 9.

Slot 6
Slot 7
Slot 8Input module (9 slots)

Slot 924

1WMPD4004444D

1.6.

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.6. Screen and Setup Menu

Screen and Setup Menu

Waveform monitor

Side menu

Control Bar

1.6.1.

Side menu(1) Time:

Displays the current time(2) MEASURE/PLAYBACK: Switches the displayed waveform
MEASURE: Displays the current input waveform.
PLAYBACK: Displays the playback waveform of the saved data.
(3) Recording device:
Select waveform recording device to display
Displays the recorded waveform for PRINTER/SSD/MEMORY.
(4) PAUSE:

Pauses the waveform displayed on the waveform monitor.

(5) TRIG.SYNC: Updates the input waveform display of a memory recording bysynchronizing it with a trigger.
(6) CH:

Opens the channel setup sub menu to configure the channel setup, input
digital display, and trigger setup.

(7) SETUP:

Opens the setup menu to configure the detailed settings of this product(recording setup, main unit setup, and management).
Displays the remaining space on the internal SSD. Displayed in red when
the remaining capacity is at 30% or lower.

(8) SSD:(9) PAPER:

Displays the remaining amount of recording paper in the printer block.
Displayed in red when the remaining recording paper capacity is at 30%
or lower. Press and hold this key to initialize the recording paper type (rollpaper or Z-fold paper) and usage amount. When replacing the recording
paper, press and hold this key to initialize the remaining amount ofrecording paper.

(10) SD / USB :Displays [SD] when an SD memory card is inserted, [USB] if USB memory isinserted, or [SD / USB] if both are inserted.

(11) KEY:

Displayed when the KEY LOCK switch on the side of the main unit is set
to on to disable the operation panel keys.

(12)SCREEN:

Displayed when the SCREEN LOCK switch on the side of the main unit is
set to on to disable the display touch panel.

(13)R&D / MFG : Displays either [R&D] or [MFG], depending on the measurement mode.
For the MFG mode, the data transfer status (●, ■, □, or !) is displayed.

1WMPD4004444D

25

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.6. Screen and Setup Menu

1.6.2.

Control Bar

The control bar provides a menu for the functions frequently used with the waveform monitor, such as
waveform display control of sampling, etc., thumbnail display, cursor display, and the pen recorderfunction.
Tap the (7)Display switch

key on the right edge of the control bar to switch the functions in the orderindicated below.
PEN REC(pen recording) is only available when printer recording is selected.

WAVE

THUMBNAIL⇒⇒

CURSOR⇒PEN RECWAVE (waveform)(1)(1) Sampling speed

(2)

(3)

(4)

(7)

: Selects the sampling speed. The speed table differs according to the recording
device.

Printer recording: 1 kS/s(100 ms/div)

SSD recording: 1 MS/s(100 μs/div)

Memory recording : 20 MS/s (5 μs/div)(2) Data format

to10 S/s (10 min/div), EXT (external sampling)to

10 S/s (10 min/div), EXT (external sampling)to

10 S/s (10 min/div): Selects either NORMAL or P-P as the format for the recorded data.
Only P-P is available for printer recording.
Only NORMAL is available for memory recording.

(3) Waveform format : Selects Y-T, X-Y, or FFT as the waveform format.
X-Y display and FFT analysis are only available when SSD recording is set.
(4) Sheet selection: Selects the waveform set to display on the screen.

(7) Display switch: Switches in the order

WAVE

→

THUMBNAIL→

CURSOR→PEN REC .

THUMBNAIL

See "7.2.2 Thumbnails".

CURSOR

See "7.2.3. Cursor".

PEN REC (pen recording)

See "6.2.2 Pen Recording".

26

1WMPD4004444D

1. Name and Function of Each Block - 1.6. Screen and Setup Menu

Control bar when playback
Touch the

PLAYBACK

key on the side menu to enter the playback mode and switch the control bar

to the menu for playback.

(1)(1) Sampling speed

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

: Displays the sampling speed of the recorded data.

Printer recording: 1 kS/s(100 ms/div)

to10 S/s (10 min/div), EXT (external sampling)

SSD recording: 1 MS/s(100 μs/div)

to10 S/s (10 min/div), EXT (external sampling)(5 μs/div)

to10 S/s (10 min/div)

Memory recording : 20 MS/s
(2) Data format: Displays either NORMAL or P-P as the format for the recorded data.
Only P-P is available for printer recording.
Only NORMAL is available for memory recording.

(3) Waveform format : Selects Y-T, X-Y, or FFT as the waveform format.
X-Y display and FFT analysis are only available when SSD recording is set.
(4) Sheet selection: Selects the waveform set to display on the screen.

(5) DATA: Selects and play back recorded data.

(6) DATA information : The information of the displayed playback data.
(7) Display switch: Switches the functions in the order→

1WMPD4004444D

PEN REC .

27

WAVE

→

THUMBNAIL→

CURSOR1. Name and Function of Each Block – 1.7. Screen Input Operations

1.7.

Screen Input Operations

1.7.1.

Rotary Knob

Turn the rotary knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change numeric values and selections.
The rotary knob is enabled when the area around it is lit. The area lights blue in the standard mode andorange in the fine adjustment mode.
You can push the rotary knob to switch modes.

Turn to change settings.

Push to switch modes.

Standard mode

Fine adjustment mode

Tap a setting item to light the area aroundthe rotary knob blue.

1.7.2.

Numeric Value Input Dialog

This dialog enables you to use numeric keys to input numeric values.

(1)
(2)

Long-tap a numeric value
setting item to display thenumeric value input dialog.

(3)

(4)
(6)
(7)

(5)

(8)

Input the numeric value, and tap
OK.

(9)

28

(10)

1WMPD4004444D

1. Name and Function of Each Block – 1.7. Screen Input Operations
(1)

Max:

Displays the maximum value that can be input.
Displays the minimum value that can be input.

(2)

Min:

(3)

Display window: Displays the numeric value that has been input.

(4)

Prefix:

Enables you to select G, M, k, (none), m, µ, or n as the prefix to use for numeric value
input.

(5)

Input keys:

Enables you to input numbers, decimal points, exponential Es, plus symbols, andminus symbols in the position of the text cursor.

(6)

Clear:

Deletes the text in the display window.

(7)

Back Space:

Deletes one character to the left of the text cursor.

(8)

Input position operations:
Moves the text cursor position left or right.

(9)

OK:

Reflects the numeric value that has been input and closes the dialog box.

(10) Cancel:

1.7.3.

Closes the dialog box without reflecting the numeric value that has been input.

Selection Palette Dialog

This dialog enables you to select the item to set from a list.

Tap the item to set.
Long-tap a selection setting item
to display the selection palette dialog.

1.7.4.

Software Keyboard

The software keyboard enables you to input text.

Tap a selected text input area to display the software
keyboard.

1WMPD4004444D

29

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power

2.

Pre-Measurement Procedures

2.1.

Before Switching On the PowerThe preparations for using this product and the cautions are explained below.

2.1.1.

Installation and Usage Environment

Use this product on a flat, level surface.
When using the printer, install it so that the recording
paper is level as indicated in the figure on the right.

CAUTION
Cautions Regarding the Installation Environment
Use this product at locations that satisfy the installation requirement, the Category II (CAT II) of thesafety standard for electrical measurement instruments in EN61010-1.
This product has a Pollution Degree of 2.
Use this product in the following operating environments.
Operating temperature range: 0 to 40°C

Operating humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (without

condensation)
Do not use this product at the following locations. In addition, carefully check the environment whenusing this product.
Locations where the temperature and humidity rise due to direct sunlight or heaters
Wet locations
Locations where salt, oil, or corrosive gases exist
Dusty locations
Locations subject to strong vibrations
Locations with a strong electromagnetic field
This product is provided with ventilation openings in order to prevent overheating.
Ensure that the ventilation openings remain unobstructed by covers or materials. Otherwise, theinternal temperature of this product rises, causing malfunctions.
IntakeExhaustIntakeDo not place highly combustible objects such as paper near this product.

30

1WMPD4004444D

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the PowerWARNING
Module installation/removal and replacement must be performed after disconnecting all the cables
connected to the module, turning off the power switch of the main unit, and disconnecting thepower cable.
Insert the module along the guide rails, and securely fix the two knurled screws with a Phillips
head screwdriver. Incomplete module installation may lead to failure.
Module disassembly is extremely dangerous. It must not be performed other than by our service
engineers, as it may also lead to failure and prevent performance from being guaranteed.
Make sure to install an empty panel on slots where no module is installed. Failure to do so maylead to failure due to the intrusion of foreign material or dust. (Empty panels are shipped together
with the RA series main unit.)
When storing the module, place it inside an anti-static bag and packaging box like those it wasshipped with, as static electricity may lead to failure. This product can be stored in the range of -20
to 60°C and 20 to 85% RH (without condensation).
Connect the input signal to the module after connecting the power cable of the RA series main unit
where the module is installed to a 3-pole AC outlet, grounding it, and then turning on the power ofthe main unit.
High voltage may already be applied as the input signal. Set the measurement range of themodule to the maximum and connect the input cable to the module before connecting to the signal
source. Take care to not directly touch the conductors when connecting to the signal source, inorder to prevent electrocution.
A dedicated input cable for each module is provided to meet the specifications such as themeasurement category and insulation with stand voltage. Use the dedicated input cable for thetype of measurement.

CAUTION
When transporting this product and modules, use the package and packaging material supplied atfactory shipment, or use a package and packaging material more shock-resistant than those
supplied.
We recommend a periodical calibration to maintain the accuracy of the input units. More reliablemeasurements are possible by calibrating the input units once a year (extra cost option).

1WMPD4004444D

31

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power

2.1.2.

Installing Optional Modules

Installation Procedure
Step 1.

Turn the power OFF.

Step 2.

Disconnect the power cable.

Step 3.

Grip the handles on both edges and insert the module straight in along the guide rails.
The module type should be on the operation panel side.

Step 4.

Tighten the screws on both edges with a Phillips head screwdriver (No. 2).

Removal Procedure
Step 1.

Turn the power OFF.

Step 2.

Remove the connected input cable.

Step 3.

Disconnect the power cable.

Step 4.

Loosen the screws on both edges with a Phillips head screwdriver.

Step 5.

Grip the handles on both edges and pull the module straight out.

Step 6.

Install an empty panel if the slot will not be used.

32

1WMPD4004444D

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power

2.1.3.

Paper Loading

The procedure for loading recording paper to the printer block is indicated below.
Load the recording paper to this product. There are two types of recording paper: paper rolls and Z-foldpaper.
For information on loading Z-fold paper, see "Loading Z-fold Paper (Recording Paper)".

CAUTIONUse only the recording paper prepared exclusively for this product (YPS106 or YPS108 for paperroll and YPS112 for Z-fold paper) by our company. The quality of recording may not be guaranteed
if other recording paper is used, as paper feed problems may occur or the print quality may be
reduced.
Do not use the portion of the new roll where the recording paper tip is covered with tape, as colors
may not be printed normally on this area.

Raise the lever to open the printer cover.
Lever
Recording paper outlet
Printer coverZ-fold paper inlet

Loading Roll Paper (Recording Paper)
Step 1.

Attach the paper holders to the paper roll.
Attach a paper holder to both ends of the paper roll. If there is a gap between the recording paper
and the paper holder, the recording paper may not be able to be loaded or the recording position
may be shifted.
If there is a gap between the recording paper and the paper holder, the recording paper may not beable to be loaded or the recording position may be shifted. When loading a partially used roll, trim
the edges for ease of loading, as shown in the figure.
The inside of the roll paper is the back side and the outside is the thermal surface that is printed on.

1WMPD4004444D

33

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power
Step 2.

Open the printer cover by raising the lever of the printer block.

Pull the lever upwards.
Recording paper guide (the U-shaped groove)
Platen roller (black roller)
Recording paper outlet

Step 3.

Load the paper following the guide of this product, and press
the paper holders into the guide until a click is heard.

NOTE

Be sure the paper roll is loaded so that the thermally sensitiveside is faced toward you; if this side is faced away, the paper
cannot be printed.
If the recording paper is not loaded securely, printing problems
may occur or the recording paper may meander.
Check the winding direction carefully
Push it in so that the thermally sensitive side is faced up
Insert the paper holders into the guide of the printer block

Step 4.

Feed the recording paper to the recording paper outlet.
Insert the recording paper from above the platen roller ofthe printer block (black roller) from the recording paper
outlet of the printer cover and pull it out about 10 cm.

Step 4-1. Feed the paper to the recording paper outlet from above
the platen roller.
Step 4-2. Pull the recording paper out from the recording paper
outlet about 10 cm.
Recording paper

Step 5.

Platen roller

Close the printer cover.
After pulling the paper, close the cover firmly pressing
down on both sides (until a click is heard). Pull thepaper out keeping it straight. When using without bothsides of the paper pushed into the recording section,
recording cannot be performed correctly.

34

1WMPD4004444D

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power

Loading Z-fold Paper (Recording Paper)
To use Z-fold paper (YPS112), a Z-fold paper case (RA30-551, sold separately) is required.

<Z-fold paper>

YPS112

Length:200 m

Folded width:

30 cm

To indicate how much paper is remaining, a page number (669 to 000) is printed on each page.

<Z-fold paper box>

RA30-551

Z-fold paper case:Approx. 3 kg

Z-fold paper stock box:

Approx. 300 g

Z-fold paper adapter:

Approx. 200 g

Z-fold paper caseZ-fold paper stock box
Z-fold paper adapter

The procedures for loading the Z-fold paper are explained as follows.
Step 1.

Place this product on top of the paper case.
With the paper case opening and the printer block facing the same direction, align the metal fittingsof the case with the legs of this product.

Opening

Step 2.

Z-fold paper casePut the paper in the case.

Step 2-1. Remove the contents from the case, open the plastic bag and take out the piece of cardboard
covering the paper. Use the top cover of the case as a receptacle for the recorded paper.
Top cover (use as a receptacle
for the recorded paper)

1WMPD4004444D

Cardboard (white)35

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power
Step 2-2. Place the paper in the stock box with the thermally sensitive side (the side with blue numbers
printed on the edges) facing up.
Thermal sensitive side

Z-fold paper stock box

Step 2-3. Position the stock box so the thermal sensitive side of the paper is facing up and insert the box into
the case opening.
Thermal sensitive side

Step 3.

Z-fold paper caseOpen the printer block by raising the lever of the printer cover.
After opening the printer cover, insert the paper pulled
out from the case into the opening under the printercover.
Printer coverInsert the paper into the opening under the
printer coverZ-fold paper

Step 4.

Thread the paper through the Z-fold paper adapter.
Thread the paper inserted into the opening under
the printer cover through the Z-fold paper adapter asshown in the figure.

Recording paper route
To platen roller

Z-fold paper adapter
Z-fold paper inserted intoZ-fold paper opening
Bar for tension

36

Center side knob

1WMPD4004444D

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.1. Before Switching On the Power
Step 5.

Attach the Z-fold paper adapter to the recording paper guide of
the printer cover.
Insert the Z-fold paper adapter with paper threaded into therecording paper guide (the U-shaped groove) of this productwith the center knob facing down, and push it in until it clicks.
Bar for tension

Step 6.

Pull out the paper.
Pull out the paper threaded into the Z-fold paper adapter about
10 cm under the bar for tension.

Step 7.

Feed the paper to the recording paper outlet.
Insert the paper threaded into the Z-fold paper adapter fromabove the platen roller of the printer block (black roller) fromthe recording paper outlet of the printer bar and pull it out
about 10 cm.
Platen roller

Step 8.

Close the printer cover.
When the paper has been fed through, pull it straight out sothat it does not sag, and close the printer cover securely.

NOTE

Place the cover of the box containing the paper on the printer side of this product to use as a paper
receptacle. To ensure smooth paper output, fold one or two sheets into the receptacle before use. Notethat although Z-fold paper usually folds automatically as it is output, some environmental conditions,such as a humid atmosphere or the setting location, may cause the paper not to fold normally.

2.1.4.

Connecting an External Device

Connect the DVI-D, LAN, and COM ports of this product with the power off.

NOTE
If you remove or insert the DVI-D cable after the power has been turned on, the screen may not be
displayed, which will make it impossible to operate this product.
1WMPD4004444D

37

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.2. Turning the Power On/Off

2.2.

Turning the Power On/Off

2.2.1.

Connecting the AC Power Cable

Be sure to check the following points before connecting the AC power cable to this product.
Make sure that the power supply matches the rating indicated on the rating plate attached to thisproduct.
Ensure modules are inserted securely.

WARNING
This product must be grounded before turning on the power.
This grounding protection is for the safety of this product, as well as for that of the user and peripheral
equipment.
If the AC power cable that comes with this product is connected to a 3-pin power outlet equippedwith a protective conductor pin, this product is automatically grounded.
Do not use an extension cable without protective grounding.
Do not use this product when protective grounding cannot be performed using a power outlet thatmatches the supplied AC power cable.

NOTE

AC power cable
The AC power cable that is included in this product (1KO6165-200: 125-V AC system, 2 m) is a 3-pin
type which has a round pin at the center for protective grounding.

2.2.2.

Turning On the Power

Step 1.

Perform the check indicated below.
<Items to check before turning on the power>
Is this product installed in a safe location?
Is the usage environment OK?
Is the top of the touch panel free from any writing implements or tools, etc.?

Step 2.

Upon confirming that all of the above check items are fine, connect the inlet side of the AC power
cable to the AC socket of this product.

Step 3.

Connect the plug of the AC power cable to the power outlet.

Power outlet with ground terminal
Inlet side

Plug toto AC socket

power outlet

AC power cable
38

1WMPD4004444D

2. Pre-Measurement Procedures – 2.2. Turning the Power On/Off
Step 4.

Turn the power switch of this product on.
When the Power switch on the operation panel of thisproduct is turned on, the green LED lights up and the powerturns on.

NOTE

Standby current flows to this product when the AC power
cable is connected to the power outlet.
Remove the power cable when this product will not be used
for an extended period of time.
Power switch

2.2.3.

Confirming Normal Startup

The monitor screen of the RA3100 is displayed about one minuteafter turning the power on.

NOTE

Do not touch the touch panel until the waveform monitor isdisplayed. Doing so may lead to erroneous operations.
Immediately after purchase or initializing the main unit,
measurement is turned off for all channels and no waveform isdisplayed.

2.2.4.

Setup Date and Time

The current time is displayed on the top right of the screen, but if it
differs greatly from the actual time, the time can be adjusted.
See "8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Time

2.2.5.

Preparing for More Precise Measurements

Warm up this product for about 60 minutes after turning on the power in order to perform more precise
measurements.
After the warm up is complete, perform "Zero adjust" of the input modules.
See "4. Configuring Measurement". This completes the preparations for measurement.

2.2.6.
Step 1.

Turning Off the Power
When the Power switch on the operation panel is pressed
while the power is on, the shutdown process starts and the[Shutdown] dialog box indicated below is displayed on thecenter of the screen. Tap the OK key to shutdown thisproduct. Tap the Cancel key to continue without turning off
the power.
If the Power switch is pressed again while the [Shutdown]
dialog box is displayed, this product automatically shuts down.

CAUTION
Make sure to shutdown this product to turn off the power, as directly removing the power cable fromthe power outlet without shutting down can damage the files in the internal storage.

1WMPD4004444D

39

3. Flow of Measurement – 3.1. Flow of Measurement

3.

Flow of Measurement

3.1.

Flow of Measurement

This product records and play back input signals following the procedures described below.

Perform the checkbefore applying power"Chapter 2" Confirm that this product has been set in a safe place, and that all theaccessories are properly attached.

and turn on the power.

Select themeasurement mode.
Lower themeasurement range,"Chapter
4.1""Chapter
4.2"

and connect the signal.
Set the input channel
while viewing themethod.

mode (for manufacturers).
Note that applying a voltage greater than the maximum allowable
input voltage specified by the sensitivity setting of each input module
may cause damage to the main unit or internal components.

"Chapter
4.3"

monitor waveform.
Select the recording

Select the R&D mode (for research and development) or the MFG

Setup the input channel settings to the conditions for recording. Set
the measurement range, filter, display position, display range, and thesampling speed in the time axis direction.

"Chapter
4.4"

Select to record to recording paper only or to both a file and recording
paper.
Set the sampling speed and the recording device to save, as well as
the recording time, speed of input signal changes (frequency), and

Set the recording
device and sample
speed according"Chapter
4.5"

whether to perform analysis after recording, etc.
Printer: Low-speed long-term measurement with only the
waveform recorded

to the target for

SSD

measurement.

: Medium-speed long-term measurement for various uses

Memory : High-speed enlarged display of transient phenomena andabrupt phenomena

Set the triggers.

Start and end
recording.

Playback and analysis.

"Chapter 5""Chapter 6"

Set the triggers for starting recording.

Press theSTART

key on the operation panel to start measurement

and record the specified time and data count, and press the

STOP

key to end measurement.
Use the PLAYBACK key on the side menu to playback recorded"Chapter 7" data, the DATA key on the control bar to select data, and the
X-Y

key andFFT

key on the control bar to perform data

analysis.

40

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.1. Selecting the Measurement Mode

4.

4.1.

Configuring Measurement

Selecting the Measurement Mode

You can select one of two measurement modes: the R&D mode for research and development, which
has various functions and excellent versatility, and the MFG mode for manufacturers, which limits somefunctions for improved data transfer and recording start/stop response speed.

Tips
The R&D mode is recommended for those that want to adjust waveform analysis and settings while recording,and the MFG mode is recommended for those that want to perform continuous recording with settings
determined in advance.

4.1.1.

Characteristics

R&D mode
Nine types of recording modes (start trigger, interval, etc.)
Simultaneous recording to three recording devices (printer, SSD, and memory)
XY and FFT waveform display
Waveform pausing and enlargement/reduction
Playback and searching of recorded data

MFG mode
External transfer of measured data (TCP/UDP)
Improved response speed for starting/stopping recording

4.1.2.

Recording

Functional Differences between Measurement Modes
R&D mode

MFG mode

Recording modes

9 total2Printer recording

Yes

Yes

SSD recording

Yes

Yes

Memory recording

Yes

No

Pen recording

Yes

Yes *1

Response speed for starting/stopping recording

Waveforms

High speed

Y-T waveformYes

Yes *1

X-Y waveform

Yes

No

FFT waveform

Yes

No

Time axis scrolling of Y-T waveform

Yes

No

Yes

No

Pausing (cursor, enlargement/reduction)

Yes

No

Thumbnails

Yes

No

Data transferNo

Yes *1

Playback screen (playback and searching, etc. ofrecorded data)
FunctionStandard*2*1 Turning channel measurement on/off causes the waveform screen to be redrawn and will result inmeasurement data being temporarily lost.
*2 Normally start trigger only

1WMPD4004444D

41

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.1. Selecting the Measurement Mode

4.1.3.

Selection Method

Tap

Setup

in the Side menu to display the settings screen.

Tap

R&D

or

MFG

to select the measurement mode.

42

1WMPD4004444D

4.2.
Step 1.

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.2. Reducing the Input Sensitivity and Connecting the Input Cable

Reducing the Input Sensitivity and Connecting the Input
Cable

The input signal can be displayed and checked in real-time by switching the
PLAYBACK

key on the side menu to

Step 2.

Tap thekey on the side menu to display the channel setup sub menu.

Step 3.

When theCH

Meas. range

MEASURE/MEASURE .

key is tapped in the channel setup sub menu, the border of the key

turns orange.
The area around the rotary knob turns blue, and the rotary knob can be used to change the setting.
Step 4.

Turn the rotary knob counterclockwise to set the minimum input sensitivity.
(Turning the rotary knob clockwise increases the sensitivity.)

Channel setup sub menu
Counterclockwise
Sensitivity decreases

Clockwise
Sensitivity increases

OrangeBlue
Rotary knob

The key is selected,
the border of the key turns orange,
the area around the rotary knob turns blue,
and the rotary knob can be used to change
the setting.

Step 5.

Tap theStep 6.

To change the display slot of the input module, swipe the channel setup sub menu left or right, or
tap the

1WMPD4004444D

CHx
<

or

tab in the channel setup sub menu to change the displayed channel.
>

key on the top.
43

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.2. Reducing the Input Sensitivity and Connecting the Input Cable
Step 7.

Next, connect the insulation BNC cable (standard) to the BNC terminal of the input module.

WARNING
Do not input voltages that exceed the maximum allowed input voltage or withstand voltage to an input
module.

To input source

44

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel

4.3.

Setting the Input Channel

4.3.1.

Channel setup sub menu (for RA30-101)(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot: You can change the display slot by swiping thissub menu left or right or tapping the left
and right>

key.

Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFF(5) Color:

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

<

(3) Select channel:

ON:

(1)
(2)

Measure and record the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling in the order
DC → GND → AC.

(7) Meas. range:
Change the measurement range of the input
channel. When this key is tapped, the rotaryknob is enabled (the LED lights up) and therange can be selected by turning the knob.
(8) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter of the input
channel. When this key is tapped, the rotaryknob is enabled (the LED lights up) and the(18)filter can be selected by turning the knob.
(9) A.A.F.:

Turns the anti-aliasing filter of the input channel on or off.

(10) Disp. pos.: Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area. Specified as a percentage indicating the center position of thedisplay range from the bottom of the graph when the full range of each graph is 100%.
(11) Disp. range: Specifies the display width in the amplitude direction of each graph.
Specified (by tapping the key and turning the knob) as the percentage of the display widthwith the full range of each graph at 100%.
Example) When 50% is set, the waveform display is 10 div of the total width of 20 div.
(12) Disp. min:Set (by tapping the key and turning the knob) the display lower limit value (scale value) of
the bottom of the display range.

(13) Disp. max: Set (by tapping the key and turning the knob) the display upper limit value (scale value) of
the top of the display range.
(14) Sheet:

Set the monitor display/printer print sheet of the set channel.

(15) Graph:

Set the graph.
When this key is tapped, the rotary knob is enabled (the LED lights up) and the graph canbe changed by turning the knob.

(16) Waveform display area:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed. When disabled, the waveform is not displayed.
1WMPD4004444D

45

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel(17) Zero adjust: Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.
(18) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and value of the input value.

4.3.2.

Setup the input channels

The input waveform is displayed on the monitor when a signal is connected to the input module.
The overall procedure for setting the input channel is indicated below. See the following for details on each step.
Step 1.

Set coupling. (When the input module is a voltage module)

Step 2.

Set Meas. range according to the target for measurement.

Step 3.

Set the input filter.

Step 4.

Set the waveform division.

Step 5.

Set the display range and display position.

Step 6.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.

Step 7.

Execute zero adjust.

Description of Step 1 (setting coupling)
Select the input coupling using the
Tap theCoupling

Coupling

key in the channel setup sub menu.

key and turn the rotary knob to change the setting in the order DC → GND → AC.

Coupling
DC
AC
GND

Contents
Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.
Measures the AC component of the input signal only. Set this when you want to measure
only the amplitude of an AC signal, as it cancels the DC offset of the signal.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside the channel.
Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printer recording.

46

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel

Description of Step 2 (setting the measurement range)
The input sensitivity can be changed in

Meas. range

in the channel setup sub menu.

The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the input (measurement) maximum
value and corresponds to 10 div on the waveform monitor. When the display position is 50%, the fullmeasurement range of ±RANGE (20 div) is displayed.
When theMeas. range

key is tapped in the channel setup sub menu, the border turns orange, thearea around the rotary knob turns blue, and the rotary knob can be changed.
Turn the rotary knob counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity and clockwise to increase the sensitivity.
The setting values of the measurement range differ according to the type of input module.

Tips
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom rightof the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning
beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Description of Step 3 (setting the filter)
Set the filter of the selected channel.
This cuts out unnecessary frequency components and noise. As the filter differs according to the input
module type, set the filter according to the characteristics of the input signal and measurement.
Low-pass filter (L.P.F.)
A gently sloping attenuation filter. Set the cutoff frequency in consideration of the frequency of the input
signal.
Anti-aliasing filter (A.A.F.)
A steeply sloping attenuation low-pass filter. Enable this filter to automatically set the filter so thataliasing of the A/D data does not occur due to the sampling speed.

1WMPD4004444D

47

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel

Description of Step 4 (setting graph division)"Graph" refers to the area in the Y-T waveform monitor where a channel waveform can be displayed.
The graph area can be divided into 1 to 18 graphs.

→

1 graph

4 graphs

Graph 1Graph 2Graph 3Graph 448

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel

Description of Step 5 (setting the display range and display position (waveform displayarea))
When displaying multiple channels, it may be difficult to recognize them because the waveforms
overlap. Reducing the input sensitivity in the measurement range decreases the amplitude and changes
the display position, which can stop the waveforms from overlapping and make them easier torecognize, but this also reduces the resolution of the data. The display range and display position
settings can be used to change the display scale and display position of the waveform amplitude
direction without reducing the resolution of the data of the channel being displayed.
Disp. range: The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area in the graphspecified as the percentage of the display width when the full range of each graph in thevertical direction is 100%.
Example) When 40% is set, the waveform display is reduced to 8 div of the total width of
20 div.
Disp. pos.: Specify the position of the graph to display the specified range of the waveform display
area. Specified as a percentage indicating the center position of the display range from thebottom of the graph when the full range of each graph in the vertical direction is 100%.
When theDisp. range

key or

Disp. pos.

key is tapped, the rotary knob is enabled and the setting

value can be changed by turning the knob. The key can also be pressed and held to display numerickeys for directly entering values.
Relationship between the display range and display position of the input channel
100%

Graph
(Waveform display area)(Center position of
display range)

Display range N% of total
Total of 100%X% from bottom of display position
0%

1WMPD4004444D

49

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.3. Setting the Input Channel

Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform
display scale))
If the amplitude of the input signal is smaller than the set range, the signal change may be hard torecognize.
In this case, you can change the scale of the upper limit value and lower limit value for the display range
to enlarge the amplitude of the displayed signal.
Disp. max: Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.
Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

When theDisp. maxor

Disp. minkey is tapped, the rotary knob is enabled and the setting value

can be changed by turning the knob. The key can also be pressed and held to display numeric keys for
directly entering values.
Relationship between the display maximum and display minimum of the input channel
Graph
Display maximum
Display range

Display minimum
Display position

NOTE

If the sensitivity of the measurement range is increased to enlarge the amplitude, the amplitude of the
input signal will only become a little bigger and the range may be exceeded or the input maximum value
may not be able to be read, etc.
If the display is enlarged by changing the scale, the recorded data is recorded until the value set in themeasurement range, and the display can only be enlarged.

Description of Step 7 (zero adjust)
After turning on the power, the internal temperature of this product will rise as time elapses, and causetemperature drift inside the input module, which leads to errors in the measurement data.
Execute zero adjust to cancel these errors.
In order to perform measurement with few errors, let this product warm up for 60 minutes after turningon the power, then tap the

Zero adjust

key in the channel setup sub menu to cancel the input drift.

This function may not be available, depending on the type of input module.

NOTE

This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the input signal.

50

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.4. Selecting the Recording Method

4.4.

Selecting the Recording Method

4.4.1.

Recording to Recording Paper Only

Select the recording method, depending on whether to save the measurement data to a file.

Perform "pen recording" to record to recording paper only, without saving a file.
See "6.2.2. Pen Recording" and "6.2.3 Text to Print Function".

4.4.2.

Recording to a File and Recording Paper

Save the measurement data to a file and print it to recording paper.
This function provides the following.
Nine types of recording modes (start trigger, interval, etc.)
Simultaneous recording to three recording devices (printer, SSD, and memory)
Enabling/disabling of real-time waveform printing
Memory recording via memory triggers at 18 trigger sources
Starting recording via start triggers at arbitrary timing
See "6.3 Starting and Ending Recording".

1WMPD4004444D

51

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.5. Recording Setup

4.5.

Recording Setup

4.5.1.

Setup the Sampling Speed

An image of the waveform recorded on the selected recording device (PRINTER, SSD, or MEMORY) is
displayed on the waveform monitor.
The sampling speed of the image waveform recorded on the selected recording device is displayed on
the left edge of the control bar.

An image of the waveformrecorded on the selected
device is displayed on the
waveform monitor.

Tap to display the selectable sampling speed table.

Tap the sampling speed to

Drag the table to the left or rightdisplay the waveform sampled at

to display the hidden speed table.

that speed.

When the sampling speed is decided, tap

OKon the right edge to close the table.

52

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.5. Recording Setup

4.5.2.

Sampling Speed of Recording Device

There are three types of recording device (PRINTER, SSD, and MEMORY).
The sampling speed setting range and characteristics of each device are indicated below.
Setting range

100 ms/div (1 kS/s)

to

10 min/div (10 S/min),

EXT. (external sampling)
Records the waveform to the long-term printer at low speed.
Because the waveform is directly recorded to the recording paper, it is

PRINTEReasy to confirm the input signal and suitable for viewing long-term
Characteristics

trends.
The recorded data is internally sampled at 20 MS/s and the waveform isrecorded with P-P data, which enables recording of high-speed signals
without loss.

Setting range

100 μs/div(1 MS/s)to

10 min/div (10 S/min),

EXT. (external sampling)
Records the long-term data to the SSD at medium speed.
NORMAL or P-P can be selected for the recorded data.

SSD
Characteristics

When recorded with NORMAL data, FFT analysis or X-Y waveforms are
possible in addition to standard Y-T waveforms.
For P-P data, the data can be recorded for extended periods at a speed
where the printer cannot record.

Setting range

5 μs/div(20 MS/s)

to

10 min/div (10 S/min)

Records the data to the internal memory with high-speed sampling.
The data is recorded when the trigger conditions set in advance are
MEMORYdetected, and recording automatically ends when the specified sample
Characteristics

count has been recorded.
Only NORMAL can be selected for the recorded data.
This is suitable for sudden input signals, rise/fall time, and measurementof the delay between signals.

For information on NORMAL/P-P sampling, see "10.2. Sampling Data Format". For a comparisonof the printer sampling speed and chart speed (mm/s) of previous products, see "10.3.3.
Relationship between Sampling Speed and Chart Speed".

Tips

If there are 19 or more measurement channels, the maximum sampling speed for memory recording willbe 10 MS/s. If the sampling speed was set to 20 MS/s, it will be automatically changed to 10 MS/s.

1WMPD4004444D

53

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.5. Recording Setup

4.5.3.

Maximum Recordable Times

The maximum recordable times when the internal SSD is empty are indicated in the table below.

4.5.3.1.

Printer recording

Sampling speed

Number of measurement channels
1 channel

2 channels

8 channels

18 channels

36 channels

1 kS/s100 days

100 days

85 days, 12 hours

39 days, 7 hours

19 days, 22 hours

500 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

78 days, 14 hours

39 days, 20 hours

200 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

99 days, 14 hours

100 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

5 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

2 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

1 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

4.5.3.2.

SSD Recording (Normal)

Sampling speed

Number of measurement channels
1 channel

2 channels

8 channels

18 channels

36 channels

1 MS/s17 hours, 26 minutes

11 hours, 37 minutes

3 hours, 52 minutes

1 hour, 50 minutes

56 minutes, 35 seconds

500 kS/s

1 day, 10 hours

23 hours, 15 minutes

7 hours, 45 minutes

3 hours, 40 minutes

1 hour, 53 minutes

200 kS/s

3 days, 15 hours

2 days, 10 hours

19 hours, 23 minutes

9 hours, 11 minutes

4 hours, 42 minutes

100 kS/s

7 days, 6 hours

4 days, 20 hours

1 day, 14 hours

18 hours, 22 minutes

9 hours, 25 minutes

50 kS/s

14 days, 12 hours

9 days, 16 hours

3 days, 5 hours

1 day, 12 hours

18 hours, 51 minutes

20 kS/s

36 days, 8 hours

24 days, 5 hours

8 days, 1 hour

3 days, 19 hours

1 day, 23 hours

10 kS/s

72 days, 16 hours

48 days, 11 hours

16 days, 3 hours

7 days, 15 hours

3 days, 22 hours

5 kS/s100 days

96 days, 22 hours

32 days, 7 hours

15 days, 7 hours

7 days, 20 hours

2 kS/s100 days

100 days

80 days, 18 hours

38 days, 6 hours

19 days, 15 hours

1 kS/s100 days

100 days

100 days

76 days, 12 hours

39 days, 7 hours

500 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

78 days, 14 hours

200 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

5 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

2 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

1 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

54

1WMPD4004444D

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.5. Recording Setup

4.5.3.3.

SSD Recording (P-P)
Number of measurement channels

Sampling speed
500 kS/s

1 channel

2 channels

23 hours, 15 minutes 13 hours, 57 minutes

8 channels

18 channels

36 channels

4 hours, 6 minutes

1 hour, 53 minutes

57 minutes, 22 seconds

200 kS/s

2 days, 10 hours

1 day, 10 hours

10 hours, 15 minutes

4 hours, 42 minutes

2 hours, 23 minutes

100 kS/s

4 days, 20 hours

2 days, 21 hours

20 hours, 31 minutes

9 hours, 25 minutes

4 hours, 46 minutes

50 kS/s

9 days, 16 hours

5 days, 19 hours

1 day, 17 hours

18 hours, 51 minutes

9 hours, 33 minutes

20 kS/s

24 days, 5 hours

14 days, 12 hours

4 days, 6 hours

1 day, 23 hours

23 hours, 54 minutes

10 kS/s

48 days, 11 hours

29 days, 1 hour

8 days, 13 hours

3 days, 22 hours

1 day, 23 hours

5 kS/s96 days, 22 hours

58 days, 3 hours

17 days, 2 hours

7 days, 20 hours

3 days, 23 hours

2 kS/s100 days

100 days

42 days, 18 hours

19 days, 15 hours

9 days, 23 hours

1 kS/s100 days

100 days

85 days, 12 hours

39 days, 7 hours

19 days, 22 hours

500 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

78 days, 14 hours

39 days, 20 hours

200 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

99 days, 14 hours

100 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

5 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

2 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

1 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

1WMPD4004444D

55

4. Configuring Measurement – 4.5. Recording Setup

4.5.3.4.

Memory recording

Sampling speed

Number of measurement channels
1 channel

2 channels

8 channels

18 channels

36 channels

20 MS/s

1 minute, 40 seconds

50 seconds

10 seconds

5 seconds-

10 MS/s

3 minutes, 20 seconds 1 minute, 40 seconds

20 seconds

10 seconds

5 seconds

5 MS/s6 minutes, 40 seconds 3 minutes, 20 seconds

40 seconds

20 seconds

10 seconds

2 MS/s16 minutes, 40 seconds 8 minutes, 20 seconds 1 minute, 40 seconds

50 seconds

25 seconds

1 MS/s33 minutes, 20 seconds 16 minutes, 40 seconds 3 minutes, 20 seconds 1 minute, 40 seconds

50 seconds

500 kS/s

1 hour, 6 minutes

33 minutes, 20 seconds 6 minutes, 40 seconds 3 minutes, 20 seconds 1 minute, 40 seconds

200 kS/s

2 hours, 46 minutes

1 hour, 23 minutes

16 minutes, 40 seconds 8 minutes, 20 seconds 4 minutes, 10 seconds

100 kS/s

5 hours, 33 minutes

2 hours, 46 minutes

33 minutes, 20 seconds 16 minutes, 40 seconds 8 minutes, 20 seconds

50 kS/s

11 hours, 6 minutes

5 hours, 33 minutes

1 hour, 6 minutes

33 minutes, 20 seconds 16 minutes, 40 seconds

20 kS/s

1 day, 3 hours

13 hours, 53 minutes

2 hours, 46 minutes

1 hour, 23 minutes

41 minutes, 40 seconds

10 kS/s

2 days, 7 hours

1 day, 3 hours

5 hours, 33 minutes

2 hours, 46 minutes

1 hour, 23 minutes

5 kS/s4 days, 15 hours

2 days, 7 hours

11 hours, 6 minutes

5 hours, 33 minutes

2 hours, 46 minutes

2 kS/s11 days, 13 hours

5 days, 18 hours

1 day, 3 hours

13 hours, 53 minutes

6 hours, 56 minutes

1 kS/s23 days, 3 hours

11 days, 13 hours

2 days, 7 hours

1 day, 3 hours

13 hours, 53 minutes

500 S/s46 days, 7 hours

23 days, 3 hours

4 days, 15 hours

2 days, 7 hours

1 day, 3 hours

200 S/s

100 days

57 days, 20 hours

11 days, 13 hours

5 days, 18 hours

2 days, 21 hours

100 S/s

100 days

100 days

23 days, 3 hours

11 days, 13 hours

5 days, 18 hours

50 S/s100 days

100 days

46 days, 7 hours

23 days, 3 hours

11 days, 13 hours

20 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

57 days, 20 hours

28 days, 22 hours

10 S/s100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

57 days, 20 hours

5 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

2 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

1 S/s

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

50 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

20 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

10 S/min

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

100 days

56

1WMPD4004444D

5.

5.1.

5. Trigger Setup – 5.1. Trigger Types

Trigger Setup
Trigger Types

This product has two types of triggers: Memory triggers for memory recording and Start triggers forstarting recording.

5.2.

Memory trigger

Memory trigger is a signal for enabling memory recording, and is occurred when the trigger conditions of
the channel specified in the trigger source are established.

When a trigger is detected, memory recording is performed with the data count set in the pre-trigger andmemory block size, which represents a single recording operation. When the number of blocks to record
is set to a multiple number, recording starts for the next block when one block has finished recording.
Press

START

key

End recording
Recording time

During record
Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred

5.2.1.

Trigger occurred Trigger occurred

Memory Trigger Setup

Step 1.

Tap theCH

key on the side menu to display the channel setup sub menu.

Step 2.

Tap theTriggertab on the bottom right of the channel setup sub menu to display the trigger

setup screen.

Step 1
Step 2

1WMPD4004444D

57

5. Trigger Setup – 5.2. Memory trigger
Step 3.

Up to 18 trigger sources ( T1toT18 ) can be set.

Tap the number of the trigger source to set to display the details screen.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)

(6)
(1) Trigger menu selection:
Switches between the Memory trigger, Start trigger, or Memory block menu
(2) Channel:

Selects the TRIGn source channel.

(3) Detection:

Selects UP, DOWN, INTO WIN, or OUT WIN for the polarity of the trigger signal.
UP

The trigger is detected when the value exceeds the trigger level (threshold).

DOWN

The trigger is detected when the value is below the trigger level (threshold).

INTO WIN

The trigger is detected when the value enters the range of the upper limit

OUT WIN

The trigger is detected when the value leaves the range of the upper limit

value or lower limit value of the trigger level.
value or lower limit value of the trigger level.
(4) Threshold: Sets the trigger level (threshold).
For INTO WIN / OUT WIN, there are two settings: the upper threshold and lower threshold.
(5) Filter:

Sets the filter time for noise removal.

(6) Close:

Ends the setting operation and returns to the trigger list.

CAUTION
The trigger level is a value relative to the set measurement range. The value also changes when themeasurement range is changed.
(Example)

When the trigger level is set to 10 mV when the range is 100 mV, and then themeasurement range is changed to 200 mV, the trigger level is changed to 20 mV.

58

1WMPD4004444D

5. Trigger Setup – 5.2. Memory trigger
Change thresholdwith rotary knob

Trigger source
Channel signal

Trigger point

The threshold (trigger
level) is displayed in red
Press and hold thethreshold, and change
the threshold with thenumeric keys
When the trigger direction is set to UP,
the trigger point is when the input signal
exceeds the trigger level

Description of trigger source (3) Detection and (4) Threshold
When the OR/AND trigger is used:(3) Trigger detection when the UP/DOWN trigger is selected for

detection.
Trigger UP
ThresholdInput signal
Trigger DOWN

When the window trigger is used:(3) Trigger detection when the INTO WIN / OUT WIN trigger isselected for detection.
Trigger OUT WIN

Trigger INTO WIN

Upper threshold
Input signal
Lower threshold
Trigger OUT WIN

1WMPD4004444D

59

Trigger INTO WIN

5. Trigger Setup – 5.3. Pre-Trigger

Description of trigger source (5) Filter
Trigger filter
The trigger filter function ensures that a trigger is detected when the trigger conditions are met for a
specified period of time, in order to prevent erroneous trigger detection due to noise or chattering in thesignal near the trigger level.

Trigger detection point
Trigger level
CHn input signal
T Trigger filter

5.3.

Pre-Trigger

When performing memory recording, a pre-trigger can be set to adjust the recording length before andafter the trigger detection point in the memory block.
Trigger detection
Trigger level

End measurement

Start measurement
Input signal
Pre-Trigger(Post-trigger)

30%

(70%)
Memory block

5.3.1.

Pre-Trigger Setup

Tap theSETUP

key on the side menu to display the setup menu.

Tap theRecordingtab in the recording setup to display the recording setup screen.

The recording device settings are displayed below the recording setup.
Tap

Pre-Trigger

on the right of memory recording to set the pre-trigger.

60

1WMPD4004444D

5.4.

5. Trigger Setup – 5.4. Start Trigger

Start Trigger

The start trigger function starts recording when the trigger conditions are established for the channel
specified in the trigger source. Press the

START

key on the operation panel to put this product in thestandby state.
Printer recording, SSD recording, and memory recording start when the start trigger is detected.
Press

START

key

Start trigger occurs

End recording
Recording time

During record

Standby state waiting
for start trigger to

Printer recording

start recording

SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred

5.4.1.

Start Trigger Setup

Step 1.

Tap theCH

key on the side menu to display the channel setup sub menu.

Step 2.

Tap theTrigger

Step 3.

Tap thetrigger menu selection

tab on the bottom right of the sub menu to display the trigger setup screen.
on the top of the trigger setup screen (1) to display [Start

trigger].
(1) Trigger menu selection:
Switches the menu.
(2) Channel:

Selects the start trigger source channel.

(3) Detection:

Selects UP, DOWN, INTO WIN, or OUT WIN for thepolarity of the trigger signal.

(4) Threshold: Sets the trigger level (threshold).
(5) Filter:

Sets the filter time for noise removal.

The setup and operations of (1) to (5) are the same as "5.2 Memory
trigger".

1WMPD4004444D

61

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.1. State Transition of Main Unit Operation

6.

Measuring Input Signals

6.1.

State Transition of Main Unit Operation

This product is divided into three states according to the operation state: measure, record, andplayback.
The

PRINT

key can also be pressed in the measurement state to perform pen recording (real-time

waveform printing).TheSTART

key can also be pressed in the measure state to perform printerrecording, SSD recording, and memory recording.
Measurement screen
POWER

Pen recording screen
PRINT

key

STOP

key

switch

ON
or
PRINT

key

Waveform recording
Stop recording
START

key

or
STOP

key

PLAYBACK

key

MEASURE

key

Record screen

Playback screen

START

key

During recording, the screen isDuring playback, the screen is

enclosed in a red frame.

enclosed in a green frame.

NOTEWith software version 1.x.x, this product automatically switches from the recording screen to theplayback screen after recording is complete.

62

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

6.2.

Monitor Display and Pen Recording

6.2.1.

Monitor Display Function

Tap the recording device selection in the side menu to display the image waveform recorded on theselected device on the waveform monitor.

Printer recording

SSD recording

Memory recording

1WMPD4004444D

63

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

Pausing
Tap thePAUSE

key on the waveform monitor to stop the monitor.

In this state, you can pinch in (reduce) or pinch out (expand) the waveform on the waveform monitor.
You can also use one finger to drag the screen up, down, left, or right to move the display area.
Zoom ratio

Pinch in (reduce)

Pinch out (enlarge)

Move display area

Trigger Synchronization
When the recording device is set to

MEMORY , a trigger is set, andTRIG.SYNC.

is enabled, thelatest waveform is displayed with the displayed waveform synchronized to trigger detection.
Trigger detection point

64

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

Sampling speed
Use theSampling speed

key on the left edge of the control bar to change the sampling speed

according to the recording device. Set the optimal sampling speed while viewing the monitor waveform.

Set the optimal sampling speed while viewing the monitor waveform.
For details, see "4.5.1. Setup the Sampling Speed".

X-Y Waveform and FFT Analysis
When

SSD

is selected as the recording device andNORMALis selected as the data format,

FFT analysis and the X-Y waveform display for the control bar waveform format are enabled.

X-Y waveform conditions
Recording device:

SSD

Sampling speed:

1 kS/s or lower

Data format:

NORMAL

Analog input amp:

2 channels or above

X-Y waveform (Single screen format)

FFT Analysis
FFT analysis conditions
Recording device:

SSD

Sampling speed:

1 MS/s or lower

Data format:

NORMAL

Analog input amp:

1 channel or 2 channels

1WMPD4004444D

65

X-Y waveform (Quad screen format)

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

6.2.2.

Pen Recording

Pen recording enables waveform printing to the recording paper without saving the measurement data.
This enables single-touch simple and certain waveform recording like a conventional pen recorder.

Pen Recording
Press thePRINT

key on the operation panel when the waveform format is set toY-T

to perform

real-time waveform printing of the displayed sheet.
The chart speed (sampling speed) and input module settings can be changed while executing pen
recording.

Press thePRINT

key on theoperation panel to start waveformrecording with the printer.

Pen Recording Mode
When

PRINTERbar and selectis selected as the recording device, tap the menu on the right edge of the control

PEN REC

to enter the pen recording mode, which enables unique functions forrecording to recording paper.

(1)(1) Sampling speed set in

(2)
WAVE

(3)

(4)

(5)

on the control bar(2) Chart speed (6 point): Frequently used recording speeds can be registered in the preferences to enable
single-touch chart speed settings. See "8.2.5 Other setup".
(3) FEED:The recording paper is fed (idle feeding) while this is pressed.

(4) Print annotation:

Tap this key during waveform recording to print annotations together with the
waveform at a timing of your choice.
For information on annotations, see "6.2.3 Text to Print Function".

66

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

Setting the Chart Speed Keys
Follow the procedure below to set the chart speed keys.
Step 1.

Tap theSETUP

key on the side menu to display

the setup menu.
Step 2.

Tap

Printerin [■ Recording setup] to display theprinter related menu.

Step 3.

Tap

Other setup

on the top of the [Printer] setup

screen to display the chart speed key settings.

Step 4.

Tap

Chart speed key 1

toChart speed key 6

to display the setting dialog. Tap the desired chart
speed to set.

1WMPD4004444D

67

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

6.2.3.

Text to Print Function

This product has a function for printing header, annotation, and footer text before, during, and after
waveform recording with the printer.
Annotations are automatically overlaid on the waveform and printed every 300 mm. Tap the
annotation

Print

key on the control bar during waveform recording to print at a timing of your choice.

When CH name printing is enabled, the CH name is printed before printing the waveform.

Printing example
Header printing

Prints CH namePrints annotations Press thePrints a header before

before printing

overlaid on the

PRINT

printing the waveformthe waveform

waveform

Recording ends after printing the footer.

68

STOP

key orkey to end waveform printing.

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

Setting the Text to Print
Step 1.

Tap theSETUP

key on the side menu todisplay the setup menu.
Step 2.

Tap

Printerin [■ Recording setup] to display

the printer related setup menu.
Tap [Header], [Annotation], or [Footer] todisplay the corresponding settings screen.
The setting method is the same for each.

(1) Select the text to print.
(2) Input text in the text area.
Double-tap the text area to display the software(1)

keyboard (9). Enter the text to print from the(2)

keyboard.
(3) TheDelete text

key clears one row.

(4) TheDelete all

key clears all the input text.

(5) TheInsert row

key inserts one row in the

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

specified row position.
(6) TheDelete row

key deletes the specified row

and brings the lower rows up.
(7) The

PRINT

(7)
(8)

key prints the text ((2)) to therecording paper.
(8) TheImport/Export

key exports (backs up) text toexternal media (such as an SD memory card or USB
stick) or imports (reads) the text backed up to external
media.
(9) Software keyboard
Double-tap the position to input text to display thesoftware keyboard.
(9)

1WMPD4004444D

69

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

Importing and Exporting
The

Import/Export

key enables the header,annotation, and footer text set in the main unit to be
saved to or imported from external media. On theimport/export screen, a list of the text set in the main
unit is displayed on the left and a list of the text saved toexternal media is displayed on the right.
Text in internal storage
File list on external media

ExportSave the text set in the main unit to external
media. Place a check mark on the left of thetext to save (for example, annotations), and tap
theExportkey in the center to save theannotation text to external media.
Place a check mark on the text to save
Tap theEnter the file name and tap the

ExportkeyOK

key tosave the text to external media with thespecified file name.

Saved with the specified file name

NOTE

The import/output folder of external media is fixed to "(drive name of external media)¥RA3100¥Text¥".

The text file is "filename.txt" and the file extension is ".txt".
To create a text file using the text editor on a computer and import it to the RA3100, create the above
folder and insert the file in that folder.
The above folder is automatically created by executing the export process.
It is recommended that you execute the export process once to ensure the correct folder name.

70

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.2. Monitor Display and Pen Recording

ImportReads a text file saved to external media to the main unit.
Place a check mark on the file to import in the text file list on the right of the import/export screen andtap theImportkey on the center to display the dialog box for selecting the import destination.

Select the import destination and tap theOK

key to read the text file.

Place a check mark on the text to readTap theImportkey

Select header, annotations, or footer

Print Setup
Tap

SETUP

in the side menu →[■ Recording setup] →Printing

Printer→to display the [Printing] setup

screen, where the information printed while
printing the waveform with printerrecording can be set.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Header:

Prints the header text/CH name before printing the waveform.

(2) Annotation:

Prints annotations together with the waveform.

(3) Footer:

Prints the footer/scale after waveform printing ends.

(4) Grid:

Selects the grid to print while printing the waveform.

(5) Date:

Prints the date and time of recording while printing the waveform.

(6) Data name:Prints the data name while printing the waveform.

(7) Time axis:

Prints the time below the recording while printing the waveform.

(8) Recording speed: Prints the recording speed (sampling/chart speed) while printing the waveform.
(9) Print lines:

Specify the print position of the date/recording name, trigger/mark, time axis, andrecording speed using line numbers.

1WMPD4004444D

71

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording

6.3.

Starting and Ending Recording

This product has three recording devices: printer, memory, or SSD. When recording is enabled for adevice, the data recorded to each device is recorded to the SSD while it is recorded to the device.
For the printer, the waveform data (P-P values) printed to the recording paper are also recorded to the

SSD.
For the memory, the memory data is recorded to the SSD when memory recording ends.

6.3.1.
Tap

Recording Setup
SETUP

→

Recording setup

on the side menu.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6) (8)
(9)

(10)

72

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(1) Mode:

Selects the optimal mode from the nine recording modes.

(2) Data name:Specifies the name of the recorded data.
When [Automatic numbering] is enabled, numbers are automatically appended
to the name.

(3) Recording time:Ends recording after recording for the specified time after recording starts.

(4) Start time:

Starts recording at the specified time after starting measurement with
the START(5) Interval time:

key.

Performs recording at the specified interval. Recording ends when recording
has been performed the number of times specified in [Number of Recording
times].

(6) Recording device:

Enables/disables recording to the recording device (Printer, SSD, or Memory).
The devices can be set independently.

(7) Printer:

Enables/disables printer recording.
When enabled, the P-P data is recorded to the SSD with sampling of printerrecording.

Real-time printing:

When printer recording is enabled, real-time printing to the printer can be
enabled/disabled.
When enabled, the waveform of the specified sheet is printed from the printerwhile saving the data of the printer recording.
When disabled, printing to the printer is not performed.

(8) SSD:

Enables/disables [SSD].

(9) Memory:

Enables/disables [Memory].

Points:Specifies the sampling count (the data count per channel) to record for eachmemory recording.

Recording blocks:

Specifies the number of blocks to record for memory recording.

Endless mode:

When the endless mode is enabled, the blocks start to be overwritten from thefirst block when the record blocks are full.

Pre-trigger:

Sets the pre-trigger in the memory block.

(10) Thumbnail:Specifies the channels to display thumbnails for and the compression rate.

Mode
This product has nine recording modes to enable complex measurement to be easily set.
Press theMode

key to display an explanation of each recording mode on the monitor and select amode suitable for the measurement to perform.
(1) Standard(6) Start trigger + Interval (N times)(2) Start time(7) Start time + interval (N times)(3) Start trigger(8) Start time + Start trigger + interval (N times)(4) Interval (N times)(9) Window recording(5) Start time + Start trigger

1WMPD4004444D

73

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(1) Standard
Press

START

key

End recording
Recording time

During record
Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When thein the

START

Setup

key on the operation panel is pressed, recording to the various devices specified

menu starts, and continues until the time set in

setup elapses or the

STOP

Recording timein the recording

key on the operation panel is pressed. Memory recording records the

input data to memory when the trigger is occurred after recording starts. Data recording is not
performed unless a trigger is detected.

(2) Start time
Press

START

key

Start time

End recording
Recording time

During record
Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement standby

state and recording to the various devices starts at thecontinues until the time set in

Recording time

Start time

set in the recording setup, andin the recording setup elapses or the

STOP key on

74

1WMPD4004444D

the operation panel is pressed.

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(3) Start trigger
Start trigger occurs
Press

START

key

End recording
Recording time

During record
Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement

standby state. Recording to the various devices starts when the channel trigger specified intriggeris occurred and continues until the time set inelapses or the

STOP

Recording timeStart

in the recording setup

key on the operation panel is pressed.

(4) Interval (N times)
Interval time
Press

START

key

1 timeN times

End recording

Recording time

Recording time

During record

During record

Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, recording to the various devices starts andcontinues until the time set in

Recording time

recording starts when the time inInterval timein the recording setup elapses, and then the next
elapses after measurement starts. Measurement ends

when recording has been performed the number of times specified in
the interval.

1WMPD4004444D

75

Number of Recording timesfor6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(5) Start time + Start trigger
Start trigger occurs
Press

START

End recording

key

Recording time

Start time

During record

Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement

standby state after the time set inchannel trigger specified intime

Start time . Recording to the various devices starts when theStart trigger

in the recording setup elapses or theis occurred, and continues until the time set in
STOP

Recording

key on the operation panel is pressed.

(6) Start trigger + Interval (N times)
Start trigger occurs
Press

START

key

Interval time

Start trigger occurs

1 timeN times

End recording

Recording time

Recording time

During record

During record

Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement

standby state and recording starts when the channel trigger specified in
Measurement continues until the time set in
the next recording starts when the time in

Recording time
Interval time

Start trigger

is occurred.

in the recording setup elapses, and thenelapses after recording starts, and thisproduct waits for the next start trigger.

76

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(7) Start time + Interval (N times)
Interval time
Press

START

key

Start time

1 timeN times

End recording

Recording time

Recording time

During record

During record

Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement

standby state. Recording starts at the time set inin

Start time , then continues recording for the time set

Recording time .

Measurement repeats at the interval set inInterval time .

(8) Start time + Start trigger + Interval (N times)
Start trigger occurs
Press

START

key

Interval time
1 timeStart time

Start trigger occurs
N times

End recording

Recording time

Recording time

During record

During record

Printer recording
SSD recording
Memory recording
Trigger occurred Trigger occurred Trigger occurred
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, this product enters the measurement

standby state and starts the procedure indicated in "(6) Start trigger + Interval (N times)" at the time set
inStart time .

1WMPD4004444D

77

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording(9) Window recording
Press

START

key

Press

STOP

key to end

During record
Recording time

Window recording
SSD recording
When theSTART

key on the operation panel is pressed, recording to the various devices starts, andcontinues until the

STOP

key on the operation panel is pressed. The data of the time set in

Recording time

until stop is recorded to the SSD.

78

1WMPD4004444D

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording

6.3.2.

Starting and Ending Recording

Start recording
When you perform either of the following operations,recording starts and this product switches to therecording screen. The screen is enclosed in a redframe.
Press theSTART

key on the operation panel

Set the START/STOP IN signal of the remotecontrol module to LOW
Send a start recording command to the LAN or
COM port

Red frame

Stop recording
When you perform either of the following operations,recording ends and this product switches to themeasurement screen. The red frame disappears.
Wait for the recording time to end
Press theSTOP

key on the operation panel

Set the START/STOP IN signal of the remotecontrol module to HIGH
Send an end recording command to the LAN or
COM port

1WMPD4004444D

79

6. Measuring Input Signals – 6.3. Starting and Ending Recording

6.3.3.

Pausing Recording and Scrolling Back

Start recording with the printer recorded or SSD recorded waveform displayed on the waveform monitor.
The

PAUSE

key can be tapped on the side menu during recording to stop the monitor waveform but

continue recording. Since this product is still in the recording state, [MEASURE] is selected on the side
menu and the waveform frame remains red. Scroll the waveform monitor to the right in this state toscroll the waveform back and check the past waveform that has already been recorded. Scroll the
waveform monitor to the left to display the waveform recorded after pausing. You can also pinch in(reduce)/pinch out (expand) the waveform.
Tap thePAUSE

key again to monitor the waveform with the latest data.

Scroll the waveform

Tap thePAUSE

key tostop the monitor.

Pinch in (reduce)

Pinch out (enlarge)

80

1WMPD4004444D

7.

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.1. Select Recorded Data

Playback Recorded Data

To playback recorded data, tap

PLAYBACKforMEASURE/PLAYBACKon the side menu toswitch the monitor to the playback screen.

PLAYBACK key
Select recording device

Waveform format

7.1.

Tap theData selection key

Select Recorded Data
DATA

selection key on the control bar to display the recorded data list indicated below.

Select the data and tap theOK

key to display that waveform.

Data name:

The recording name set in the recording settings. Setting an easy-to-understand nameDate/Time:

The date and time that the data was recorded

Recording info:

Displays information on the selected recorded data.

when recording makes it easier to search for the data to playback.

1WMPD4004444D

81

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.2. Playback Recorded Data

Selection procedure
Step 1.

Tap theDATA

Step 2.

Swipe the recorded data list up or down to move the displayed list up or down.

Step 3.

When you have found the data to display, tap that data.

Step 4.

Tap

OK

key on the control bar to display the recorded data list.

on the bottom of the list to display the selected recorded data on the monitor.

Tips
If the file version of the recorded data differs from the software version of the main unit, this productmay be unable to playback the data or be able to playback but unable to overwrite the data.
This limitation can be overcome by performing a file update if the file version of the recorded data isolder than the software version of the main unit, or a system update if the version is newer.

For information on the versions, see "10.1 Version Information".

7.2.

Playback Recorded Data

By displaying recording data in the waveform monitor and selecting a device in the side menu, thewaveform for each device when recording is displayed.

Move display area

Select recording device

Y axisEnlarge/reduce

Time axis
Enlarge/reduce
Control bar switch

82

key

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.2. Playback Recorded Data

7.2.1.

Playback Screen Operations

Enlarging/Reducing the Waveform
Pinch in/out the waveform monitor in the time axis direction to enlarge/reduce in the time axis direction
and pinch in/out in the amplitude direction to enlarge/reduce in the amplitude direction. The enlargement
ratio is displayed in the zoom ratio on the top left of the monitor.

Scrolling
You can use one finger on the waveform monitor to drag the screen up, down, left, or right to move thedisplay area.

7.2.2.

Thumbnails

Tap theControl bar switch

THUMBNAIL
Select⇒key to switch the functions on the control bar in the order

CURSORTHUMBNAIL⇒

PEN REC⇒WAVEWAVE .

to display the thumbnail waveform of the channel set in the recording setup

menu in the control bar area.
You can also tap the

thumbnail display channel

Tap the thumbnail

key to select the channel to display.

Thumbnail wave

Control bar switch

waveform to display the
waveform at the tapped

Thumbnail display channel

position.

1WMPD4004444D

⇒

83

key

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.2. Playback Recorded Data

Thumbnail display channel
Tap the thumbnail display channel (in red) in

THUMBNAIL

to display the channel selection dialog.

Select one channel with analog input module measurement enabled. The waveform cannot be
displayed in the thumbnail of a logic channel.

Thumbnail display channel

Display scale: 1/10, 1/20, 1/50, 1/100, 1/All
Making the scale smaller (with a larger decimation number for the data to display) displays awider time range of the waveform, because the number of points to display is the same. 1/10
is the 10 x time range, and 1/50 is the 50 x time range.
1/All cannot be selected in the measurement mode.
Output file:

OFF, ON
The thumbnail display reads the recorded data and performs decimation.
OFF

Do not output the data for display to the SSD.
Decimation occurs each time the recorded data is switched.

ON

Output the data for display to the SSD. When set to ON, the display process is fasterbecause decimation is not required, but more SSD space is consumed.

84

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.2. Playback Recorded Data

7.2.3.
When

CursorCURSORis selected for thecontrol bar switch

on the right edge of the control bar, the A

and B time axis cursors are displayed.
Cursor A

Cursor B
Turn the rotary knob tomove the cursors.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Cursor position data information
A:

Recorded data information of the cursor A position
X is the time from the first of cursor A, and Y is the data value at the position of cursor A.

B:

Recorded data information of the cursor B position
X is the time from the first of cursor B, and Y is the data value at the position of cursor B.

A-B:

Information on the difference between cursors A and B
X is the time between cursors A and B, and Y is the data difference value between cursors A
and B.

b/w AB: The maximum value (MAX), minimum value (MIN), and average value (AVG) between cursors
A and B.
However, this is disabled for printer recorded data because the P-P value is used. It is also
disabled when the P-P value is selected for SSD recording.
(2)

Jump to cursor

key

Tap the key to move the waveform so that the cursor position is in the monitor center.
(3)

Move cursor to centerkey

Tap the key to move the specified cursor to the monitor center.
(4) Cursor selection
Select the cursor to change the cursor position for.
The cursor switches in the orderA

Turn the rotary knob withA

⇒ B ⇒ A-B each tap.
selected to move the cursor position of cursor A.

Turn the rotary knob withB

selected to move the cursor position of cursor B.

Turn the rotary knob with

A-B

selected to move the cursor with the distance between and A and B

retained.
1WMPD4004444D

85

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.2. Playback Recorded Data
(5) Channel selection
Selects the channel to display in the cursor position
information. Tap thechannel selection

key to display

the channel selection screen indicated below, where
you can select the channel to display in the cursor
position information.

7.2.4.

Printing Out

Press thePRINT

key on the operation panel with the waveform of the recording data displayed touse the printer to print the waveform between cursors A and B on the monitor.

NOTE

After reading recorded data, cursor A indicates the start of the data and cursor B indicates the end of thedata.
Even if the time axis or waveform amplitude is enlarged on the monitor, the printer prints the recorded
time axis and amplitude set in the channel setup.

7.2.5.

Selecting a Memory BlockIf you are using memory recording, you can select the
memory block to display.
Display [Memory block] on the

Triggertab fromon the side menu, then specify

Display block .

CH

Tap and change the display block with the rotary knob

86

1WMPD4004444D

7.3.

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.3. X-Y Waveform

X-Y Waveform

Data recorded with the following conditions can be used to display the X-Y waveform if

X-Y

is

selected as the waveform format in the control bar. The X-Y waveform enables four waveforms (X-Y1 to
X-Y4) to be displayed at the same time.

X-Y waveform conditions
Recording device:

SSD

Sampling speed:

1 kS/s or lower

Data format:

NORMAL

Analog input amp:

2 channels or above
X-Y waveform display
7.3.1. X-Y Display Settings
7.3.2. X-Y Control

By tapping theSingle/Quadkey for display control, the X-Y waveform can be displayed as four

waveforms overlaid on a single screen or as four separate screens.

X-Y waveform (Single screen format)

7.3.1.

X-Y waveform (Quad screen format)

X-Y Display Setup

The horizontal axis of the display settings box indicates the setting state ofwaveforms X-Y1 to X-Y4 and allows the display to be switched on or off.
With the single screen display, specifies the scale of which channel todisplay.
X axis, Y axis:

Display the slot and channel number of each axis.

Display:

Switches the X-Y waveform display on/off

Scale:

Switches the scale display on/off

1WMPD4004444D

87

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.3. X-Y Waveform

7.3.2.

X-Y Control(1) Meas. ON:
Enables/disables X-Y measurement.
(2) All pen up:
Tap this key when the X-Y waveform is displayed on themonitor to pause the X-Y waveform display. This enables
unnecessary waveforms to not be inserted when switching
the monitored input signal, etc.
(3) Clear all:Clears all the X-Y waveform and starts the display again.

(1)

(6)

(2)

(7)

(3)

(8)

(4)

(9)

(5)

(4) Grid ON/OFF:
Switches the grid lines of the X-Y waveform display area onor off.
(5) Refresh graph (b/w cursor AB):

Displays the Y-T waveform with the playback mode and displays the X-Y waveform with the range
specified by cursors A and B.
(6) CH setup:
Configures the channel settings for waveforms X-Y1 to X-Y4.
Tap this key to switch to the [X-Y channel settings] screen to configure the X axis and Y axis channel
settings for each waveform.
(7) All pen down:
Resumes waveform display when it has been paused with [All pen up].
(8) Dot/Line:
Switches between rendering the X-Y waveform with dots or rendering it with lines.
(9) Single/Quad:
Switches the X-Y waveform display between the single and quad screen display.

X-Y waveform channel setup procedure
Step 1.

Waveform selection

Step 1.

Step 2.

Step 3.

Selects waveforms X-Y1 to X-Y4.
When a waveform is tapped it is highlighted and its
state is displayed in the channel table.
Step 2.

Axis selection
Select the X axis or Y axis.
When an axis is tapped, the channel specified forthat axis is highlighted and the display changes to[ON].
[X axis] or [Y axis] is displayed for the channel
already set for the other axis.

Step 3.

Channel selection
Select the channel.
Tap the channel to set and enable it.

Step 4.

When the settings are complete, tap [←] or [x] on the top title bar to return to the original X-Y
waveform display.

88

1WMPD4004444D

7.4.

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.4. FFT Analysis

FFT Analysis

Data recorded with the following conditions can be used to perform FFT analysis if

FFT

is selected

as the waveform format in the control bar. Two types of FFT analysis can be performed at the sametime: Analysis1 and Analysis2.
The FFT analysis technology is described in "10.6 FFT Analysis."FFT Analysis
Recording device:

SSD

FFT analysis result

Sampling speed:

1 MS/s or lower

Data format:

NORMAL

Analog input amp:

1 channel or 2 channel(1) Analysis switch
FFT waveform monitor(1) Analysis switch
Switches the analysis results display between Analysis1
and Analysis2.
Switch the display by tapping the

<

and

>

key onthe left or right of the analysis or swiping the analysis
results area to the left or right.
(2) Meas. ON/OFF
Enables/disables the execution of FFT analysis.
(3) FFT setup
Tap this key to switch to the FFT setup screen to(2) Meas. ON/OFF

configure the FFT analysis conditions.

(3) FFT setup

FFT setup
When the settings arecomplete, tap theX←

Common settings
key oron the top title bar to

Analysis settings

return to the original FFT
analysis display.

Common settings
Graph display:

Select to overlay the analysis waveforms
over one screen

Singleor display

them separately on two screens
Sampling points:

Dual .

Select the sampling points for analysis. More sampling points means higher resolution
for the analysis frequency.

Window function:

Select the window function for analysis. Change the setting according to the state of the
input signal.

AVG processing:Specify the type of averaging for the analysis results and the number of additions for the
averaging.

1WMPD4004444D

89

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.4. FFT Analysis

Analysis settings
Analysis selection: Select Analysis1 or Analysis2.
Analysis Function:

Select Analysis1 or Analysis2. The X axis, Y axis, and CH selection are limited by the
analysis type. Available setting keys are brighter.

X axis:

Sets the X axis of the analysis waveform.

Y axis:

Sets the Y axis of the analysis waveform. When manual scaling is disabled, the Y axis isautomatically set based on the analysis results. When enabled, the upper limit value
and lower limit value of the Y axis scale can be set manually.

Channel setting:Sets the target channel for analysis.

1/3 octavein theanalysis types are settings only for channel 1 with one channel analysis, andCrosspower spectrum

toTime scale waveform

Coherence function

toare settings for channel 1 and channel 2

with two channel analysis.
Peak:

Extracts the global maximum or local maximum from the analysis results and displays
the top 10 points in the results.

90

1WMPD4004444D

7.5.

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

Search Function

The search function searches for recorded data with the specified search conditions and displays the S
mark (search

7.5.1.

mark) and the waveform near the results on the Y-T waveform.

Search Types and Operations

The following five types of searches are available.
Peak value search:

Searches for the maximum, minimum, local maximum, and local minimum

Level search:

Searches for conditions above or below the specified threshold

Window search:

Searches inside (IN) or outside (OUT) the specified upper/lower limit range

Trigger point search:

Searches for the recorded trigger point

Mark point search:

Searches for the recorded mark point

Search Procedure
Step 1.

Perform the procedure in "7.1. Select Recorded Data."

Step 2.

Tap theCH

Step 3.

Tap theTools

Step 4.

The following two types of search setting operations are available.

key on the side menu to display the channel setup sub menu.
tab.

If the side menu for search settings is not displayed, swipe near the green frame to display it.
Type 1:

For a pull-down list, tap thetarget settings

key, and tap Item in the list.

Type 2:For numeric entry, tap thetarget settings

key to change the frame to orange.

The area around the rotary knob turns blue, and the rotary knob can be used tochange the setting.

1WMPD4004444D

91

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

Pull-down list settings (Type 1)

Counterclockwise

Clockwise

Sensitivity decreases

Sensitivity increases

OrangeBlue
Rotary knob

Rotary knob settings (Type 2)

Step 5.

When the settings are complete, tap the

Executekey. The search starts, and when the searchis complete, the S mark and the waveform near the results are displayed on the Y-T waveform, andthe side menu switches to the "7.5.10. Search Display Menu." The display position of the S markchanges according to the display position of the search results.
If the search is canceled, the incomplete results are displayed and the S mark is displayed in thecenter.

Step 6.

When there are one or more search results, press the<key (back)/ >key (forward) in the"7.5.10. Search Display Menu" to change the waveform display. You can press thereturn to the channel setup sub menu and reset the search conditions. Press theCH

key toClose search

key to return from the "7.5.10. Search Display Menu" to the basic side menu.

92

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

7.5.2.

Search Method Types and Settings

The settings differ for each search method (theDetection

setting (main unit screen notation)).

"Yes" in the table below indicates a setting available for the corresponding search method.
When the search channel is analog channel data
Detection(search method)

Cursorlink

Range

Number ofsearches

MAXIMUM

Yes

Yes

Yes

MINIMUM

Yes

Yes

Yes

MAXIMAL

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

MINIMAL

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LEVEL UP

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LEVEL DOWN

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

INTO WIN

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

OUT WIN

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

FilterHysteresis Threshold

Upper
Lower
threshold threshold

When the search channel is logic channel data
Detection (search method)

Number ofRange

BIT OR

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

BIT AND

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

searches

FilterBit

Cursor link

pattern

When the search channel is disabled
Detection (search method)

Cursor link

Range

Number of searches

Trigger

Yes

Yes

Yes

Mark

Yes

Yes

Yes

Conditions where searching cannot be performed
Searches cannot be performed with the following conditions. (The

Executekey is disabled.)

For "Mode"For "X-Y Display"
For "FFT Display"
When memory recording or search detection is set to "Mark"When the search channel is the logic module and "10.2.2. P-P Sampling"

Conditions for redisplay
The

Redisplay

key is enabled when a search has been executed.

The redisplay function displays the same results as the results after
search execution.
The search results are cleared when one of the following operations
are performed. The search results cannot be redisplayed after they
are cleared.
When theExecuteWhen theNext search

key is tapped to start search execution
key is tapped to start search execution

When replay data is selected ("7.1. Select Recorded Data")
When replay data is deleted (when the recorded data is deleted in "8.4.1. FileManagement" ”Recording”)
1WMPD4004444D

93

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

Search setup menu
This section provides examples of settings. For information on the method for displaying the search
setup menu, see "7.5.1. Search Types and Operations."

Channel:Select the channel to search.

Cursor link:

Select OFF, A, or B.

OFF

Do not link with the cursor.

A

Move (link) Cursor A to the S mark line.

B

Link with Cursor B.
When the cursor link setting is "B", the jump destination is "CURSOR", and the
cursor setting is "A", Cursor B moves to the same point as Cursor A.

Range:
All

Select All or B/W CURSOR.
All the recorded data is the target and the number of detection results is 1,000.
Cursor A moves to the point of the search result where Cursor A is first, according to
the cursor link set to A.

B/W CURSOR The data between A and B is the target and the number of detection results is 1.
Cursor A moves to the point where the search result is Cursor A, according to thecursor link set to A.
94

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function
The cursor line display must have the "1.6.1. Control Bar" as the

CURSOR

key. See "7.2.3.

Cursor" for the cursor settings.
B/W CURSOR (setting before search execution)
A
Threshold 0

BThreshold 0

For [ALL]For [B/W CURSOR]

The figure above is the search result when the search setting is LEVEL UP and the threshold is
set to 0.
The search is executed for the topmost sine wave (1,000 waves or more).
The cursor A-B setting is set to approximately one sine wave, as indicated in the figure above.
The red circle
Number of searches:on the top of the image is the S mark indicating the search results.
Set the maximum number. The search stops when the number of search results
exceeds the value set here.

Filter:See "Peak Value Search (Local Maximum/Local Minimum)", "7.5.5. Level
Search (LEVEL UP/LEVEL DOWN)" and "7.5.6. Window Search (INTO
WIN/OUT WIN)".

Hysteresis:

See "7.5.5. Level Search (LEVEL UP/LEVEL DOWN)" and "7.5.6. Window
Search (INTO WIN/OUT WIN)".

Threshold:

See "7.5.5. Level Search (LEVEL UP/LEVEL DOWN)".

Upper threshold:

See "7.5.6. Window Search (INTO WIN/OUT WIN)".

Lower threshold:

See "7.5.6. Window Search (INTO WIN/OUT WIN)".

7.5.3.

Peak Value Search (Maximum/Minimum)

The maximum value or minimum value of the set range is searched.
If there are multiple of the same maximum or minimum values, the first point is displayed.

1WMPD4004444D

95

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

7.5.4.

Peak Value Search (Local Maximum/Local Minimum)

The detection point is the local maximum
minimum

when larger than two adjacent samples or the local

when smaller than two adjacent samples. The detection point also occurs if the next

value is the same as the local maximum

or the next value is the same as the local minimum.
For "10.2.2. P-P Sampling", the maximum data is searched for the local maximum and the minimum
data is searched for the local minimum.
The local maximum/local minimum search function has a filter and the filter length can be set within thefollowing range.
Filter: OFF, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, or 10000.

Filter role and methodology
When the filter is set to 10 (samples), 10 samples before and after are searched, for a total searchrange of 21 samples.

xn-10, xn-9, ..., xn, xn+1, ..., xn+10
If multiple local maximums or local minimums exist in these 21 samples, xn is the detection point if xn isthe largest local maximum or the smallest local minimum. If a sample other than xn is the local
maximum or local minimum, it is not deemed to be the local maximum or local minimum.

An amount of sample data from the detection point equal to the filter setting is not subject to search, andsearching starts from the next sample data, xn+11.
If there is no sample data equal to the length of the filter before and after the search point, that detection
point is disabled. When the filter is set to 10 (samples), searching is performed from the 11th item ofsample data.
If there is no sample data equal to the length of the filter near the end of the search range, that detection
point is disabled.
When the filter setting is disabled, the operation is the same as when the filter is set to 1, which meansthat all the sample data that meets the above conditions become detection points. See "Search example
1" and "Search example 2".
When the filter is set to 10 (samples), 10 samples before and after are searched, for a total searchrange of 21 samples. If a target sample point is a local maximum and the largest local maximum within
the range, it becomes the detection point. If a sample point is a local minimum and the smallest local
minimum within the range, it becomes the detection point. If a local maximum with the same value or
multiple local minimums exist in the range, they become detection points. If there is no sample data
equal to the length of the filter before and after the target sample point within that range, that detection
point is disabled. See "Search example 3" and "Search example 4".

96

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

Search example 1
All local maximum points or local minimum points are the detection points.
Because there is no data before the first sample, it will not be a local minimum. The last sample will also
not be a local maximum.

Search example 2
The local maximum and local minimum markers are the detection points.

Search example 3
The red circle

point is not subject to the search because there are only nine previous samples.

Because the local maximums are valid from the 11th item of sample data, those local maximums are thedetection points.
The 13th, 15th, 17th, 19th, and 21st items of sample data are not deemed to be local maximums due tofiltering.
There are no detection points from the 22nd item of data, because there is no data of the filter length
after that point.

10 samples

1WMPD4004444D

10 samples

97

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

Search example 4
The local maximum and local minimum markers are the detection points.
The red circle

will not be a detection point. This is because there is no data of the filter length afterthat point.

7.5.5.

Level Search (LEVEL UP/LEVEL DOWN)

Level search with "10.2.1. NORMAL Sampling"
When LEVEL UP is set, the samples where the condition

threshold < data value

is met are

the detection points.
When LEVEL DOWN is set, the samples where the condition

threshold > data value

is metare the detection points.
Level search after point detection
When LEVEL UP is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
data value < threshold - hysteresis

is met.

When LEVEL DOWN is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
data value > threshold + hysteresis

is met.

Level search with "10.2.2. P-P Sampling"
When LEVEL UP is set, the samples where the condition

threshold < maximum data value

is metare the detection points.
When LEVEL DOWN is set, the samples where the condition

threshold > minimum data value

is metare the detection points.
Level search after point detection
When LEVEL UP is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
maximum data value < threshold - hysteresis

is met.

When LEVEL DOWN is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
minimum data value > threshold + hysteresis

is met.

98

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function
The function is waiting for detection immediately after a level search starts.
The level search function has hysteresis and filter settings.
Filter:OFF, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, or 10000.
The detection point is the sample after the conditions are established continuously for theset filter length from the point where the search conditions are met.
When LEVEL UP is set, the detection condition isdata value ≥ threshold - hysteresis .

When LEVEL DOWN is set, the detection condition isminimum data value ≤ threshold + hysteresis .
See "LEVEL UP search example 2".
The above is for normal recording. For "10.2.2. P-P Sampling", the data value that meetsthe above condition is the maximum data value or minimum data value.
OFF has the same meaning as 1.
Hysteresis:

0.0 to 10.0%, in increments of 0.1
The ratio to the measurement range.
When set to 0.1% and the range is 10 V, the hysteresis is 10 mV.

LEVEL UP search example 1
This section is an example of when LEVEL UP is set and filtering is disabled. The
detection point and themarker is the

red circle is the detection restart point.

LEVEL UP search example 2This section is an example of when LEVEL UP is set and filtering is set to 10. The

marker is thedetection point.
The data is the same as "LEVEL UP search example 1". The first detection point of "LEVEL UP search
example 1" is the 6th sample, and the next detection point that meets the detection conditions is the
15th sample (after the 10 point filter).

1WMPD4004444D

99

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

LEVEL DOWN search example 1
This section is an example of when LEVEL DOWN is set and filtering is disabled. The
detection point and themarker is the

red circle is the detection restart point.

LEVEL DOWN search example 2This section is an example of when LEVEL DOWN is set and filtering is set to 10. The

marker is thedetection point.
The data is the same as "LEVEL DOWN search example 1". The first detection point of "LEVEL DOWN
search example 1" is the 6th sample, and the next detection point that meets the detection conditions is
the 15th sample (after the 10 point filter).

7.5.6.

Window Search (INTO WIN/OUT WIN)

Window search with "10.2.1. NORMAL Sampling"
When INTO WIN is set, the samples where the condition

lower threshold < data value < upper thresholdis met are the detection points.
When OUT WIN is set, the samples where the condition
data value > upper thresholdlower threshold > data valueoris met are the detection points.

Window search after point detection
When INTO WIN is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
data value < lower threshold - hysteresis

orupper threshold + hysteresis < data value

is

met.
When OUT WIN is set, the next detection is not performed until the conditions
data value > lower threshold + hysteresis

andupper threshold - hysteresis > data value

are

met.

100

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function
Window search with "10.2.2. P-P Sampling"
When INTO WIN is set, the samples where the conditions
minimum data value < upper thresholdlower threshold < maximum data value

andare met are the detection points.

When OUT WIN is set, the samples where the condition
maximum data value > upper thresholdlower threshold > minimum data valueoris met are the detection points.

Window search after point detection
When INTO WIN is set, the next detection is not performed until the condition
maximum data value < lower threshold - hysteresis

orupper threshold + hysteresis < minimum data value

is met.

When OUT WIN is set, the next detection is not performed until the conditions
minimum data value > lower threshold + hysteresis

andupper threshold - hysteresis > maximum data value

are met.

The function is waiting for detection immediately after a window search starts.
The window search function has hysteresis and filter settings.
Filter:OFF, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, or 10000.
The detection point is the sample after the conditions are established continuously for theset filter length from the point where the search conditions are met.
When INTO WIN is set, the detection conditions aredata value ≥ lower threshold - hysteresis

andupper threshold + hysteresis ≥ data value .
When OUT WIN is set, the detection condition isdata value ≤ lower threshold + hysteresis

orupper threshold - hysteresis ≤ data value .
See "INTO WIN search example 2". The above is for normal recording. For "10.2.2. P-P
Sampling", the data value that meets the above condition is the maximum data value or
minimum data value. OFF has the same meaning as 1.
Hysteresis:

0.0 to 10.0%, in increments of 0.1
The ratio to the measurement range.
When set to 0.1% and the range is 10 V, the hysteresis is 10 mV.

INTO WIN search example 1
This section is an example of when INTO WIN is set and filtering is disabled. The

marker is thedetection point and theon the 17th item

red circle is the detection restart point. The blue circleof data is not a detection point. The sample data value of the 16th item of data does not enter detection
standby because it is the same value as hysteresis.
Blue circle

Red circle

1WMPD4004444D

101

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

INTO WIN search example 2This section is an example of when INTO WIN is set and filtering is set to 10. The

marker is thedetection point. The data is the same as "INTO WIN search example 1". The first detection point of"INTO WIN search example 1" is the 6th sample, and the next detection point that meets the detection
conditions is the 15th sample (after the 10 point filter).

OUT WIN search example 1
This section is an example of when OUT WIN is set and filtering is disabled. The
detection point and themarker is the

red circle is the detection restart point.

OUT WIN search example 2This section is an example of when OUT WIN is set and filtering is set to 10. The

marker is thedetection point.
The data is the same as "OUT WIN search example 1". The first detection point of "OUT WIN search
example 1" is the 6th sample, and the next detection point that meets the detection conditions is the
15th sample (after the 10 point filter).

102

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

7.5.7.

Logic Search

When channels are set for a logic module in the (search) channel settings, the settings of the logic
search conditions are displayed.
A single logic module is 16 channels (16 bits).
The channels are divided into two groups (Channel A and Channel B), with CH1 to CH8 corresponding
to Channel A and the rest corresponding to Channel B.
The detection points are the samples where the AND or OR operation in each group can be performed
and the setting conditions are met.
The input values immediately after starting the search are ignored, even if the conditions are
established. The search starts after the data value changes.
*

Searches cannot be performed with "10.2.2. P-P Sampling". See "Conditions where searching cannot
be performed" in "7.5.2. Search Method Types and Settings".
Bit pattern:- (OFF: Disabled)/L (Low level)/H (High level)

Set the logic establishment conditions for each of the eight logic channels.
Detection:

BIT AND/BIT OR

BIT AND

The detection points are the samples where all the channels set in "Bit pattern" meetthe conditions.

BIT OR

The detection points are the samples where any of the channels set in "Bit pattern"meet the conditions.

Filter:OFF, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, or 10000.
The detection point is the sample after the conditions are established continuously forthe set filter length from the point where the search conditions are met.
OFF has the same meaning as 1.

Logic search example (BIT AND)
The screen is an example of the BIT AND conditions (Y-T waveform display in execution results).
The logic waveform is S1-CHA, the same as the search channel.
The top waveform on the screen displays CH1 and the bottom waveform displays CH8.
We can see that a search has been performed using the "Bit pattern" condition in the settings.

CH1

L
H
L
H
H
L
H

CH8

1WMPD4004444D

L103

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

7.5.8.

Trigger Search

Searches for the trigger points (T markon the top of the Waveform monitor) detected in "04.5.3.

Trigger Setup" during recording.
*

For a trigger, the S mark on the Y-T waveform is not displayed.

7.5.9.

Mark Search

Searches for the detection points (M markon the top of the Waveform monitor) of the MARK signal

in "12.3.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)" during recording. For details on the detection points of
the MARK signal, see "9.10.6. Reference Materials".
**

For a mark, the S mark on the Y-T waveform is not displayed.
A mark search cannot be performed for memory recording. See "Conditions where searching cannot be
performed" in "7.5.2. Search Method Types and Settings".

104

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.5. Search Function

7.5.10. Search Display Menu
(1) Current number and total number of search results, and the search results
themselves
Displays the number of the search result that is currently being displayed on the
top and the total number of search results on the bottom. For information onchanging the search results display, see "Method for changing the search results
display".
(2) Operation keys for changing the search results display
For information on changing the search results display, see "Method for changing
the search results display".
(3) Cursor link
OFF/A/B
See "Search setup menu". The operation is the same as that cursor link.
(4) Next search
If more search results exist than the search upper limit, searching is performed
again with the last point of the search results as the start point of the search range.
The previous search results are deleted when the key is pressed.
(5)

Check or reset search settings
Tap theCH

key to display "4.3.1. Channel setup sub menu (for RA30-101)" tocheck or reset the search settings.
(6) Close search
Tap the

Close search

key to end the search and return the searchdisplay menu to the regular side menu.

Function limitations
The following functions cannot be used while this menu is displayed.
Switching the recorded data (between printer recording, SSD recording, and memory recording)Switching the memory block
Switching the X-Y display and FFT display

Method for changing the search results display
There are three methods for displaying the search results.
When the search result number is changed, the Y-T waveform follows and the center of the screen
becomes the detection point. However, if there is a detection point near the start or end of the recorded
data, the center of the screen will not be the detection point because the maximum amount of waveform
is displayed.
Tap (1) to enable the jog dial.
The jog dial works in increments of 10 for the standard mode and increments of 1 for the fineadjustment mode.
For information on each mode, see "1.3. Operation panel".
Press and hold (1) to set the numeric input dialog.
Tap the<key in (2) to move to the previous result or the

1WMPD4004444D

105>

key to move to the next result.

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.

Jump Function

Set the following jump conditions to jump to the corresponding location. (The Y-T waveform display is

updated.)BEGINNING:

Jumps to the beginning of the recorded data

CENTER:

Jumps to the center of the recorded data

END:

Jumps to the end of the recorded data

DATE:

Jumps to the specified time

TIME:

Jumps to the specified elapsed time

POINT:

Jumps to the specified sample point

CURSOR:

Jumps to Cursor A or Cursor B

106

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.1.

Jump Types and Operations

Step 1.

Perform the procedure in "7.1. Select Recorded Data."

Step 2.

Tap theCH

Step 3.

Tap theTools

Step 4.

There are two main methods for operating the settings.

key on the side menu to display the channel setup sub menu.
tab.

If the jump settings menu is not displayed, swipe near the green frame.
Type 1:

For a pull-down list, tap thetarget settings

key, and tap Item in the list.

Type 2:For numeric entry, tap thetarget settings

key to change the frame to orange.

The area around the rotary knob turns blue, and the rotary knob can be used tochange the setting.

Pull-down list settings (Type 1)
Orange Counterclockwise
Value decreases

Clockwise
Value increases
Blue
Rotary knob

Rotary knob settings (Type 2)

Step 5.

When the settings are complete, tap the

Executekey.

The process starts, the jump condition is displayed in the center of the Y-T waveform when theprocess finishes, then the side menu closes. If the search result is near the beginning or end of
the data, the S mark will not be displayed in the center.

1WMPD4004444D

107

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.2.

Jump Condition Types and Settings

The settings differ for each jump condition (theJump tosetting (main unit screen notation)).

For details, see "7.6.3. Data beginning, center, end", "7.6.4. Date Setup", "7.6.5. Time Setup", "7.6.6.
POINT(samples)", "7.6.7. Cursor".
Jump to:Jump to
Beginning
CenterEnd

Setting item

DATE

Date/Time

Time
Point
CursorElapsed time
Sample number
Cursor

Cursor link:

Setting value

Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, millisecond, microsecond,nanosecond
Day, hour, minute, second, millisecond, microsecond, nanosecond
0 to recorded data count - 1
A, B

Select OFF, A, or B.
OFF Do not link with the cursor.
A

Move (link) Cursor A to the S mark.

B

Link with Cursor B. When the cursor link setting is "B", the jump destination is"CURSOR", and the cursor setting is "A", Cursor B moves to the same point as
Cursor A.

For Cursor A

The cursor line display must have the "1.6.1.
Control Bar" as the

CURSOR

key.

See "7.2.3. Cursor" for the cursor settings.

Jump setup menu
The screen on the right is an example of the jump
setup menu.

108

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.3.

Data beginning, center, end

The THUMBNAIL waveform displays all data.
The screen shows the result when CENTER is set.
We can see that the center of the data displays the Y-T waveform.

THUMBNAIL

All data
Data beginning

7.6.4.

CenterEnd

Date Setup

Tap theExecutekey to jump to the point in "Date Setup".

An error dialog is displayed if the setting is outside the recorded data range.
If there is no data at the specified time, the most recent point is jumped to.
Use [X axis notation] in "8.2.5 Other setup" as the

Date

key.

Date Setup
Tap the red frame to display the setup screen. Tap the date and set the year, month, and day byswiping, then tap the time and set the hour and minute by swiping. Tap the remaining second,
millisecond, and microsecond, and nanosecond, and use the jog dial to specify the settings or press andhold to specify the settings on the numeric entry screen.

1WMPD4004444D

109

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.5.

Time Setup

Tap theExecutekey to jump to the point in "Time Setup". Set the relative time with the beginning of

the recorded data as 0.
For memory recording, set the relative time with the beginning of the block as 0. All blocks are targeted.
An error dialog is displayed if the setting is outside the recorded data range.
If there is no data at the specified time, the most recent point is jumped to.
Use [X axis notation] in "8.2.5 Other setup" as the

Time

key.

Time Setup
Tap the red frame to display the setup screen. Tap the day, hour, minute, second, millisecond, andmicrosecond, and nanosecond, and use the jog dial to specify the settings or press and hold to specify
the settings on the numeric entry screen.

7.6.6.

POINT(samples)

Tap theExecutekey to jump to the point in "POINT(samples) Setup".

Use [X axis notation] in "8.2.5 Other setup" as the

Point

key.

POINT(samples) Setup
Tap POINT(samples) and use the jog dial to specify the settingsor press and hold to specify the settings on the numeric entry
screen.
Setting range: 0 to recorded sample count - 1

110

1WMPD4004444D

7. Playback Recorded Data – 7.6. Jump Function

7.6.7.

CursorTap theExecutekey to jump to the point in "Cursor Setup".

In "7.2.3. Cursor", set Cursor A or Cursor B.

Cursor Setup
Tap the cursor and use the jog dial to specify the settings or press and hold to specify the settings on
the numeric entry screen.
Setting range: 0 to recorded sample count - 1

Cursor B time before jump execution

Cursor B (time 1 s) is displayed in the center of the Y-T waveform.

1WMPD4004444D

111

8. Setup Details

8.

Setup Details

This chapter describes the function for configuring the various settings from Settings in the side menu.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Measurement mode: Selects the measurement mode. “4.1 Selecting the Measurement Mode”(2) Create a config file: Creates configuration data containing the measurement mode, recording
setup, and main unit setup. “8.1 Create a config file”(3) Recording Setup:

Configures settings related to recording, such as the recording conditions andchannel. “8.2 Recording Setup”(4) Main Unit Setup:

Configures settings related to the main unit, such as the time andcommunication. “8.3 Main Unit Setup”(5) Management:

Performs management of the main unit, such as file operations andmaintenance. “8.4 Management”

112

1WMPD4004444D

8.1.

8. Setup Details – 8.1. Create a config file

Create a config file

Create configuration data containing the current measurement mode, recording setup, and main unit
setup. The created configuration data is recorded to the SSD in the main unit and displayed in the list
for setup management. Settings can be restored from the configuration data.
Tap theCreate a config file

key on the setup screen to display the [Create a config file] dialog.

Enter the name of the file to create and tap theOK

key to create theconfiguration file.
If a configuration file with the same name already exists, a dialog
confirming whether you want to overwrite the file is displayed. To
overwrite the file, tap theOKkey. Tap theCancelkey to return to

the [Create a config file] dialog.

Tips
Up to 40 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be entered for the filename.
Windows reserved file names or characters cannot be used.
If there are already 100 configuration files in the main unit, a new
configuration file cannot be created.

1WMPD4004444D

113

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.

Recording Setup

Configure

Recording ,Channel list ,Sheet ,

Printer , andOther . Tap a settings category todisplay the detailed settings screen for that category.

8.2.1.
Tap

Recording
Recordingin the Recording setup to display a list of the settings related to recording.

For details, see "6.3.1. Recording Setup".

8.2.2.

Channel List

Tap

Channel list

to display a list of the input modules, then tap

ora module typeabove the list to display the corresponding list.

114

Common ,Conversion ,Sheet ,

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.2.1.

When

Common Setup

Commonis tapped, the settings common to all input modules are displayed, and you can tap

a cell to change the setting value of that cell.

The items in the list are indicated below.
Batch:

Enables the batch configuration of the selected channels.
You can tap

Select allon the top right to select all the channels.

CH:

Displays the slot number and channel number, connected with a hyphen.

Module:Displays the model of the input module.

CH name:

Displays the user-defined name of the input signal. Tap this field to set the channel name.
Press and hold it to display the software keyboard for input.

Meas.:

Displays whether input is enabled or disabled. Tap to switch between enabled and disabled.

Color:

Displays the waveform color displayed on the waveform monitor. Tap to change the waveform
color.

Disp. pos.:

Displays the display position set in the channel settings. Tap to change the display position.

Disp. range:

Displays the display range set in the channel settings. Tap to change the display range.

Disp. max:

Displays the display maximum set in the channel settings. Tap to change the display
maximum.

Disp. min:

Displays the display minimum set in the channel settings. Tap to change the display minimum.

1WMPD4004444D

115

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.2.2.

Conversion (Physical Quantity Conversion)

The items in the list are indicated below.
Batch:

Enables the batch configuration of the selected channels.
You can tap

Select allon the top right to select all the channels.

Method:Select [Gain], [2-pt.], or [None] as the conversion method.

Gain:

Applies gain and offset to the input voltage and performs conversion with the primary function y= ax + b.
Conversion1 is gain, Conversion2 is offset

2-pt.:

Converts two input voltages to two target physical quantities.
Conversion1 is the first physical conversion value, and Conversion2 is the second physicalconversion value
For example, when converting the voltage of a signal input at 4-20 mA with 1 kΩ shunt
resistance, the setting for resisting the input voltage value at ±1 V is Conversion1 = 20 → +1,
Conversion2 = 4 → 1.

None:

Do not perform physical quantity conversion.
Relationship between 2-pt gain and gain compensation
The relationship between the gain specified by the
2 points a1 (x1, y1) and a2 (x2, y2) and gain a andoffset b of y = ax + b is

Physical quantity

offset b = y1 - ax1 = y1 - x1(y2 - y1)/(x2 - x1)
Unit:

a2

y1
b

gain a = (y2 - y1)/(x2 - x1)

y = ax+b

y2
a1
a
x1

x2 Input value

Sets the unit for the output of the physical quantity conversion. Tap to display the unit table andselect the target unit. If the target unit is not in the table, tap theUnit list

key and change theunit table.

116

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.2.3.
Tap

Sheet
Sheet

to display the settings related to the sheet.

You can tap a cell to change the setting value of that cell.

The items in the list are indicated below.
Batch:
Enables the batch configuration of the selected channels.
You can tap

Select allon the top right to select all the channels.

CH:

Displays the slot number and channel number, connected with a hyphen.

Module:Displays the model of the input module.

Sheet:

Displays the registered sheet number. Tap to switch between

Graph:

Enables channels to be assigned to one of up to 18 graphs. Set the graph number for

SHEET1to

SHEET3 .

displaying the waveform of the measurement data for each channel. Select from G1 to G18(Graph 18).
Wave display: When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.
Wave inversion:

When enabled, the waveform is inverted. For information on inverting the waveform, see"10.5 Wave Inversion".

8.2.2.4.

Tap theSetup Unique to Module Types
module type

(RA30-xxx) to display a list of the settings unique to the same type of installed

module. For information on the settings for each module, see "9. Using Optional Modules". An exampleof the RA30-101 is indicated below.

TapRA30-101

to display a list of the settings unique to the RA30-101 (2ch Voltage Module).

The items in the list are indicated below.
CH:

Displays the slot number and channel number, connected with a hyphen.

Coupling:

Displays the state of coupling (DC, AC, or GND) that is set. Tap to set coupling.

Meas. range: Displays the measurement range of the input module. Tap to change the range.
L.P.F.:

Displays the low-pass filter setting. Tap to change the filter.

A.A.F.:

Displays the antialiasing filter setting. Tap to change the filter.

1WMPD4004444D

117

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.3.
Tap

Sheet Setup
Sheet

in the recording settings to display the graph settings and a list of the monitor display andprinter waveform sheet settings.

8.2.3.1.
Tap

Graph

Graph

to display the settings related to the number of divisions (number of graphs) of the Y-T

waveform.
You can tap a cell to change the setting value of that cell.

(2)
(1)
(3)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(1) Y-T waveform dislplay preview:
Displays a preview of the grid on the Y-T waveform screen when you change settings
such as the number of divisions or the height.
(2) Number of divisions:
Selects the number of divisions (number of graphs) of the Y-T waveform. (maximum 18)(3) Division settings:
Sets the graph height and space height, and enables/disables the grid.
The settings are displayed for the selected number of graphs.
TSP (Top SPace)

Indicates a space on the top.

BSP (Bottom SPace)

Indicates a space on the bottom.

G# (Graph)

Indicates each graph. (# is the graph number)SP# (SPace)

Indicates the space between each graph. (# is the space number)

Height/number of lines:
Sets the graph (G#) or space (SP#) to print on the recording paper by the height or
number of lines.
When setting by height, it is set in increments of 2.5 mm (the height of one line).
Line number:

Displays the line number of the print position.
118

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup
Grid:

Enables/disables the displaying/printing of the grid.
Enable "Text to Print" in "8.2.4 Printer" or the grid setting in "8.3.3 Display Setup".

(4) TSP/BSP:

Enable/disable the TSP (Top SPace) and BSP (Bottom SPace) display settings.

(5) Initialize:

Initializes the division setting of the currently selected division count.

(6) Print preview: Opens a screen displaying a print preview of the Y-T waveform.
This enables you to check the print position of the grid and "Printing Setup" and "Text toPrint" in "8.2.4 Printer".
Pinch out to enlarge the display. Swipe to move.

Sheet switching keys:
The

SHEET1 ,SHEET2 ,SHEET3

keys on the bottom left enable you tocheck the display of each sheet. You can check the signal names and scale values.
Whole view:

When the display is enlarged, tap the Whole view key to resize the display to matchthe height.

Close:

1WMPD4004444D

Closes the screen.

119

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.3.2.

SHEET1/ SHEET2/ SHEET3

Assign the input channels to display in the graphs on each sheet.

Tap the sheet to set or a graph cell to display the channel assignment screen. The target sheet number
and graph number are displayed on the center top of the screen.

(1)

Analog channel(2)Module(3)

Logic channel(4)

ALL ON(1)

Analog channel(2)Module(3)

Logic channel

key

key

key

key

key:

key:

Tap to assign the selected channel to the graph of the sheet.
Tap to assign all channels of the module to the graph of the sheet.

key:

When the signal unit is set to "1 CH" in "9.5.2 Setting the Input Channel" ("16Channel Logic Module (RA30-105)"), assignment is performed on a single
channel basis. Tap the channel key to display a dialog and assign theselected channel to the graph of the sheet.

120

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup
When the signal unit is set to "8 CH", assignment is performed on an eightchannel basis (CHA/CHB).

For "1 CH"(4) ALL ON

key:For "8 CH"

Tap to assign all channels of all modules to the graph of the sheet.

Up to 48 channels can be enabled for a single sheet, and the current number of channels used isdisplayed on the right side of the table. When the number of channels used exceeds 48, tap
Canceland assign the channels on another sheet.

1WMPD4004444D

121

OK

or

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.4.
Tap

8.2.4.1.
Tap

Printer
Printer

Printing Setup

Printing

Header:in the recording settings to configure the various print functions for printer output.

to configure the various information printed at the same time as the waveform.

This product prints the header Text/CH name before printing the waveform.
SelectText ,

CH name ,Text/CH name , orOFF

as the information to print

before the waveform.
Annotation:

Enables or disables the printing of annotation text to print at the same time as the
waveform.

Footer:SelectText

SelectText ,orOFF .
Scale value ,Text/Scale value , orOFF

as the footer text toprint after waveform recording ends.
Grid:

Selects the grid pattern to print with the waveform.
Select

10 mm STD ,10 mm STD

10 mm ,

10 mm

5 mm STD ,5 mm STD

122

5 mm , or
5 mm

OFF .
OFF

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup
Date/Data name:

SelectDate ,

Date name ,Date / Date name

, or

OFF .

Trigger/mark:Select

ON

or

OFF

.

Select

ON

or

OFF

. The X axis notation set in "8.2.5 Other setup" is used as

Date
Data name
Trigger
MarkTime axis:

the notation. When the X axis notation is set to "date", two lines are printed.

NOTE
Recording speed:

For the 86th line, the 2nd line is not printed.
SelectSampling speed ,Chart speed , orOFF

as the recording speed toprint below the waveform.
Time
Recording speed
Feed length:

Sets the length to feed after all printing is complete, including waveform printing andscreen copy (screenshot) printing.

1WMPD4004444D

123

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

Printing example
Header

CH nameAnnotations

Footer

1st printed line

86th printed line

124

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.4.2.
Tap

Text to Print

Header ,Annotation , orFooterto display the corresponding settings screen for the text

to print. The setting method is the same for each.
For details, see "6.2.3 Text to Print Function".

1WMPD4004444D

125

8. Setup Details – 8.2. Recording Setup

8.2.5.
Tap

Other setup
Other

in the recording setup to display a list of the settings related to recording.

Chart speed key:Set the user defined chart speed displayed on the control bar whenrecording device and

PEN REC

Six chart speeds can be registered. The key on the left end is

Tap a
EXT.

Chart speed key

PRINTERis selected as theis selected in the menu on the right edge of the control bar.
Chart speed key 1 .

to display the setting dialog.

refers to "10.3.2 External Sampling"

X axis notation:

Set the time, date, and point.
X axis notation settings

Waveform monitor X axis display

Output recording info XML file:
Enable this setting to read the recording file in a custom application. When enabled, an XML format filecontaining the recording information is added to the recording data.

126

1WMPD4004444D

8.3.

Main Unit Setup

Configure

Environment ,Comm. ,

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup
Display , andOther . Tap a settings category to display

the detailed settings screen for that category.

8.3.1.

Environment Setup

Tap theEnvironment

in the main unit settings to display the [Environment] screen.

The environment settings of this product can be configured on the [Environment] screen.

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

(5)
(6)
(7)

The functions of each item are indicated below.
(1) PC name:Sets the name of this product. Tap the name field to display the [PC name]dialog box for changing the name. Double-tap the name to display thesoftware keyboard.
Double-tap to display software keyboard(2) Language:

Select the display language of this product.

(3) Time zone:

Sets the time zone of the clock in this product.

1WMPD4004444D

127

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup(4) Summer time:

Select whether to automatically adjust the time according to daylight savingtime.
Can only be selected if the region specified in the time zone uses daylightsaving time.

Tips
The daylight saving time setting is not reflected in the time axis of therecorded data.
(5) Date and time:

Sets the time of this product.
Tap theDate and time

key to display the[Date and time] dialog box.
Tap and set the year, month, day, hour, andminute.

(6) Display brightness:

Changes the screen brightness.
Set a value between 1 and 10.

(7) Buzzer sound:

Enable this setting to emit a buzzer when the range is
exceeded, or disable it to not.

128

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

8.3.2.

Communication Setup

Tap theComm.

in the main unit settings to display the [Comm.] screen.

The communication, Web server, FTP server, and data transfer settings of this product can be
configured on the [Comm.] screen.

8.3.2.1.

Tap theCommunicationComm.

key in the middle of the [Comm.] screen to display the [Comm.] settings screen.

Network Setup

CAUTION
Caution Regarding Network Setup
When connecting this product to an on-premise network, contact the network administrator regarding
the network settings.
Tap theNetworkbox on the [Comm.] settings

screen to display the network settings dialog box.
Tap

OK

to confirm the settings.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)

1WMPD4004444D

129

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup(1) IP address setup:

Select whether to automatically retrieve (using DHCP) or manually set
the IP address of the LAN, etc. The settings in (2) to (4) are not required
for automatic retrieval.

(2) IP address:

Manually sets the IP address of the LAN. Since the IP address is uniqueto the device, make sure to set a different address when connecting two
or more of this product.

(3) Subnet mask:

The value that defines the IP address range (subnet). Normally set
class C.
Class C: 255.255.255.000
Class B: 255.255.000.000
Class A: 255.000.000.000(4) Default gateway:

Sets the IP address of the gateway device for connecting the networkthat this product is connected to with external networks.

(5) DNS server address setup:

Select whether to automatically retrieve or manually set the IP addressof the DNS server. The settings in (6) to (7) are not required forautomatic retrieval.

(6) Preferred DNS server:

Sets the IP address of the preferred DNS server on the network.

(7) Alternate DNS server:

Sets the IP address of the alternate DNS server on the network.

130

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

RS-232C Setup

CAUTION
Caution Regarding RS-232C Settings
When using the RS-232C port of this product to communicate with an external device, match the
RS-232C settings with those of the host device.
Tap theRS-232C

box on the [Comm.]

settings screen to display the RS-232C settings
dialog box. Tap

OK

to confirm the settings.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

(1) Baud rate:

Sets the RS-232C data transmission speed.
Select a baud rate from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200, 230400, or 460800 bps.

(2) Data bits:

The number of bits in one byte of data. Fixed to 8 bits.

(3) Stop bits:

The stop bits in one byte of data. Select 1 or 2 bits.

(4) Parity:

The parity bit for one byte of data.
Select None, Odd, Even, Mark, or Space.

(5) Flow control:

The flow control of communication. Hardware uses control via CTS/RTS for thecommunication line.
Select None, Xon/Xoff, or Hardware.

1WMPD4004444D

131

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

Authentication Settings
Authentication settings are used when connecting from the Web browser on a computer or other device(when Web server authentication settings are enabled). When authentication is enabled, connection is
only possible by entering the correct user name and password.
Tap the

Authentication

box on the [Comm.]

screen to display the authentication settings
dialog box. Tap

OK

to confirm the settings.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(1) User name:Set the user name.

(2) Password:

Set the password. The characters that are input are masked as black circles.

(3) Show password:

Select this check box to display the characters that are input for the password.

Tips
The available characters for the user name and password are a to z, A to Z, 0 to 9, and hyphen. If any
other characters are entered, theOK

key is disabled.

132

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

Web Server Settings
When the Web server function is enabled, you can use the Web browser on a computer or other device
to remotely operate, configure, and view the screens of the RA3100.

NOTE
Caution when Configuring Web Server Settings
Configure the authentication settings as required to prevent unauthorized access.
Tap theWeb server

box on the [Comm.]

screen to display the Web server settings dialog
box. TapOK

to confirm the settings.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(1) ON / OFF:

Enables/disables the Web server function.

(2) Authentication:

Enables/disables the authentication function.
When enabled, the Web server is used with authentication. (The user name andpassword in the authentication settings are input from the computer whenconnecting.)(3) Access restrictions: Selects the access restrictions for the Web browser.
When Web browser operations are disabled, information can be viewed from theWeb browser but no operations are allowed.
For information on connecting to the Web server, see "10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web
Browser".

Tips
The Web server is not available if [Obtain automatically] is selected in the IP address settings of thisproduct.

1WMPD4004444D

133

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

FTP Server Settings
If the FTP server function is enabled, FTP client software can be used to download recorded data,
image data, and configuration data.

NOTE
Configure the authentication settings as required to prevent unauthorized access.
Download data when recording or pen recording is not being performed.
Tap theFTP server

box on the [Comm.] screen todisplay the FTP server settings dialog box. Tap

OK

to confirm the settings.
(1)(2)(1) ON / OFF:

Enables/disables the FTP server function.

(2) Authentication:

Sets whether to use basic or anonymous authentication.
When enabled, basic authentication is used. (The user name and password in theauthentication settings are input from the client when connecting.)
When disabled, anonymous authentication is used. (Enter "anonymous" as the username and leave the password blank when connecting from the client.)

For information on connecting to the FTP server and downloading data, see "10.8 Downloading theData of this Product via FTP".

Tips
The FTP server is not available if [Obtain automatically] is selected in the IP address settings of thisproduct.
FTP server authentication cannot be used when the following user name or password is set in theauthentication settings of this product.
User name: " " (space), "AND", "Administrator", "DefaultAccount", "Guest" or "WDAGUtilityAccount"
Password:" " (space)

134

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

8.3.2.2.

Tap theData transfer
Data transfer

key in the middle of the [Comm.] screen to display the [Data transfer] settings

screen.
When data transfer is enabled, this product will transfer the sampled measurement data.
For information on retrieving the measurement data, see "10.9 Transferring Data".

Tips
This function can only be used when the measurement mode of this product is set to the MFG mode.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

(1) Status:

Displays the data transfer status.

Status

Icon

Description

Disabled(none)

Transferring●

Data is being transferredStandby■

A connection has been established with the destination and the data

The data transfer function is stopped

transfer process is waiting to start
Not connected□

A connection has not been established with the destination

Error

!

An error has occurred in the data transfer process

Tips
A status icon is also displayed for the measurement mode in the side menu.
(2) ON / OFF:

Enables/disables the data transfer function.

(3) Transfer mode:

Set the transfer mode to Always, Whenrecording, or Manual.

Always:Measurement data is always transferred.

When recording:

Measurement data is transferred whenrecording.

Manual:Measurement data is transferred when
[Manual control] is set to Start.

1WMPD4004444D

135

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup(4) Data type:

Sets the type of measurement data to transfer.

(5) Protocol:

Sets the protocol for communication with the PC.

(6) UDP destination: Sets the IP address and port number of the PC. This is enabled when UDP is set as
the protocol.
(7) Transfer data:One-shot:Sets one-shot or continuous as the type of data to transfer.
Transfers measurement data at a period of approximately 100 ms, regardless ofthe sampling speed of this product.

Continuous:

Transfers measurement data synchronized with the sampling speed of this product.

(8) Decimation:

When [Transfer data] is set to Continuous, sets the decimation of the transfer data.

(9) Time stamp:

Configures whether to add a time stamp to the transfer data.

Tips
When [Data type] is set to SSD, the Continuous setting of [Transfer data] can only be used wheninternal sampling is at 1 kS/s or less.

136

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

8.3.3.

Display Setup

Tap

Displayin the main unit setup to display the [Display] screen.

The auxiliary monitor display functions can be set on the [Display] screen.
Grid:

Switches the grid lines of the waveform
monitor on or off.

Trigger line:

Switches the trigger lines for trigger
detection on or off.

Mark line:

Switches the mark lines for mark detection
on or off.

*

Mark line is available when the optional remote control
module is installed.
Search result line: Switches the search result line on or off.

Displaying the Trigger Line, Mark Line, and Search Result Line in the waveform monitor
Trigger line

Search result line

Mark line

When enabled

1WMPD4004444D

When disabled137

8. Setup Details – 8.3. Main Unit Setup

8.3.4.
Tap

Other
Other

in the main unit settings to display the [Other setup] screen.

Other main unit settings can be configured on the [Other setup] screen.

Follow cursor:

When enabled, the waveform and cursor are displayed when the cursor moves outside
the waveform monitor. When disabled, the cursor moves but the waveform does notwhen the waveform moves outside the waveform monitor. (The cursor line will nolonger be displayed.)

TRIG key:

Select the operation to perform when the TRIG key is pressed on the operation
panel. If you select TRIG, a trigger occurs. If you select FEED, the recording paper
is fed (idle feeding) while the key is pressed.

138

1WMPD4004444D

8.4.

Management

Configure/display

File management ,8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management
Maintenance ,Operation history , andVersion management .
Tap a settings category to display the details screen for that category.

8.4.1.
Tap

File Management
File managementin the management settings to display the [File management] screen.

Operations can be performed on the recorded data, image data, and configuration data saved to thisproduct on the [File management] screen.

8.4.1.1.

Tap theRecording
Recordkey in the center of the [File management] screen to display the [Recording]management screen.
A list of the recorded data on the internal SSD of this product is displayed on the left side of the[Recording] management screen.
Tap the Data name or Date/Time in the recording data to display [Recording info] for that recorded dataon the right.
Recorded data list

Recording info

1WMPD4004444D

139

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Slide the recording
info up to display themodule information.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Record management Operations
Tap a selection field on the left of the list to display "✔" to select that data as the target for deletion orsetting restoration. Tap the selection field again to deselect the data.
(1) Select all:

Selects all the recorded data.

(2) Release all:Deselects all the data.

(3) Delete:

Deletes the selected recorded data.

(4) Restore recording setup:

Restores the settings saved together with the recorded data to themain unit.

(5) Update file:Updates the file format of old recorded data.

(6) Import/Export:

Exports recorded data to external media (such as an SD memory
card or USB stick) or imports (reads) the data backed up to external
media.

Restoring recording setup
The recording settings of this product are saved together with the recorded data.
Select the data for the recording conditions to restore/set again on the [Recording] management screen,
and tap the

Restore setting

key to set the recording conditions to the main unit.

140

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Tips
If the file version of the recorded data differs from the software version of the main unit, this product may
be unable to restore the recording setup.
This problem can be solved by performing a file update if the file version of the recorded data is older
than the software version of the main unit, or a system update if the version is newer.

For information on the versions, see "10.1 Version Information".

Updating a File
You can update the file format of recorded data that cannot be played back because the file version is
too old.
Select the file to update on the [Recording] management screen, and tap theUpdate file

key toupdate the file.

Tips
If you update the file of recorded data with file version 1.x.x., the following items must be set again.
・Feed length
・Output recording info XML file
For information on the versions, see "10.1 Version Information".

1WMPD4004444D

141

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Export - Backing Up Recorded Data
Connect the external storage media (such as SD memory
card or USB stick) to the main unit and confirm that the
SD/USB indicator on the side menu activates.
Tap theImport/Export

key on the bottom right of the[Record management] screen to display the external media
selection dialog and select the target external media.
Tap

OK

to switch to the [Import/Export] screen.
Recorded data list on internal SSD
Recorded data list on external media

Place a check mark (✔) on the data to back up
Place a check mark (✔) in the selection field of the data to back up and tap the

Exportkey in thecenter to export the recorded data.

142

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Import - Reading Backup Data
Open the [Import/Export] screen in the same way as when exporting data, and import backup data
backed up to external media to the main unit.
When importing, place a check mark (✔) in the recorded data list for external media on the right, andtap theImportkey in the center.

Place a check mark (✔)
in the data to read

When the same data as the backup exists in the internal
storage, a cautionary dialog box is displayed, and you
can select the appropriate operation using the
Overwrite ,1WMPD4004444D

Skip , orCancelkey.

143

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

8.4.1.2.

Tap theImage Management
Image

key in the center of the [File management] screen to display the [Image]

management screen.
Press and hold thePRINT

key on the [Image] management screen to manage the screenshot

images of the monitor.
A list of the image data on the internal SSD of this product is displayed on the left side of the screen.
Tap the date field in the list to display a preview of that image on the right.

Image data list
Image preview

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Image Management Operations
Tap a selection field on the left of the list to display "✔" to select that data as the target for operation.
Tap the selection field again to deselect the data.
(1) Select all:

Selects all the image data.

(2) Release all:Deselects all the data.

(3) Delete:

Deletes the selected image data.

(4) Print:

Prints the image data displayed in the preview from the printer.

(5) Export:

Exports image data to external media (such as an SD memory card or USB stick).

144

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Exporting Images
Tap the

Exportkey to display the external media

selection dialog box and select the target external media.
Tap

OK

to switch to the [Export] screen. Place acheck mark (✔) in the selection field of the data to export
and tap the

Exportkey in the center to export therecorded data.

Place a check mark (✔) in the selection field of the data to export
Image data list on internal SSD
Image data list on
external media

1WMPD4004444D

145

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

8.4.1.3.

Tap the

Setup

Setup

key in the center of the [File management] screen to display the [Setup]

management screen.
The [Setup] management screen enables you to manage the configuration data created with [Create aconfig file].
A list of the configuration data on the internal SSD of this product is displayed on the left side of thescreen. Tap the Name or Created field in the list to display the configuration information on the right.
List ofconfiguration data
Configuration
information

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Configuration Management Operations
Tap a selection field on the left of the list to display "✔" to select that data as the target for deletion orsetting restoration. Tap the selection field again to deselect the data.
(1) Select all:

Selects all the recorded data.

(2) Release all:Deselects all the data.

(3) Delete:

Deletes the selected recorded data.

(4) Restore setting:Updates the main unit with the configuration information of the selectedconfiguration data.

(5) Import/Export:

Exports configuration data to external media (such as an SD memory card or USB
stick) or imports (reads) the configuration data backed up to external media.

146

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Restore setting:Select the configuration data to restore/set
again on the [Setup] management screen,
then tap the

Restore setting

key to display

the [Restore setting] dialog.
Select the items to restore, then tap theOK

key to update the setting values.

Tips
The measurement mode is always restored.
If you selected to restore the PC name or
language, this product shuts down after the data
is restored.

Exporting Settings
Connect the external storage media (such as SD memory
card or USB stick) to the main unit and confirm that the
SD/USB indicator on the side menu activates.
Tap theImport/Export

key on the bottom right of the[Setup] management screen to display the external media
selection dialog and select the target external media.
Tap theOK

key to switch to the [Import/Export] screen.

Place a check mark (✔) in the selection field of the configuration data to back up and tap the

Exportkey in the center to export the configuration data.
List of configuration dataon internal SSD
List of configuration data on
external media

Place a check mark (✔) on the configuration data to back up

1WMPD4004444D

147

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

Importing Settings

Open the [Import/Export] screen in the same way as when exporting data, and import backup data
backed up to external media to the main unit.
When importing, place a check mark (✔) in the configuration data list for external media on the right,
and tap theImportkey in the center.

Place a check mark (✔)
in the configuration data
to readWhen the same configuration data as the backup exists
in the internal storage, a cautionary dialog box isdisplayed, and you can select the appropriate operation
using theOverwrite ,Skip , orCancelkey.

148

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

8.4.2.

Maintenance

CAUTION
If the maintenance check detects an error in this product, please contact our sales representative.
When the life remaining is low or the health is no longer normal, it is recommended that you replace
the SSD, as data will not be able to be retained in the long term.
If [Stop] is displayed for the state of the fan, the fan has failed and needs a repair.
The check passes if there are three or less pixel defects in the LCD at the time of delivery.
When using this product for an extended period of time, deterioration in the LCD may cause pixel
defects.
The head temperature may be high after performing printer recording for an extended period of time,
which can cause an error. In this case, check again after waiting a while.
Tap

Maintenancein the other settings to display the [Maintenance] screen to perform maintenanceon this product.
(5)
(6)

(1)
(7)

(2)

(8)

(3)

(9)

(4)
(10)

(1) SSD:

Checks the health of the internal SSD.
Tap theCheck

key to execute an SSD check and loading

test, and display the results.
(2) Fan:

Displays the state of the cooling fan.

(3) LCD:

Displays the state of the LCD.
Tap theCheck

key to display the screen for checking, whichswitches in the order red → green → blue → white → black.
Confirm that there are not any large areas with display problems(areas that are always black or white).

1WMPD4004444D

149

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management(4) Brightness: Performs a brightness adjustment test on the LCD.
Tap the - key to make the screen darker.
Tap the + key to make the screen lighter.
(5) Printer:

Displays the state of printer. You can also press the Start andStop key for test printing to check the printing state of theprinter.
Test printing prints the date and time and serial number of the main
unit on recording paper, then prints a test pattern over the entire
surface of the paper. The test pattern can be used to check forhorizontal density variation and damage to the thermal head forprinting.
<Example test print>(6) OS info report:
Outputs an OS info report file (information on the operating systemof this product) to external media. Tap the key to display the dialog
box for selecting the output destination, then tap

OK

to output

the file. It takes several minutes to output the file. (Use external
media with 1 MB or more of free space.)

Tips
The OS info report file is used for analysis at A&D when anerror occurs with this product or when it does not operate
normally. It cannot be used by customers.

(7) Buzzer:

Tap the buzzer ON/OFF key to emit a beep to confirm that thebuzzer works.

(8) LED:

Check the state of the main unit using the LED on the operation
panel.
Use the color around the rotary knob to check the fine/coarse
setting.
PRINT: Orange
Fine:
OrangeTRIG:
Blue
Coarse: BlueSTART: Green

150

1WMPD4004444D

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management(9) KEY:

Use this to check the rotary knob and keys of the operation panel.
The display on the screen is highlighted when a key on the operation panel is pressed or
the rotary knob is turned clockwise or counterclockwise.
Operation panel(10) Initialize:[Maintenance] - KEY

Initializes the settings of this product to the factory defaults. Tap theInitialize

key, then tap

OKin the confirmation dialog box

displayed for executing initialization. This product automaticallyshuts down when initialization is complete, so press the Powerswitch on the front panel to turn on this product.

Tips
The following settings are not initialized.
[Language], [Time zone], [Summer time], and [Date and time]

8.4.3.
Tap

Operation History
Operation history

1WMPD4004444D

in the other settings to display the history of the last 100 operations.

151

8. Setup Details – 8.4. Management

8.4.4.
Tap

Version Management
Version managementin the other settings to display and update the version of this product.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) System update:

Use an SD card or USB memory to update the entire system (software,
hardware, and modules).
Download the upgrade file and RA3100 update procedure from the A&D
website.

Tips

After performing a system update, it is recommended that you perform afile update on the recorded data.
(2) Module update:

Update the module only.
The module is updated to the latest version supported by the software of themain unit.
This product can perform the update by itself. An upgrade file or other file is
not required.

(3) Warning display:

This is displayed when the versions of the main unit software and module do
not match.
Need module update:This is displayed when the version of the module is older than the main unit
software. Click (2) to perform a module update.
Need system update:This is displayed when the version of the main unit software is older than themodule. Click (1) to perform a system update.

NOTE
Do not turn the power of this product OFF during a system update or module update. Doing so may
prevent it from operating normally.
152

1WMPD4004444D

9.

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.1. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)

Using Optional Modules

This chapter provides an overview of how to use optional modules.

9.1.

2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)

9.1.1.

Overview

This two channel voltage input module samples a DC to 100 kHz signal at 16-bit 1 MS/s within themeasurement range of ±100 mV to ±500 V and can perform A/D conversion. It includes an antialiasing
filter and analog filter. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output.

9.1.2.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:
Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling.

(7) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.
(8) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(9) A.A.F.:

Turns the anti-aliasing filter of the input

(1)
(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

channel on or off.
(10) Disp. pos.: Specify the display position.
(11) Disp. range: Specifies the display width in the amplitude
direction of each graph.
(12) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of thebottom of the display range.

(18)(13) Disp. max: Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.
(14) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(15) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(16) Waveform display area:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed. When disabled, the waveform is not displayed.
(17) Zero adjust: Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.
(18) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

1WMPD4004444D

153

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.1. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)

9.1.3.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enable
the

Meas.

key to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for therequired signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Set the input coupling with the

Coupling

key (6).

Coupling

Contents

DC

Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.

AC

Measures the AC component of the input signal only. Set this when you want tomeasure only the amplitude of an AC signal, as it cancels the DC offset of the signal.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside the

GNDchannel.
Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printerrecording.

*

When switching from DC coupling to AC coupling during measurement, it takes about 12 seconds
for the DC component to completely disappear.

Step 2.

Set Meas. range according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (7) in the channel setup sub

menu.
The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the input (measurement)
maximum value and corresponds to 10 div on the waveform monitor. When the display position is50%, ±RANGE (full measurement range) is displayed.
Tap theMeas. range

key and turn the rotary knob to change the range. Turn the rotary knob

counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity and clockwise to increase the sensitivity.
The following 12 measurement ranges are available.
500 V

200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V

10 V

5V

2V

1V

500 mV 200 mV 100 mV

Tips

When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning

beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

154

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.1. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)
Step 3.

Set the input filter.
Set the low-pass filter with the

L.P.F.

key (8).

The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF

3 kHz

300 Hz

30 Hz

3 Hz

Set the antialiasing filter setting with the

A.A.F.

key (9).

A steeply sloping attenuation low-pass filter. Enable this filter to automatically set the cutoff
frequency linked with the sampling speed so that aliasing does not occur in the measurement data
due to the sampling. This is particularly effective for FFT analysis. The L.P.F. setting is disabledbecause L.P.F. is used internally.
Step 4.

Set the display range and display position.
See "Description of Step 4 (setting the display range and display position (waveform display area))"in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 5.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See "Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform display
scale))" in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".

Step 6.

Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

Execute zero adjust.
After turning on the power, changes in the surrounding temperature as time elapses change theinternal temperature of the RA3100 main unit, and cause temperature drift inside the input module,
which leads to errors in measurements due to variation in the DC offset voltage. Execute zeroadjust to minimize these errors.
To perform zero cancellation, tap the

Zero adjustkey (14) after waiting for a warm-up period of

60 minutes.

NOTE

This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the input signal.

1WMPD4004444D

155

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.1. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)

9.1.4.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V(DC+ACpeak) . Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 and CH2 are insulated BNC connectors. Do not connect metallic BNC
plugs, as they may damage the connectors or cause connection problems.
Use the insulated BNC cable indicated below (RA30-507) as the signal input cables.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Insulated BNC
600V

CAT III 300V
CAT II 600V

RA30-507

MAXIMUM RATEDVOLTAGE TO

LINE VOLTAGE(safety alligator clip)

MAXIMUM RATED

Insulated BNC cable!

Safety alligator clip
Red +RA30-507

Black -

Length 1.5 m
2Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module

CommonSetup
Interface

1ch H
L
2ch H
L

Slots
±500 V
Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V

GND(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

156

Between each channel andthe chassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.2. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)

9.2.

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)

9.2.1.

Overview

This four channel voltage input module samples a DC to 100 kHz signal at 16-bit 1 MS/s within themeasurement range of ±1 V to ±200 V and can perform A/D conversion. It includes an analog filter forwaveform observation. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output.

9.2.2.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1) Slot number, input module type

(1)
(2)

(2)

(3) Select channel:
Select the channel in the slot.

(3)

(3)

(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:
Measure the input signal.

(4)

(5)

(5) Color:

Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6)(7)(6) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling.

(8)(7) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(11) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom(13)of the display range.

(14)(12) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of
the display range.

(15)

(16)

(13) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(14) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(2) Change slot:

Change the slot.

(8) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(9) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(10) Disp. range: Specifies the display width in the amplitude
direction of each graph.

(17)(15) Waveform display:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.
(16) Zero adjust:Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.

(17) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

1WMPD4004444D

157

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.2. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)

9.2.3.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enable
Meas. to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required
signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Step 2.

Set the input coupling in with the

Coupling

key (6).

Coupling

Contents

DC

Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.
Set DC coupling when performing measurement.

GND

Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside thechannel.
Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printerrecording.

Set Meas. range according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with the Meas. range key (7) in the channel setup sub
menu. The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the input(measurement) maximum value and corresponds to 10 div on the waveform monitor. When thedisplay position is 50%, ±RANGE (full measurement range) is displayed.
Tap the Meas. range key and turn the rotary knob to change the range. Turn the rotary knob
counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity and clockwise to increase the sensitivity. The following 8
measurement ranges are available.
200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V

10 V

5V

2V

1V

Tips

When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning

beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 3.

Set the input filter. Set the low-pass filter with the L.P.F. key (8).
The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF

3 kHz

300 Hz

30 Hz

3 Hz
158

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.2. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)
Step 4.

Set the display range and display position.
See "Description of Step 4 (setting the display range and display position (waveform display area))"in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. range: The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor
Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 5.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See "Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform display
scale))" in 4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. max:
Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.
Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

Step 6.

Execute zero adjust.
After turning on the power, changes in the surrounding temperature as time elapses change theinternal temperature of the RA3100 main unit, and cause temperature drift inside the input module,
which leads to errors in measurements due to variation in the DC offset voltage. Execute zeroadjust to minimize these errors.
To perform zero cancellation, tap the

Zero adjustkey (14) after waiting for a warm-up period of

60 minutes.

NOTE

This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the input signal.

9.2.4.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V(DC+ACpeak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 to CH4 are insulated BNC connectors. Do not connect metallic BNC
plugs, as they may damage the connectors or cause connection problems.
Use the insulated BNC cable indicated below (RA30-507) as the signal input cables.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Insulated BNC
600V

CAT III 300V
CAT II 600V

RA30-507

MAXIMUM RATEDVOLTAGE TO

LINE VOLTAGE

Safety alligator clip
Red +

!

(safety alligator clip)

MAXIMUM RATED

Insulated BNC cable
RA30-507

Black -

Length 1.5 m

1WMPD4004444D

159

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.2. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)
2

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module
1ch H
L
Common 2ch H
Setup
LInterface
3ch H
L
4ch H
L

Slots
±200 V

Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)±200 V
300 V (DC + AC peak)±200 V
300 V (DC + AC peak)±200 V

GND(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

160

Between each channel andthe chassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.3. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)

9.3.

2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)

9.3.1.

Overview

This two channel high voltage input module samples a DC to 5 MHz signal at 16-bit 20 MS/s within themeasurement range of ±100 mV to ±500 V and can perform A/D conversion. It includes an analog filter
for waveform observation. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output.

9.3.2.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:
Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Coupling:

(1)
(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Switch the input signal coupling.

(7) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.

(9)

(10)

(8) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(11)

(12)

(9) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(10) Disp. range: Specifies the display width in the amplitude
direction of each graph.
(11) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of thebottom of the display range.

(12) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of
the display range.

(13) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(14) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(17)(15) Waveform display:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.
(16) Zero adjust:Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.

(17) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

1WMPD4004444D

161

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.3. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)

9.3.3.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enableMeas.

to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required

signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Set the input coupling in with the

Coupling

key (6).

Coupling
DC
AC

Contents
Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.
Set DC coupling when performing measurement.
Measures the AC component of the input signal only. Set this when you want tomeasure only the amplitude of an AC signal, as it cancels the DC offset of the signal.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside the

GNDchannel.
Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printerrecording.

Step 2.

Set Meas. range according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (7) in the channel setup sub

menu.
The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the input (measurement)
maximum value and corresponds to 10 div on the waveform monitor. When the display position is50%, ±RANGE (full measurement range) is displayed.
Tap theMeas. range

key and turn the rotary knob to change the range. Turn the rotary knob

counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity and clockwise to increase the sensitivity. The following
12 measurement ranges are available.
500 V

200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V

10 V

5V

2V

1V

500 mV 200 mV 100 mV

Tips

When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning

beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

162

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.3. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)
Step 3.

Set the input filter. Set the low-pass filter with the

L.P.F.

key (8).

The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF
Step 4.

500 kHz 50 kHz

5 Hz

Set the display range and display position.
See "Description of Step 4 (setting the display range and display position (waveform display area))"in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 5.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See "Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform display
scale))" in 4.2.2. Setup the input channels".

Step 6.

Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

Execute zero adjust.
After turning on the power, changes in the surrounding temperature as time elapses change theinternal temperature of the RA3100 main unit, and cause temperature drift inside the input module,
which leads to errors in measurements due to variation in the DC offset voltage. Execute zeroadjust to minimize these errors.
To perform zero cancellation, tap the

Zero adjustkey (14) after waiting for a warm-up period of

60 minutes.

NOTE

This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the input signal.

1WMPD4004444D

163

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.3. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)

9.3.4.
1

Reference Materials

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 and CH2 are insulated BNC connectors. Do not connect metallic BNC
plugs, as they may damage the connectors or cause connection problems.
Use the insulated BNC cable indicated below (RA30-507) as the signal input cables.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Insulated BNC
600V

CAT III 300V
CAT II 600V

RA30-507

MAXIMUM RATEDVOLTAGE TO

LINE VOLTAGE(safety alligator clip)

MAXIMUM RATED

Insulated BNC cable!

Safety alligator clip
Red +RA30-507

Black -

Length 1.5 m
2Input frequency and input voltage derating characteristics
A maximum of 1000 Vp-p can be input for the voltage and 5 MHz for the frequency, but there are
restrictions on the relationship between the voltage and frequency. These set limits to avoid damage todevices and enable safe measurement.
Increased device heat and input voltage may damage the signal source and device.

Input maximum voltage(Vp-p)

Frequency - voltage derating characteristics

3

損傷限界
Damagelimit

安全使用範囲Safe
usage range

1000
800
600
400
200
0
10

100

Input frequency (kHz)

1000

10000

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module
1ch H

L
CommonSetup
Interface 2ch H
L

Slots±500 V

Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V

GND(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

Between each channel
and the chassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)

CAUTION
Use this product within the safe usage range.
With 1000 Vp-p 100 kHz, note that the input current will be approximately 21 mA, which will place aload on the signal source.
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V (DC+ACpeak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
164

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)

9.4.

2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)

9.4.1.

Overview

This two channel strain input module samples a strain signal up to 2 kHz DC at 16-bit 100 kS/s within
the measurement range of 500(μm/m=με) to 80000 (μm/m=με) and performs A/D conversion. It is usedby connecting the output of a strain gauge type converter or strain gauge. It includes an auto balanceand simple bridge check function. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output.

NOTE
When using this module, the Remote Control Module (RA30-112) must be installed to slot 9 of the
RA3100 main unit.

9.4.2.

Connection Method

The bridge box and strain gauge type converter are connected using the optional NDIS conversion
cable (RA30-508).
NDIS conversion cable (RA30-508)

Bridge box
orRA30-104

strain gauge type converter
NDIS4109 (small plug)

NDIS4102 (jack)

Tips
The nonlinearity, balance adjustment range and balance adjustment precision of this module aredefined by the end of the NDIS conversion cable.

NOTE
Hold the connector when inserting or removing the NDIS conversion cable and avoid applying
excessive tension on the cable side (by folding, pulling, or twisting the cable).
Excessive tension may cause the cable to break or be damaged.

1WMPD4004444D

165

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)

9.4.3.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >Channel setup sub menu 1

(1)
(2)

(1) Slot number, input module type

<Channel setup sub menu 1>(2)(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform(6)

monitor.
(6) Channel setup sub menu 2:
Tap this box to display <Channel setup sub
menu 2>.
(7) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(8) Disp. range: Specify the display width in the amplitude

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

direction of each graph.
(9) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of thebottom of the display range.

(10) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the topof the display range.

(13)
(14)

(11) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(12) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(13) Wave disp.:

When enabled, the waveform is displayed in
the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.

(14) Measurable range/Measured value:
Displays the current available measurement
range and measurement value.

166

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)<Channel setup sub menu 2>

Channel setup sub menu 2(15) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling to STRAIN
or GND.

(16) BAL:

Imbalance in the strain gauge bridge. Also
enables you to cancel the imbalanced part.
When balancing is performed, [R-FINE] is

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

reset to zero.
(17) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.
(18) R-FINE:

Perform balance fine adjustment.

(19) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(20) CAL value:

Change the setting value of the internal
calibrator.

(21)

The setting range is 1 to 9999 (μm/m=με).
(21) CAL:

Switch the output of the internal calibrator to+, OFF, or -.

+:Outputs the internal calibrator setting value set for-:

Outputs the internal calibrator setting value set for

(22)

(23)

the CAL value as a positive value.
(24)

the CAL value as a negative value.

OFF: Disables the output of the internal calibrator. (Thesetting value is still displayed but is not output.)

Tips
Disable this after use as a calibration value (when performing measurement).
The internal calibrator setting value is added to the input signal.
(22) B.V.:

Switch the bridge power voltage.

(23) Bridge:

Perform a simple bridge check. If a bridge error is detected, an error message isdisplayed. (The message "Bridge is in error." is displayed if an error is detected.) If thiserror message is displayed, check the connection between the bridge and the sensor.

(24) Close:

When you tap the

Closekey, <Channel setup sub menu 2> is closed and <Channel

setup sub menu 1> is displayed.

1WMPD4004444D

167

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)

9.4.4. Measurement Setup
Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enable
the

Meas.

key to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for therequired signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the example below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Configure synchronization settings for the chassis bridge power carrier.
Set the OSC of the Remote Control Module (RA30-112) to [Internal].

Tips
For details, see "9.10 Remote Control Module (RA30-112)".
However, if you are concerned about the impact of the beat when using multiple RA3100 mainunits, follow the procedure in "Chassis Bridge Power Carrier Synchronization" in "9.4.5
Reference Materials" to synchronize the chassis.
Step 2.

Set coupling.
Set the coupling using (15)

Coupling

in channel setup sub menu 2.

Coupling
STRAIN
GND
Step 3.

Description
Select this when measuring strain.
Select this when checking the zero level.

Set the bridge power.
Set the bridge power using (22)B.V.

in channel setup sub menu 2.

Bridge power

Description

2 VrmsSet a bridge power voltage suitable for the strain gauge or strain gauge type

0.5 Vrms

converter to connect.

Tips
The bridge voltage is constantly output.
When measuring particularly large strain, set the bridge voltage to 0.5 Vrms.
Step 4.

Perform a simple bridge check.
Perform the simple bridge check using (23)Bridge Checkin channel setup sub menu 2.

Perform a simple bridge check to check for problems in the connection with the strain gauge or
strain gauge type converter. If an error message is displayed, check the connection between thebridge and the sensor.

Tips
A simple bridge check enables bridge edge short circuits and some bridge edge and cable
open circuits to be detected. However, it does not enable the location of the short circuit oropen circuit to be identified.

168

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
Step 5.

Set the measurement range.
Set the measurement range using (17)Meas. range

in channel setup sub menu 2.

Set a measurement range suitable for the expected input strain size.
The following six ranges are available for each bridge power.
Bridge power

Measurement range (μm/m=με)2 Vrms

500

1000

2000

5000

10000

20000

0.5 Vrms

2000

4000

8000

20000

40000

80000

Tips
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning
beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep! Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 6.

Set the low-pass filter.
Set the low pass filter using (19)L.P.F.

in channel setup sub menu 2.

Set a low pass filter to cut out unnecessary frequency components and noise as required. The highfrequency components above the set value and noise are removed. Note that setting a lower
frequency value causes a delayed response, so this function should be disabled unless it isrequired.
OFF
Step 7.

300 Hz100 Hz

30 Hz

10 Hz

Set the display range and display position.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position (Display
Area)".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 8.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position(Waveform Display Scale)".
Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

1WMPD4004444D

169

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
Step 9.

Execute initial balancing. Execute initial bridge balancing using (16)BAL

in channel setup sub

menu 2. Execute initial bridge balancing when there is no load on the bridge.
If zero cannot be found due to noise or another reason, perform fine adjustment using (18)
R-FINE

in <channel setup sub menu 2>.

Tips

The imbalance component of the strain gauge bridge includes both resistance imbalance and capacity
imbalance, but only the resistance imbalance is canceled by executing

BAL . The capacity imbalance

is automatically canceled on a constant basis.
If zero deviates when there is no load on the bridge due to environmental changes, execute initialbalancing again.

9.4.5. Reference Materials

CAUTION
Do not connect the input terminal to a device other than a bridge box or a strain gauge sensor
connected using a gauge type converter. Do not input voltage or current. Doing so may lead to failure.
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 100 V (DC + AC peak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
When measuring a location with electric potential, do not touch the metallic parts of the input wire, as
electric potential occurs in the cable itself. Doing so may cause electrocution.
1

Front panel

Input connector (NDIS4109 receptacle)

Pin layout
Pin number
A
B
C

Function
Bridge power +Input -

Bridge power -D

Input +

E

CommonF
G
H

Not connectedJ
2

Conversion cable
The input connectors for CH1 and CH2 are NDIS4109 connectors.
Use the NDIS conversion cable (RA30-508) indicated below.
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
NDIS4109

NDIS conversion↕

cable (RA30-508)

NDIS4102
Length 0.6 m
170

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
RA30-104
Input connector side

Sensor side

NDIS4109 (small plug)

NDIS4102 (jack)
NDIS conversion cable (RA30-508)

Input connector side pin layout
Pin number
A
B
C
D
E

Sensor side pin layout

Function

Pin number

Bridge power +A

Bridge power -C

ShieldE

Input -

B

Input +

D

F

F

G

G

H

Not connected

Function
Bridge power +Input -

Bridge power Input +ShieldNot connected

J

3

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main

Input module

Slots

1ch
Between channels
100 V (DC + AC peak)

2ch

GND
(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

1WMPD4004444D

171

Between each channel and thechassis, to ground
100 V (DC + AC peak)9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
4

With bridge box connection
An A&D bridge box is described in this example. The bridge box includes a terminal box, cables, andconnectors. The terminal box has a terminal for connecting the strain gauge and three high-performance
resistors. A strain gauge is connected to complete the bridge circuit, and a shorting bar is included toachieve various gauge connection methods.
Hold this part when inserting it.
Gauge

RA30-104

Bridge box
Wire the strain gauge as short as possible
between the point of measurement and thebridge box, in order to reduce noise. Gauge

When removing it, hold this part and pull it
out without turning.

factor compensation is performed for the strain
gauge with the lead wire included. Do not cut
or extend the lead wire.

Bridge box exterior (single gauge method)(1) Installation method
Install the bridge box as near the measurement point as possible.
To secure it in place, attach screws to the installation holes.
Do not install it in locations with a high level of moisture, locations subject to sudden changes intemperature, or locations subject to strong electric fields or strong magnetic fields.
When installation is complete, secure the connection cable so that it moves as little as possible.
(2) Bridge box exterior and connection method
Gauge
Installation hole
Shorting bar

Ground terminal

Installation hole

Terminal box

A
Bridge power
Bridge output

B

For information onECconnecting the E terminal,
see "Connecting the EDTerminal" in "9.4.5
Reference Materials".

Example bridge box connection (single gauge method)
Connector Wiring
When wiring the connectors, the A and C terminals supply bridge power and the B and D
terminals are input to the RA30-104, as indicated in the figure above.
Bridge Box Wiring
For information on the main bridge circuit and main wiring method for strain measurement, see"Example Bridge Configuration with Strain Bridge" in "9.4.5 Reference Materials".

Example strain gauge connection (single gauge method)

172

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
When using a converter via a bridge box, see the figure below.
For information on connecting the E terminal, see "Connecting the E Terminal" in "9.4.5
Reference Materials".

RA30-104
Rg

D

R
A
B

R

C
R

Bridge output (e)Single gauge method
converter
Power supply to bridge (E)Example converter connection (single gauge method)
Impact of Cable Length
If the cable connecting the bridge box and RA30-104 is too long, the cable conductor
resistance will cause the bridge voltage to decrease and cause a difference between the strain
value and the value measured with this module. Refer to "Correcting the Measured Strain
Value (3) When the cable distance between the bridge box and converter is too long" in "9.4.5
Reference Materials" to perform correction with physical conversion, as required.
Precautions Regarding Lead Wire
If the lead wire from the strain gauge to the bridge box is too long, the gauge factor will seemto drop and the output linearity will be adversely affected, even if initial balancing is performed.
Ensure that the lead wire from the strain gauge is as short as possible (2 m or shorter). Use astrain gauge that includes a lead wire if necessary. The gauge factor of a gauge that includes
a lead wire is calibrated with the lead wire, so do not cut or extend the lead wire.

1WMPD4004444D

173

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
5

Connecting a Converter
Many strain gauge type converters measure by receiving the physical quantity to measure with anelastic body and converting the strain that occurs into an electric quantity. The elastic body is also
referred to as the sensor. The sensor is made of a material with a high proportional limit and low creep
and hysteresis. The sensor is connected to the strain gauge to form the bridge circuit. Temperaturecompensation and anti-humidity treatment are performed. For details on converters, see the technicalmaterials of each manufacturer.
(1) Installation method
When using converters with this product, perform wiring as indicated in the figure.
Bridge circuit
Relay, extension connector pin layout

A
D

Bridge power
B

C

A

B

E Shield

C

D

Bridge output
Connection with converter

A&D provides optional relay cables and extension cables for directly connecting converters with adynamic strain measurement device. A&D relay cables and extension cables are manufactured
based on the input connector standards for strain measurement devices issued by The JapaneseSociety for Non-Destructive Inspection. When the connection cable for a converter has noconnector and is a discrete wire, it can also be connected using a bridge box. See "Connection
when Using a Bridge Box" in "9.4.5 Reference Materials".

Relay cable (plug⇔plug)

Extension cable (plug⇔jack)

174

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)

Tips
Secure the converter as indicated in the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer, as
an unstable converter may cause malfunction or noise.
A converter and connector are normally humidity-proof but ensure that they are insulated andnot exposed to water or rain.
If the distance of the cable from this product to the converter is too long, the bridge voltage will
drop and measurement value compensation will be required because of the difference
between the measurement value and the voltage output from the bridge. For information on
the compensation method, see "Measurement Value Compensation".
Use a converter with the E terminal of this product and the other A, B, C, and D terminals notconnected.
Do not place the converter and connection cable within a strong electric field or magnetic field.
Impact of Cable Length
If the cable connecting the converter and RA30-104 is too long, the cable conductor resistancewill cause the bridge voltage to decrease and result in a difference between the strain value
and the value measured with this module. Refer to "Correcting the Measured Strain Value (3)When the Cable Distance between the Bridge Box and Converter is Too Long" in "9.4.5
Reference Materials" to perform correction with physical conversion, as required.

1WMPD4004444D

175

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
6

Example Bridge Configuration with Strain Bridge
When incorporating a strain gauge in the four edges of a Wheatstone bridge circuit, combinations of 1,
2, and 4 gauges can be used. This enables different combinations where the gauges are separated by
the strain received by the strain gauge, such as same sign same value, different sign same value, anddifferent sign constant proportion value. The properties of the bridge can also be effectively utilized to
implement measures for temperature compensation, error elimination, and output boosting.
The example bridge configurations here use standard strain gauges. The symbols used are indicatedbelow.
R :Fixed resistance value (Ω)

K :Gauge factor of strain gauge (2.00)

Rg :Strain gauge resistance value (Ω)ε :Strain value (μm/m=με)

Rd :Dummy gauge resistance value (Ω) E :Bridge applied voltage (V)r:Lead wire resistance value (Ω)ν :Poisson ratio of object to measuree :Output voltage from bridge (V)N :Bridge output coefficient via gauge method

For information on attaching strain gauges, the features of gauges, and measurement method with abridge circuit, see the technical documentation of the strain gauge manufacturer and the "Strain Gauge
Testing I", "Strain Gauge Testing II", and "Strain Gauge Testing III" documents issued by The JapaneseSociety for Non-Destructive Inspection.
The bridge box wiring method below is using an A&D bridge box.
Circuit

R
A
Rg

D

R
C OutputR(e)

B
Bridge voltage (E)
D

r

Gauge
methodSingle

R
A
Rg

B

R
C OutputRd (e)

Bridge voltage (E)
R

A
Rg1

D

B

R
C Output
Rg2 (e)Bridge voltage (E)Bridge box wiring
methodRg

Applications/remarks
Simple pulling, compressing,Rg

simple bendinggauge

D C B AmethodE

Few changes in surrounding
temperature
Bridge output coefficient N = 1
Strain value = measurement value / N

SingleRR
A C Output gauge
Rg rB'(e) Three wireRr B
wiringBridge voltage (E) method
D

ExampleOne

Simple pulling, compressing,

Rg

Rg

simple bending

D C B A
B' E

Rg

Rd

Rg

dummy

D C B A

gauge

E

DoubleRd

Bridge output coefficient N = 1
Simple pulling, compressing,simple bending
Temperature compensation via
dummy gauge
Bridge output coefficient N = 1
Strain value = measurement value / N

Rg1

Rg2

activeRg1

D C B A

gauge
methodstrain gauge lead wire
Strain value = measurement value / N

active/one

methodTemperature compensation for

E

Rg2

176

Simple pulling, compressing,simple bending
Temperature compensation
Bridge output coefficient N = 1 + ν
Strain value = measurement value / N

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
Circuit

R
A
Rg1

D

B

Gauge
methodmethodRg1

DoubleR
C
Output active
Rg2 (e)gauge

Bridge voltage (E)Bridge box wiring

ExampleRg2

Rg1

D C B AmethodE

Rg2

Applications/remarks
Bending strain detection
Eliminate pulling or compressing
strainTemperature compensation
Bridge output coefficient N = 2
Strain value = measurement value / N
Detect pulling or compressing

R

D

Rg2
C
R

Opposite

Output side two
active(e)Bgauge
Bridge voltage (E)method

A
Rg1

Rg2

Rg1

Rg1

D C B AE

Rg2

strain only
Eliminate bending strain
The impact of temperaturechanges is doubled
Bridge output coefficient N = 2
Strain value = measurement value / N
Detect pulling or compressing
strain only

OppositeD' r rside twoRr
Rg2 Output active
A C
(e)
gauge
Rg1 R
r
B'
three wirer r
B Bridge voltage (E) wiring
method

Rg2

Rg1

Rg2

Rg1

Eliminate bending strain
The impact of temperature

D C B Achanges is doubledD'

Temperature compensation for

B' E

strain gauge lead wire
Bridge output coefficient N = 2
Strain value = measurement value / N

Rg4
A
Rg1

D

B

Four

Rg3
C
Output active
Rg2 (e)gauge

Bridge voltage (E)

Rg4
A
Rg1

D

B

Rg4
A
Rg1

B

Rg2

Rg3
Rg1

Rg4
Rg2

Rg1
Four
Rg3
C
Output active
Rg2 (e)gauge

Bridge voltage (E)DmethodRg1

method

Rg2
Rg1

Rg3

D C B A
Rg4

Rg3

Rg3

Rg2 Rg1

D C B A
Rg4
Rg3

methodRg3 Rg4 Rg2 Rg3

1WMPD4004444D

E

Temperature compensation
Bridge output coefficient N = 2 (1 + ν)Strain value = measurement value / N
Bending strain detection only
Eliminate pulling or compressing
strain

Rg4
Rg3

Rg3
C
Output active
Rg2 (e)gauge

Bridge voltage (E)strain only
Eliminate bending strain

Rg1 Rg2 Rg1 Rg4

Four

Rg2 Rg1

Detect pulling or compressing

E

Rg2 Rg1

Temperature compensation
Bridge output coefficient N = 4
Strain value = measurement value / N
Twisting strain detection only
Eliminate pulling, compressing,and bending strain

177

D C B A

Temperature compensation

Rg4

Bridge output coefficient N = 4

EStrain value = measurement value / N

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
7

Connecting the E Terminal
The E terminal of this module is connected to the common terminal (COM) of the strain input insulated
from the chassis.
The shell of the NDIS4109 input connector is connected to the chassis.
Input cable (four core shielded cable)

NDIS input connector (shell connected to chassis)

ChassisCOM
Strain type converter, bridge box
Not connected

GND (power GND terminal)

Tips
When the chassis of the bridge box or strain gauge type converter has GND potential, not connecting
the E terminal to the chassis of the bridge box or strain gauge type converter may improve stability andreduce noise.

8

Strain Measurement Value Compensation(1) When the gauge factor differs
The gauge factor of this product is assumed to be 2.00.
Perform the following compensation calculation when a strain gauge with a gauge factor other than
2.00 is used.
Strain value [μm/m=με] =2.00
K× measurement value [μm/m=με]

K: Gauge factor of strain gauge used
(2) When the gauge method differs
The measured strain value of this product is that with a gauge factor of 2.00 and the single gauge
method.
When the double gauge method or four gauge method is used, compensation calculation is
performed according to the formula in "Main gauge methods and measured strain values after
compensation". For information on Wheatstone bridge circuits, see "Example Bridge Configuration
with Strain Bridge" in "9.4.5 Reference Materials".
Main gauge methods and measured strain values after compensation
Measured strain value = measured value /Main gauge method
Double gauge
methodFour gauge
methodConverter*

bridge output coefficient N

One active/one dummy

Bridge output coefficient N = 1

Two active

Bridge output coefficient N = 2, 1 + ν

Opposite side two active

Bridge output coefficient N = 2

Four active

Bridge output coefficient N = 4, 2 (1 + ν)Four active

Bridge output coefficient N = 1*

A converter normally uses the four gauge method, but output corresponds to the single gauge
method.
178

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)(3) When the cable distance between the bridge box and converter is too longIf the cable connecting the bridge box, converter, and RA30-104 is too long, the cable conductor
resistance will cause the bridge voltage to decrease and cause a difference between the strain
value and the value measured with this module. Perform compensation using the physical quantity
conversion function as required.
Example of bridge voltage drop
Bridge resistance*

Length from NDIS conversion cable connector (jack) top bridge box
20 m

50 m

100 m

200 m

120 Ω

-1.2 %-2.9 %-5.6 %-10.6 %

350 Ω

-0.4 %-1.0 %-2.0 %-3.9 %

Example calculated with tin-plated annealed copper wire, 0.5 mm2, 20°C, 35.73 Ω/km.
(When using A&D relay cable and extension cable)

9

Chassis Bridge Power Carrier Synchronization
When using this module (RA30-104) across multiple RA3100 units, it is necessary to synchronize thebridge power supplies. If not, a beat will occur between the bridge power supplies, which can cause anincorrect signal to be measured. The impact of the beat differs according to the target configuration formeasurement and the distance between the sensors.
Measurement

RA3100

Low beat impact even
without synchronization

target1
SensorRA30-104

Different measurementtarget

RA3100Measurement

RA30-104

Long sensor distancetarget2
SensorConfiguration with low beat impact
RA3100Measuremen

RA30-104

Beat impact occurs
unless synchronized

RA3100RA30-104

tSensortargetSame measurement

SensorShort sensor distancetargetConfiguration with high beat impact
When connecting multiple RA3100 units with chassis synchronization, connect the RA30-112 (Remote
Control Module) installed to the RA3100 using the RA30-505 remote control cable (for connecting
units).
MasterSlave
Carrier signal for
AC strain

RA3100RA30-112
OUT 14P
OSC internal
AC Strain Module

RA3100RA30-112
20P IN
OUT

Slave
Carrier signal for
AC strain
14P

RA310020P INOSC external

OSC external

AC Strain Module

AC Strain Module

Connecting multiple (three) RA3100 units with chassis synchronization
1WMPD4004444D

RA30-112179

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)9.5.

16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)

9.5.1.

Overview

This module is a logic measurement module that converts 16 channels (8 channels x 2) of input signals
into high level or low level logic signals according to a threshold. It supports voltage (high level /lowlevel) detection and non-voltage contact (open/close) of input signals. Pulses can respond at 1 μs or
lower. 16 channel data synchronizes for measurement and recording. The probe that can connect to thismodule is an optional 1539S floating voltage probe for recording the existence of 100 V or 200 V system
voltage and the 1540S and 1543S voltage conversion probes for recording voltage increases anddecreases for AC 100 V systems and AC 200 V systems.

9.5.2.

Setting the Input Channel

The Input signal setting of this module differs for voltage and contact, as indicated below.
<Voltage input><Contact input>

(1)
(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(6)

(7)

(12)

(13)

(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot:

Change the slot.

(3) Select channel:

Select the channel in the slot.

(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:

Measure the input signal.

(5) Color:

Change the display color of the waveform monitor.

(6) Input signal:

Select voltage or contact. This setting can be selected for both CHA (8 ch) and CHB(8 ch).
180

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)(7) Threshold setting: When

Input signal

is set to voltage,

V-Threshold(7) can be set.

Three types of threshold for voltage detection can be selected.
When

Input signal

is set to contact,

R-Threshold(7) can be set.

Three types of threshold for contact detection can be selected.
(8) Disp. pos.:

Sets the display position for the logic signal of CHA or CHB.
The low level position of CH-4 is the set value.

(9) Disp. range:

Sets the display amplitude for the logic signal of CHA or CHB.
Specified as the percentage of the display width when the full range of each graph is
100%.
The eight channel signals are displayed at equal intervals and the overall display
width can be set.

(10) Signal amplitude: Sets the high level (waveform) height as a percentage to the low level of eachchannel. An example of the display for each signal unit is indicated in the figure
below.
When the signal unit is set to "8 ch"

When the signal unit is set to "1 ch"
100 %

100 %
50 %

100 %
80 %

(11) Signal unit:

Sets whether to assign channels to the graph on a single channel basis or eightchannel basis.
When the signal unit is set to "8 ch", assign channels on a CHA or CHB basis (eightchannels at a time).
When the signal unit is set to "1 ch", assign channels for CH1 to CH8 basis (onechannel at a time).
For information on channel assignment, see "SHEET1/SHEET2/SHEET3" in "8.1.3
Sheet Setup".

1WMPD4004444D

181

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)(12) Graph/Wave display:
Tap inside the Graph/Wave display frame to display the setting dialog.
Set G1 to G18 for the graph using the graph keys.
When waveform display is enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform
monitor. When disabled, the waveform is not displayed.

(13) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

182

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)

9.5.3.

Measurement Setup

CAUTION
The maximum voltage input is 24 V.
Take care, as applying high voltage can damage the module.
Use the 1539S floating voltage probe when inputting high voltage.
Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enableMeas.

to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required

signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input CHA and input CHB.
Step 1.

Select voltage or contact in

Input signal(6).

For voltage input, the high / low state of the voltage is displayed as binary data with the waveform
indicating the high level / low level.
For contact connection, the open/closed state of the non-voltage contact is displayed as binary
data with the waveform indicating the high level/low level.
Contact input

contact
RA30-105

Voltage input
Step 2.

Set

voltageThreshold value

Open

Short

Low level

High level(7) according to the target for measurement.

Voltage input
Threshold value

High level

Low level

1.4 V

1.8 V or more

1.0 V or less

2.5 V

3.0 V or more

2.0 V or less

4V

4.6 V or more

3.4 V or lessThreshold value

Open

Short

2 kΩ

2.0 kΩ or more

250 Ω or less5 kΩ

5.0 kΩ or more

1.5 kΩ or less9 kΩ

9.0 kΩ or more

3.0 kΩ or lessContact input

Tips
The state of the input signal cannot be correctly detected if it is outside the detection range.
With contact connection, a load current of about 0.5 mA flows.
Step 3.

Set the channel for monitor display or printer recording in

Step 4.

Set

Disp. pos.

1WMPD4004444D(8) and

Disp. range

(9).

183

Display signal(10).

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)

9.5.4.
1

Reference Materials

Pin layout of input connector
This module can input 16 channels, but eight channels are grouped in CHA and CHB, respectively.
The input, trigger, and waveform display settings are set separately for CHA and CHB.
The connectors are also separate for CHA and CHB.
A10

A1

A10

A1

B10

B1

B10

B1

CHA connectorPinnumber

Sig name

CHB connectorPinnumberPin

Sig name

number

Sig namePinnumber

A1

+5VA2

B1

A1

+5VA2

B1

A2

+5VA2

B2

A2

+5VA2

B2

A3

CH8

B3

A3

CH8

B3

A4

CH7

B4

A4

CH7

B4

A5

CH6

B5

A5

CH6

B5

A6

CH5

B6

A6

CH5

B6

A7

CH4

B7

A7

CH4

B7

A8

CH3

B8

A8

CH3

B8

A9

CH2

B9

A9

CH2

B9

A10

CH1

B10

A10

CH1

B10

GND

Sig name

GND*

Connector for input signal: DF02R020NA3 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)*

The A series and B series are complementary. GND (B series) is the input common for A series
signals.

*

The plugs (manufacturer model numbers) corresponding to each input signal connector are
indicated below.
Compatible plug: DF02P020F22A1 (soldered type), DF02P020G28A1 (pressure connected type)184

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)2

Maximum rated voltage to ground
Input module

RA3100 main unit

CHA H
LCommonSetup
Interface CHB H
L

CHA (CH1 to CH8) and CHB (CH1 to CH8) for each
±24 V
L: Common to each channel
±24 V

GND
(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

Between each channel andthe chassis, to ground
42 V (DC + AC peak)

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) does not exceed 42 V
(DC+ACpeak).Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
There is no insulation between the inputs. L (GND) is connected internally.

3

For a probe (1539S/1540S/1543S) connection(1) Connection method
When using a 1539S floating voltage probe or 1540S/1543S voltage conversion probe in conjunction
with this product, use an 8 channel logic cable (RA30-503) to wire the probe as indicated in the figure.
Up to two probes can be connected to a single channel.
RA30-105

8 channel logic cable
RA30-503

Floating voltage probe1539S

8 channel logic cable
RA30-503

Probe for voltage variation
1540S/1543S

CHA
or
CHB

RA30-105

CHA
or
CHB

(2) Configuration
Contact the input signal and set the resistance threshold to 2k Ω.

1WMPD4004444D

185

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)

9.5.5.
1

Options

Connection cables and terminal blocks
The following cables, terminal blocks, and probes are provided for signal input.
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics

8 ch logic cable(IC clip)
RA30-501

For logic input
20P - 4CH x 2,
shared ground
1.5 m

8 ch logic cable(alligator clip)
RA30-502

For logic input
20P - 4CH x 2,
shared ground
1.5 m
For 1539S connection
20P - 4CH x 2,
shared ground
Length 0.3 m
For MDR 20 pole terminal blockconnection
20P - 20P
Length 2 m

8 channel logic cable(round connector
conversion)
RA30-503
Terminal blockconnection cable
RA30-504
Remote control cable(discrete wires)
RA30-506

Terminal block
AX-PCX-10S20

2

For remote control input
Length 2 m
20p

10p

For MDR 20 pole terminal block(for AWG16-28)

11p

1p

1 to 10: A1 to A10
11 to 20: B1 to B10

Probe
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
RA30-105
8 channel logic cable(round connector
conversion)
Connect with a RA30-503
4 inputs

Floating voltage
probe 1539S

Probe for voltage
variation
1540S:
AC100/120V

RA30-105
8 channel logic cable(round connector
conversion)
Connect with a RA30-503
1 input

1543S:
AC220/240V

186

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)
3

Pin layout
Pin layout of RA30-105 input connectors and correspondence chart of remote control cables andterminal block connection cables.
For a combination of AX-PCX-10S20 terminal block and RA30-504 cable

Sig name

RA30-105
CHA / CHB
connecter
Pin no.

+5VA2

A1

1

GND

B1

11

+5VA2

A2

2

GND

B2

12

CH8

A3

3

GND

B3

13

CH7

A4

4

GND

B4

14

CH6

A5

5

GND

B5

15

CH5

A6

6

GND

B6

16

CH4

A7

7

GND

B7

17

CH3

A8

8

GND

B8

18

CH2

A9

9

GND

B9

19

CH1

A10

10

GND

B10

20

1WMPD4004444D

Combination of
RA30-506
AX-PCX-10S20 terminal
Remote control cable (discrete wires)block and RA30-504 cable
Pin no.
Wire color Mark color Mark indication

187

OrangeLight grayWhite
Yellow
Pink
OrangeLight gray
White

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

Red

-

Black

-

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)
⑧ ⑦ ⑥
⑤ ④ ③

For a round connector 8 channel logic cable
RA30-105
CHA / CHB connecter
Sig
name
+5VA2

RA30-503
8 channel logic cable (round connector conversion)

Pin number

Pin number

A1

6

GND

B1

5

+5VA2

A2

6

GND

B2

5

CH8

A3

4

GND

B3

NC

CH7

A4

3

GND

B4

NC

CH6

A5

2

GND

B5

NC

CH5

A6

1

GND

B6

NC

CH4

A7

4

GND

B7

NC

CH3

A8

3

GND

B8

NC

CH2

A9

2

GND

B9

NC

CH1

A10

1

GND

B10

NC

Mark indication
CH5-8
CH1-4

② ①

Mark color
Blue
ShieldBlue
ShieldYellow
Orange

CH5-8

Red
Brown
Yellow
Orange

CH1-4

Red
Brown

188

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)

9.6.

2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)

9.6.1.

Overview

This module is a two channel temperature measurement module that can set three measurement
ranges for each thermocouple (TC) and platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensor, andperform 16-bit sampling with a three-stage data update rate to enable A/D conversion.
It includes functions for switching the internal/external reference junction and checking for
disconnections. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output, to safely support
general temperature measurement.

9.6.2.

Setting the Input Channel

The settings differ according to whether

Sensor(6) is set to the thermocouple (TC) or platinum

resistance temperature detector (RTD) type.
<TC>

<RTD>

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(4)

(5)

(5)

(7)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(18)
(19)

(19)

(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot:

Change the slot.

(3) Select channel:

Select the channel in the slot.

(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:

Measure the input signal.

(5) Color:

Change the display color of the waveform monitor.

(6) Sensor:

Select [TC] or [RTD] as the sensor type.

1WMPD4004444D

189

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)(7) Type:

For a thermocouple (TC) sensor, select K, E, J, T, N, R, S, B, or C as thethermocouple (TC) to connect.

For RTD, select Pt100 (1 mA), Pt100 (0.5 mA), or

Pt1000 (0.1 mA).
(8) Meas. range:

Set the temperature range to measure. Three types of ranges can be selected foreach sensor type.

(9) Refresh data:

Select low speed (1 s), medium speed (100 ms), or high speed (1.5 ms) as the data
update speed.

(10) RJC:

Select [Internal] to directly connect the sensor when using a thermocouple (TC).
When placing the reference junction (cooling point) outside, select [External] toperform temperature compensation.

(11) LFD:

Set [ON] or [OFF]. When set to [ON], the output goes over the scale when there is a
disconnection.

(12) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(13) Disp. range:

Specifies the display width in the amplitude direction of each graph.

(14) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

(15) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

(16) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(17) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(18) Waveform display area:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed. When disabled, the waveform is not
displayed.
(19) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

9.6.3.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, and set the sensor type, etc. to use for the corresponding input
module.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Select thermocouple (TC) and platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensor in
Sensor , and set the sensor type in

Step 2.

Connect the signal and enable

Meas.

Type .
to display the input waveform on the monitor screen.

Perform adjustment for the required signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Step 3.

Set

Meas. range

according to the target for measurement.

The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the maximum value of thetemperature to input (measure).
For temperature measurement, the minimum value of the measured value differs from +RANGE.
Check the actual measurement range in [Measurable range].

190

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)

Tips

When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom right ofthe screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with the measurement range
so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning beep, disable the buzzer

sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in "8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 4.

Set theRefresh data .

Select high speed, medium speed, or low speed as the data refresh rate.
With low speed (1s), the response speed is slower but there is less variation in data and accurate
measurement can be performed.
At medium speed (100 ms), the data is updated 10 times per second. This provides more stablemeasurement accuracy than with high speed.
With high speed (1.5 ms), the response speed is faster and quickly changing temperatures can bemeasured. The measurement certainty specifications are also fulfilled with high speed.
Step 5.

Set

RJC .

When connecting a reference junction device such as a ZERO-CON, set it to [External].
When set to [Internal], measure the temperature of the front panel to use as the reference junction.
Step 6.

Set

LFD .

Step 7.

Set the display range and display position.
See "Description of Step 4 (setting the display range and display position (waveform display area))"in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 8.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See "Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform display
scale))" in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

NOTE

When the sampling speed of this product is lower than the data update time of this module, the samedata is output during the update period.

1WMPD4004444D

191

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)

9.6.4.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Do not connect something other than a sensor (thermocouple (TC) or platinum resistancetemperature detector) to an input terminal.
(Do not input voltage or current. Doing so may lead to failure.)
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V (DC+ACpeak) . Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
When measuring a location with electric potential using a non-insulated thermocouple (TC) or
platinum resistance temperature detector, never touch the metallic parts of the input wire, as electric
potential occurs in the cable itself.
1

Front panel

2

Thermocouple (TC) sensor connection method

2.1 Connection terminal
After screwing the thermocouple (TC) into the temperature sensor connector, insert it into the connectorof the front panel.
The terminal names of the input connectors are indicated on the left side of the panel as + , - ,and S .

+ /A terminal Connect the + side wire of the thermocouple (TC).
- /B terminal Connect the - side wire of the thermocouple (TC).
S /b terminal

Terminal for shielding. Connect the sheath (shield) wire of the non-contact typesheathed thermocouple (TC). Leave the S terminal unconnected for the grounded type.

NOTE

When using the non-contact type sensor, the S terminal must be insulated from the + terminal and terminal.

If they are connected, correct measurement will not be able to be performed and failure may occur.
The thermocouple (TC) has a + and - side. Connect them correctly.
(Correct measurement will not be able to be performed if the + and - sides are switched.)

Make sure the resistance value of the thermocouple (TC) is 1 kΩ or less.
Use a compatible extension wire for thermocouple (TC) extension.
Connect a single thermocouple (TC) to a single channel.

Wire the thermocouple (TC) cable away from the power line and sources of noise.
2.2 Thermocouple (TC) sensor connection diagram
Non-contact type thermocouple

Sheath (shield)

Thermocouple+
S

Thermocouple and sheath
Connect as required

Insulated

Temperature sensor connector
192

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)
Contact type thermocouple

Sheath (shield)

Thermocouple+

Connected to sheath at-end of thermocouple (TC)S

Do not connect S terminal

Temperature sensor connector
2.3 Types and characteristics of thermocouples (TC)
Thermocouple
Characteristics(TC)
B

Cannot measure low temperatures at

High usage temperature.

or below 0°C.

Suitable for precise measurement in oxidizing
atmospheres and inert gas at highR, S

Disadvantages

temperatures. Good precision and little
variation or deterioration. Used as standard
thermocouple (TC).

The electromotive force characteristic
has poor linearity.
Poor linearity of electromotive force
characteristic.
Cannot measure low temperatures ator below 0°C.

Stable thermo-electromotive force at a wideNrange of temperatures from low temperature tohigh temperature
Good linearity of thermo-electromotive forceKand suitable for oxidizing atmospheres. Most
common for industrial use.

E
J

Poor linearity of electromotive force
characteristic.

High thermo-electromotive force.
High thermo-electromotive force, for industrial

Poor linearity of electromotive force

use and medium range temperatures.

characteristic.

Stable thermo-electromotive force and suitableTfor precision measurement at low

Low maximum usage temperature.

temperatures.
C
3

Suitable for reducing atmospheres, inert gases,
and hydrogen gas.

Cannot be used in air.

Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensor connection method

3.1 Connection terminal
After screwing the platinum resistance temperature detector into the temperature sensor connector,
insert it into the connector of the front panel. The terminal names of the input connectors are indicatedon the right side of the panel as A, B, and b.
+ /A terminal

Connect the A side wire of the platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD).

- /B terminal

Connect the B side wire of the platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD).

S /b terminal

Connect the b side wire of the platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD).

NOTE

Make sure to use a three-wire type platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) sensor.
Use three equal length cables for RTD extension in order to match the resistance values.

Ensure the wire resistance is 10 Ω or less (per wire)
1WMPD4004444D

193

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)
Connect a single RTD to a single channel.
Wire the RTD cable away from the power line and sources of noise.
3.2 Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) three wire sensor connection method
Platinum resistance temperature detector

ABb
Make sure to connect
Temperature sensor connector
4

Sensor cable connection

Step 1.

Peel the coating of the sensor cable, and connect the cable to the socket.
0.2 sq to 1.5 sq (AWG 24 to AWG 16) wire is supported.
Insert the sensor cable from the right direction and tighten the top screw.
Gently pull the cable and confirm that it does not become disconnected.
Cable fixing screw

Sensor cable

Peeling margin: 6 mm
Temperature sensor connector (included)

NOTE

Cable fixing screw tightening torque: 0.2 Nm to 0.25 Nm

Flat-blade screwdriver blade size: 0.4 m (thickness) x 2.5 mm (width)
Step 2.

Insert the top cable cover and bottom cable cover in the socket.
Secure the cable from the bottom cable cover with a cable tie.
Top cable cover (included)

Temperature sensor connector
Bottom cable cover (included)

Secure with cable tie (included)

Step 3.

Connect the socket to the connector of the input panel.

Step 4.

Secure the socket to the connector of the input panel using the socket fixing screw.

Input connectors
Connector fixing screw

NOTE

Socket fixing screw tightening torque: 0.2 Nm to 0.25 Nm

The cable cover protects the terminal and cable fixing screw areas from static electricity, etc.
194

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)
5

Reference junction compensation (RJC) when measuring thermocouple (TC)
Reference junction compensation is required when measuring the thermocouple (TC), and can beswitched between internal and external compensation with this module.
Internal reference junction compensation measures the reference junction temperature at the module
front panel.
When external compensation is set, it is necessary to externally perform 0°C reference junction
compensation.

NOTE

Perform measurement so that the temperature around the input connectors is stable.

If there is a rapid change in the surrounding temperature, wait until the module temperature stabilizes(about one hour) and then start measurement.
Ensure that the input connectors are not directly exposed to wind.
Do not block the air holes of the front panel.
When performing external reference junction compensation
Compatible extension wire

Thermocouple

Temperature measurement point

+
0°C
6

External 0°C reference junction

LFD function
This module has an LFD function that can be enabled or disabled when performing TC measurement.
When enabled, 0.5 μA current is supplied and + side over range output occurs when the sensor is open

(at 300 kΩ or higher). (Over range detects the possibility of a disconnection.)

NOTE

When LFD is enabled, a temperature rise error will occur from the power consumption in thethermocouple (TC) resistance because a current of 0.5 μA is constantly supplied.
It can be disabled when performing standard measurement to reduce the above error.
When the setting is enabled, detection is possible when the open resistance is 300 kΩ or higher.

7

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module
1ch +/A

Slots

-/B
S/b

Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)

2ch +/A-/B
S/b

Between each channel
and the chassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)

GND (three pin power cable connection)

1WMPD4004444D

195

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)

9.6.5.

Spare Parts

Two sets of temperature sensor connectors are included as standard, and they can be connected to analternate sensor in advance to allow easy changing.
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Top cable cover
Bottom cable coverTwo sets of cable ties

Temperature sensor
connector

Can be connected/disconnected

RA30-555

to/from the input connectors of theconnector module for temperature
sensor connection

196

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.7. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)

9.7.

2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)

9.7.1.

Overview

This two channel high voltage input module samples a DC to 100 kHz signal at 16-bit 1 MS/s within themeasurement range of ±2 V to ±1000 V and can perform A/D conversion. It has functions for voltage
measurement, effective value measurement, and analog filtering. It is insulated between each channel
and between each channel chassis.

9.7.2.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1)(1) Slot number, input module type(2)(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(7) Meas. mode: Switch the measurement mode of the input (10)channel from DC to RMS (Fast) to RMS(11)

Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling.

(Mid) to RMS (Slow).

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(8) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.
(9) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(10) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(11) Disp. range: Specify the display width in the amplitude
direction of each graph.
(12) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of thebottom of the display range.

(13) Disp. max:(18)

Set the display upper limit value of the topof the display range.

(14) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(15) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(16) Wave disp.:

When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.

(17) Zero adjust: Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.
(18) Measurable range/Measured value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

1WMPD4004444D

197

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.7. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)

9.7.3.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enable
the

Meas.

key to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for therequired signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Set the input coupling with the
Coupling

Coupling

key (6).

Description
Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC

DC

component.
Measures the AC component of the input signal only. Set this when you want tomeasure only the amplitude of an AC signal, as it cancels the DC offset of theACsignal.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside thechannel.

GND

Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printerrecording.

Tips
When switching from DC coupling to AC coupling, it takes a maximum of two seconds for the
DC component to completely disappear.
Step 2.

Set the measurement mode with theMeas. mode

Measurement

Description

mode
DC

Step 3.

key (7).

Enables measurement of the input signal voltage.

RMS(Fast)

Enables measurement of the input signal effective value.

RMS(Mid)

You can select three different response speeds (high speed, medium speed, andRMS(Slow)

low speed).

Set the measurement range according to the target for measurement.
Set a range at or above the expected maximum value for the input signal.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (8) in the channel setup submenu.
The following nine measurement mode ranges are available.
DC mode1000 V

500 V

200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V

10 V

5V

2V

20 Vrms

10 Vrms

5 Vrms2 VrmsRMS mode1000 Vrms 500 Vrms 200 Vrms 100 Vrms 50 Vrms

198

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.7. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)

Tips
The measurement range with the 1000 Vrms range is a maximum of 700 Vrms.
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning
beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 4.

Set the input filter.
Set the low-pass filter with the L.P.F. key (8).
The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF

Step 5.

30 kHzDisp. pos.:

30 Hz

3 Hz

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor
Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position(Waveform Display Scale)".
Disp. max:
Disp. min:

Step 7.

300 HzSet the display range and display position.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position (Display
Area)".
Disp. range:

Step 6.

3 kHz

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.
Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

Execute zero adjust.
After turning on the power, changes in the surrounding temperature as time elapses change theinternal temperature of the RA3100 main unit, and cause temperature drift inside the input module,
which leads to errors in measurements due to variation in the DC offset voltage. Execute zeroadjust to minimize these errors.
To perform zero cancellation, tap the Zero adjust key (17) after waiting for a warm-up period of
60 minutes.

Tips
This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the
input signal.
1WMPD4004444D

199

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.7. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)

9.7.4.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 1000 V (DC + AC peak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 and CH2 are safety banana terminals.
For safety purposes, use the following high voltage alligator clips/cables for signal input.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Alligator clips

High voltage alligator

Red × 1; Black × 1

clip: RA30-509-01

Standard: CAT III 1000 V
Safety banana plugs

High voltage

Red × 1; Black × 1

connection cable:

Length: 2 m

RA30-509-02

Standard: CAT III 1000 V
Safety banana
plugs/sockets

High voltage extension

Red × 1; Black × 1

cable: RA30-509-03

Length: 2 m
Standard: CAT III 1000 V

2

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main

Input module
1ch H
L
2ch H
L

Slots
±1000 V

Between channels
1000 V (DC + AC peak)±1000 V

GND
(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

200

Between each channel and thechassis, to ground1000 V (DC + AC peak)

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)9.8.

2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)9.8.1.

Overview

This module is a two channel frequency module that can measure the frequency of the input signal
within the range ±1 V to ± 500 V. It has nine measurement modes (Period, Frequency, Rotation speed,
Power freq., Freq. deviation, Pulse width, Duty cycle, Pulse count, and Pulse integ.) and a function for
constantly monitoring the input signal. It is insulated between each channel and between each channel
chassis.

9.8.2.

Relationship between Channels and Settings<Front panel>
Front panel CH1

Front panel CH2<CH1 to CH4 of RA3100 main unit>(1) Set the measurement mode for CH1 with front panel CH1.
(2) Set the measurement mode for CH2 with front panel CH2.

(3)(3) Set the input voltage for CH3 with front panel CH1.

(1)(4) Set the input voltage for CH4 with front panel CH2.

(2)

The front panel has two channels of BNC connectors, but the
RA3100 main unit has a four channel display.
For details on the measurement modes and input voltage, see"9.8.3. Setting the Input Voltage and Measurement Mode".

Tips
The CH3 (3) setting is valid for CH1.
The CH4 (4) setting is valid for CH2.

Channel Setting Procedure
Step 1.

Setting the input voltage
Set the input voltage for CH1 and CH2 with CH3 (3)and CH4 (4). (Coupling, measurement range, threshold,etc.)

Step 2.

Setting the measurement mode
Set the measurement mode for CH1 and CH2 with CH1(1) and CH2 (2). (Measurement mode, measurement
range, etc.)

1WMPD4004444D

201

(4)

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)9.8.3.

Setting the Input Voltage and Measurement Mode

<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. ＞
(1)
(2)

(2)

(3)
(3)

(3)
(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(11)

(12)

(8)

(9)

(13)

(14)

(10)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)
(23)
<Input voltage setting panel><Measurement mode setting panel>(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:
Select the channel in the slot.
CH1: CH1 measurement mode

CH2: CH2 measurement mode

CH3: CH1 input voltage

CH4: CH2 input voltage(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:

Measure the input signal.

(5) Color:

Change the display color of the waveform monitor.

(6) Coupling:

Switch the input signal coupling.

(7) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.
(8) Threshold:Set the threshold voltage for detecting the pulse.

(9) Hysteresis:

Sets the hysteresis width of the threshold. Set a value that prevents incorrect
measurement due to noise.

(10) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(11) Meas. mode: Select Period, Frequency, Rotation speed, Pulse width, Duty cycle, Power freq., Freq.
deviation, Pulse count, or Pulse integ. as the measurement mode.
202

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)(12) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.
(13) Smoothing:Set the count for smoothing the measurement data.

(14) Pulse avg.:

Set the average count of the input pulse.

(15) Res. speed: Set the response time for preventing chattering.
(16) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(17) Disp. range: Specify the display width in the amplitude direction of each graph.
(18) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

(19) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

(20) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(21) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(22) Wave disp.:

When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.

(23) Measurable range/Measured value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

9.8.4.

Measurement Setup

Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enable
the Meas. key to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required
signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to configure the input voltage setting panel then the measurement modesetting panel.

9.8.4.1 Setting the Input Voltage
Follow the procedure below to configure the input voltage setting panel.
Step 1.

Set the input coupling with the
Coupling
DC
AC

Coupling

key (6).

Description
Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.
Measures the AC component of the input signal only. Set this when you want tomeasure only the amplitude of an AC signal, as it cancels the DC offset of the signal.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside the

GNDchannel.
Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printerrecording.

Tips
When switching from DC coupling to AC coupling, it takes a maximum of five seconds for the
DC component to completely disappear.
Step 2.

Set the measurement range of the input voltage according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (7).

The following nine input voltage measurement ranges are available.
500 V
1WMPD4004444D

200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V
203

10 V

5V

2V

1V

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

Tips

When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning
beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 3.

Set the threshold.
Set the threshold with theThresholdkey (8).

Tap the key to display the threshold line (red) on the waveform monitor. This enables you to change
the threshold while checking the input waveform.
Step 4.

Set the hysteresis.
Set the hysteresis width of the threshold with the

Hysteresis

key (9).

Tips
By aligning the threshold in the center of the input waveform while checking the input
waveform on the waveform monitor, you can perform more accurate measurement. Set ahysteresis value with sufficient distance from the peak voltage of the input waveform.
Input signal

Threshold 0 V

Hysteresis 10% (threshold ±5%)

Measurement pulse
Example with a threshold of 0 V and hysteresis of 10% set
Step 5.

Set the input filter.
Set the low-pass filter with the

L.P.F.

key (10).

The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF

30 kHz

3 kHz

300 Hz204

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)
Step 6.

Set the display range and display position.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position (Display
Area)".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 7.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position(Waveform Display Scale)".
Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

9.8.4.2. Setting the Measurement Mode
Follow the procedure below to configure the measurement mode setting panel.
Step 1.

Set the measurement mode with theMeas. mode

Measurement mode

Description (unit)

PeriodMeasure the period of the measurement pulse.

sFrequency

Measure the frequency of the measurement pulse.

Hz

Rotation speed

Step 2.

key (11).

Measure the rotation speed of the measurement pulse.

(seconds)(hertz)rpm(revolutions per minute)Pulse width

Measure the pulse width of the measurement pulse.

s(seconds)

Duty cycle

Measure the duty cycle of the measurement pulse.

%(percent)

Power freq.

Measure the power frequency variation.

Hz(hertz)Freq. deviation

Measure the deviation from the center frequency.

%(percent)

Pulse countCount the number of measurement pulses within the gate time. Count

Pulse integ.

Integrates the number of measurement pulses.

Count

Set the measurement range according to the target for measurement.
The measurement range can be changed with the Meas. range key (12).

Measurement mode

Description

PeriodFrequency
Rotation speed

1 ms

2 ms

5 ms

10 ms

20 ms

50 ms

100 ms200 ms

500 ms

1s

2s

5s

10 s

20 s

50 s

100 s

200 kHz100 kHz

50 kHz

20 kHz

10 kHz

5 kHz

2 kHz

1 kHz

500 Hz200 Hz100 Hz

50 Hz

20 Hz

10 Hz

5 Hz

2 Hz

50 krpm

20 krpm

10 krpm

5 krpm1000 krpm 500 krpm 200 krpm 100 krpm

Pulse width
Duty cycle

2 krpm

1 krpm

500 rpm

200 rpm

100 rpm

50 rpm20 rpm10 rpm

1 ms

2 ms

5 ms

10 ms

20 ms

50 ms

100 ms200 ms

500 ms

1s

2s

5s

10 s

20 s

50 s

100 s

100 % (20 Hz)

Power freq.

400 HzFreq. deviation±50 %Pulse count

4000

Pulse integ.
1WMPD4004444D

60 Hz

100 % (200 Hz)

100 % (2 kHz)

100 % (20 kHz)

50 Hz
-

50 k

100 k

200 k

500 k

1M

2M

5M

10 M

20 M

50 M

100 M

200 M

500 M

1000 M

2000 M

-205

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

Tips
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence the warning
beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer sound setting in"8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

An overrange does not occur in the Duty cycle mode or Pulse count mode.

Step 3.

Configure the individual settings according to each measurement mode.
The measurement modes include the Period mode, Pulse width mode, Duty cycle mode, Freq.
deviation mode, Pulse count mode, and Pulse integ. mode.

For the Rotation speed mode

Tap thePulses / Rev.

key, and set the pulse count per revolution.

Tips
For the gear on the right, the pulse count for
revolution is 11 because the gear has 11 teeth.

206

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

For the Pulse width mode and Duty cycle mode

Tap thePulse polarity

key, and set the pulse polarity.

<When the Pulse width mode is set>
Positive:

Measure the pulse width (Tp) from the rise to fall of themeasurement pulse.
Tp

Negative:

Measure the pulse width (Tp) from the fall to rise of themeasurement pulse.
Tp<When the Duty cycle mode is set>
Positive:

Measure the pulse ratio (Ta/Tb) from the rise to fall of themeasurement pulse.
Ta
Tb

Negative:

Measure the pulse ratio (Ta/Tb) from the fall to rise of the measurement pulse.
Ta
Tb

For the Frequency deviation mode
Tap the Center freq. key, and set the center frequency.

1WMPD4004444D

207

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

For the Pulse count mode or Pulse integ. mode

Tap thePositive:

Pulse polarity

key, and set the pulse polarity.

Detect from the rise to the fall of the measurement pulse,and increments the count value when the measurement
pulse is confirmed.
Measurement pulse
Increment count value

Negative:

01

Detect from the fall to the rise of the measurement pulse,and increments the count value when the measurement
pulse is confirmed.
Measurement pulse
Increment count value01

For the Pulse count mode

Tap theGate time

key, and set the gate time.

The number of measurement pulses within the gate time is counted.

208

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

For the Pulse integ. mode

Tap theAuto reset

key, and set the count value reset operation.

OFF:

Stop the count value at the range upper limit.

Start:

Reset the count value when recording starts andstop the count value at the range upper limit.

Over:

Reset the count value and restart measurementfrom zero when the count value reaches the range
upper limit.

Start & Over:

Reset the count value when recording starts. Resetthe count value and restart measurement from zero
when the count value reaches the range upper limit.

Tap the

1WMPD4004444D

Reset

key to reset the count value.

209

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)
Step 4.

Set the pulse average.
The pulse average can be set in the Period mode, Frequency mode, Rotation speed mode, Pulse
width mode, Duty cycle mode, Power freq. mode, and Freq. deviation mode. It is effective for
eliminating variation in the input signal.

Tips
Note that when Pulse avg. is set, data is not output until the set pulse count is measured.
Pulse Average Setting Procedure
Follow the procedure below to set the pulse average.
Tap thePulse avg.

key.

The [Pulse avg.] screen is displayed.
Set the average pulse count on the numeric entry screen.
Tap

OFF

Tap

OK .

to select

ON .

Set the average pulse count210

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)
Step 5.

Set smoothing.
Smoothing can be set in the Period mode, Frequency mode, Rotation speed mode, Pulse widthmode, Duty cycle mode, Power freq. mode, and Freq. deviation mode.
It converts a stepped waveform into a smooth waveform.
<Smoothing process>Measurement data
Averaging is performed on the measurement data at the

Averaging
Smoothinginterval defined in the measurement range (40 μs to 4 s).
The moving average is performed the number of times set

Moving averagein the smoothing count (2 to 100).

functions
Measurement data
after smoothing
A delay occurs when smoothing is set.
Delay time
Measurement data

Measurement data after smoothing

Measurement data waveform after smoothing
Smoothing Setting Procedure
Follow the procedure below to set smoothing.
Tap theSmoothingkey.

The [Smoothing] screen is displayed.
Set the smoothing count on the numeric entry screen.
Tap

OFF

Tap

OK .

to select

ON .

Set the smoothing count

1WMPD4004444D

211

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)

Tips
The delay time is equal to the averaging time multiplied by the smoothing count.
<Averaging time in each mode when smoothing is set>

Rotation
speed

Period Frequency
1 ms
2 ms

Measurement range
Freq. deviationPower(center frequency
freq.
range)----

200 kHz100 kHz
50 kHz
-

-

-

-

-

20 kHz
10 kHz
5 kHz-

100 krpm
50 krpm
20 krpm

400 Hz

-

2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz---200 Hz100 Hz
50 Hz

-

-

20 Hz
10 Hz
5 Hz

1 krpm
500 rpm
200 rpm

-

-

5 ms
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms200 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
10 s
20 s
50 s
100 s

Step 6.

---1000 krpm
500 krpm
200 krpm

-

-

-

-

10 krpm
5 krpm
2 krpm60/50 Hz--100 rpm
50 rpm20 rpm10 rpm2 Hz-

13000 to 6600 Hz
6600 to 3300 Hz
3300 to 1320 Hz-

1320 to 660 Hz
660 to 330 Hz
330 to 132 Hz--

132 to 66 Hz
66 to 33 Hz
33 to 13.2 Hz-

13.2 to 6.6 Hz

-

-

-

Pulse
width
1 ms
2 ms

100 % (20 kHz)

-

-

-

4s

-

100 % (2 kHz)

-

-

-

50 ms
100 ms200 ms

100 % (200 Hz)

-

-

-

500 ms1s2s

100 % (20 Hz)

-

-

-

-

-

-

50 s

-

100 s

-

-

40 μs
80 μs
160 μs200 μs400 μs800 μs
1.6 ms
2 ms
4 ms
8 ms
16 ms
20 ms
40 ms
80 ms
160 ms200 ms
400 ms
800 ms
1.6 s
2s

5 ms
10 ms
20 ms

5s
10 s
20 s

-

Averaging time

Duty cycle--

Set the response speed.
From theRes. speed

key, turn the knob to set the response speed.

This prevents incorrect measurement due to chattering.
Step 7.

Set the display range and display position.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position (Display
Area)".
Disp. range:
Disp. pos.:

Step 8.

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor
Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position(Waveform Display Scale)".
Disp. max:
Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.
Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

212

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)9.8.5.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V (DC + AC peak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 and CH2 are insulated BNC connectors. Do not connect metallic BNC
plugs, as they may damage the connectors or cause connection problems.
Use the insulated BNC cable indicated below (RA30-507) as the signal input cables.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Insulated BNC
600V

CAT III 300V
CAT II 600V

RA30-507

MAXIMUM RATEDVOLTAGE TO

LINE VOLTAGE(safety alligator clip)

MAXIMUM RATED

Insulated BNC cable!

Safety alligator clip
Red +RA30-507

Black -

Length 1.5 m
2Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module
1ch H
L
2ch H
L

Slots
±500 V
Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V

GND(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

1WMPD4004444D

213

Between each channel and thechassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)

9.9.

2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)9.9.1.

Overview

This two channel acceleration module samples an acceleration signal at 16-bit 1 MS/s and performs A/D
conversion. In addition to an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp, it can use a charge converterto support a charge output type acceleration sensor.
Its integration function enables an acceleration signal to be converted to output velocity anddisplacement, and it also includes functions for analog filtering, antialiasing, effective value calculation,and envelope calculation.
It is insulated between each channel and between each channel chassis.

9.9.2.

Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1)(1) Slot number, input module type(2)(2) Change slot: Change the slot.
(3) Select channel:

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

Set the conditions for the sensor to connect. (12)(13)

Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Meas. mode: Switch the measurement mode of the input
channel from OFF to Acceleration to
Velocity to Displacement.
(7) Sensor:(8) Meas. range: Change the measurement range of the input
channel.
(9) Calc. mode:(2)

Switch the calculation mode of the input
channel from OFF to Envelope to RMS(Fast) to RMS (Mid) to RMS (Slow).

(10) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(11) A.A.F.:

Turns the anti-aliasing filter of the input

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)
(19)

channel on or off.
(12) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(13) Disp. range:

Specifies the display width in the amplitude direction of each graph.

(14) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

(15) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

(16) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(17) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(18) Wave disp.:

When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.
214

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)(19) Measurable range/Measured value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

9.9.3.

Measurement Setup

CAUTION

Do not connect anything other than an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp or a charge output
type acceleration sensor via a charge converter.
(Do not input voltage or current. Doing so may lead to failure.)
When using an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp, make sure that it meets the power
specifications for sensors.
Using a sensor that does not meet the specifications may damage the sensor.
Step 1.

Turn the power of the main unit OFF or disable the measurement mode using the Meas. modekey (6), then connect the charge output type acceleration sensor via a charge converter.

NOTE
If the measurement mode is not disabled, power for the sensor will be output from the BNC
connector. Make sure to disable the measurement mode when connecting the sensor, in orderto prevent electrocution or damage to the sensor.
Step 2.

Connect the sensor, set [Meas. mode] to Acceleration, and enable [Meas.] to display the input
waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required signal waveform while
viewing the waveform.

Tips
When the power of the sensor is turned on, noise will be emitted for several seconds until thebias voltage of the sensor stabilizes. An overrange may occur due to the noise, but this isnormal.

1WMPD4004444D

215

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
Step 3.

Set the type and sensitivity of the sensor to connect.
Tap the Sensor key to open the sensor settings sub menu.

(20)

(20)

(21)

(22)

(24)

(25)

(23)

(23)

<When [Preamp] is selected as the sensor><When [Charge Conv.] is selected as the sensor><When using an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp>
Use theSensorkey (20) in the sensor settings sub menu to set the sensor to [Preamp].

Set the sensor sensitivity according to the sensor to use.
For a sensor compatible with TEDS, tap the

TEDS Readkey (22) to automatically set thesensitivity.
For a sensor not compatible with TEDS, use theSensitivity

key (21) to set the sensitivity

indicated on the sensor in mV/(m/s2). If the sensor sensitivity is indicated in mV/G as agravitational acceleration, divide the number by 9.8.
When the settings are complete, use theClose

key (23) to close the sensor settings sub

menu.

216

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)<When using a charge output type acceleration sensor>
When using a charge output type acceleration sensor, a charge converter is required.
Follow the procedure below to configure the settings according to the sensor and charge converter
to use.
Use theSensorkey (20) in the sensor settings sub menu to set the sensor to [Charge

Conv.].
Set the gain according to the sensor and charge converter to use.
The gain can be changed with theGain

key (24).

The following three gain ranges are available.
Set the range closest to the gain indicated on the charge converter.
0.1 mV/pC

1 mV/pC

10 mV/pC

Set the sensor sensitivity according to the charge output type acceleration sensor to use.
Use theSensitivity

key (25) to set the sensitivity indicated on the sensor in pC/(m/s2).

If the sensor sensitivity is indicated in pC/G as a gravitational acceleration, divide the number
by 9.8.

Tips
If the gain of the charge converter to use deviates from the selected range, it is necessary tomultiply the sensor sensitivity by that deviation.
Sensor sensitivity to set =Gain of charge converter [mV/pC]
Range of gain [mV/pC]

x sensor sensitivity [pC/(m/s2)]

ExampleIf the gain of the charge converter to use is 0.990 mV/pC and the sensor
sensitivity of the charge output type acceleration sensor is 100 pC/(m/s2), set
the following values.
Use the Gain key (24) to set the range to 1 mV/pC, which is the closest to the charge
converter gain of 0.990 mV/pC.

Calculate the sensor sensitivity to set.
0.990 [mV/pC]
1.0 [mV/pC]
Use theSensitivity

Charge output type
acceleration sensor
100 pC/(m/s2)

x 100 [pC/(m/s2)] = 99 [mV/(m/s2)]
key (25) to set the sensitivity to 99 pC/(m/s2).
Charge converter
0.990 mV/pC

2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
Gain:

1 mV/pC range

Sensitivity: 99 pC/(m/s2)

Equivalent to acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp
with sensor sensitivity of 99 mV/(m/s2)
When the settings are complete, use themenu.

1WMPD4004444D

217

Close

key (23) to close the sensor settings sub

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
Step 4.

Set the measurement range according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (8).

The measurement range to set differs according to the value set for the sensor sensitivity.

Tips
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence thewarning beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer soundsetting in "8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

Step 5.

Set the measurement mode with the [Meas. mode] key (6).
Measurement mode
Acceleration
Velocity
Displacement

Description (unit)
Measure the acceleration signal.

(m/s2)

Measure the acceleration signal by converting it to velocity.

(m/s)

Measure the acceleration signal by converting it to displacement.

(m)

Tips
If an overrange occurs in the acceleration signal, the velocity and displacement cannot bemeasured correctly.
Make sure to set the velocity and displacement after setting the measurement mode toacceleration and confirming that an overrange has not occurred.
Step 6.

Set the input filter.
Set the low-pass filter with the

L.P.F.

key (10).

The low-pass filter of this module is a flat attenuation filter with no ripples in the passband. Set acutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove the unnecessary highfrequency component and noise component.
OFF

20 kHz2 kHz

200 HzSet the antialiasing filter setting with the

20 Hz
A.A.F.

key (11).

A steeply sloping attenuation low-pass filter. Enable this filter to automatically set the cutoff
frequency linked with the sampling speed so that aliasing does not occur in the measurement data
due to the sampling. This is particularly effective for FFT analysis. The L.P.F. setting is disabledbecause L.P.F. is used internally.

218

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
Step 7.

Use theCalc. modekey (9) to set the calculation mode (RMS calculation or envelope

calculation).
Calculation mode

Description
Enables measurement of the input signal envelope value.
The waveform that passes through the BPF is rectified and smoothed, thenEnvelope

the envelope waveform is output.
FFT analysis of the output signal is effective for detecting weak signals thatappear repeatedly.
Use it to detect the repeat period when bearing failure has occurred.

RMS(Fast)
RMS(Mid)
RMS(Slow)

Enables measurement of the input signal effective value.
You can select three different response speeds (high speed, medium speed,
and low speed).
Use it to monitor wideband vibration and trends in vibration variation.
The input signal is measured as it is.

OFF

Tips
If an overrange occurs in the input signal and causes waveform distortion, the velocity anddisplacement cannot be measured correctly. Set a range that prevents overrange fromoccurring.
When the calculation mode is used, overrange occurs at approximately 70% of the set range.
Step 8.

Set the display range and display position.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position (Display
Area)".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 9.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See the description in "4.2.2 Set the input channels - Display Range and Display Position(Waveform Display Scale)".
Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

9.9.4.

Cables

9.9.4.1.

Installing the Included Ferrite Core

Open the ferrite core and clasp it around the BNC cable near the BNC connector on the module side.
Close the ferrite core and secure both ends using commercially-available cable ties.

BNC cable
1WMPD4004444D

Cable tie

Ferrite core219

Cable tie

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)

9.9.5.

Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 42 V (DC + AC peak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Connecting the Acceleration Sensor
When using an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp, connect the sensor directly.
When using a charge output type acceleration sensor, connect the sensor via a charge converter.

Tips
The module supplies a constant current to an acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp.
The sensor outputs the acceleration signal to the same signal wire as an AC voltage signal.
The module measures the acceleration signal obtained by cutting the DC component from the input
signal.
Acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp

Acceleration module

Current I

4 mA

22 V

Voltage V
Acceleration signal
Vbias
An acceleration sensor incorporating a preamp is a sensor where the charge output type
acceleration sensor and preamp (charge converter) are integrated.
Because it outputs a voltage signal with low impedance, it is less susceptible to noise than acharge output type acceleration sensor, and a charge converter is not required. However, it usually
has limitations regarding the size and usage temperature, when compared to a charge output type
acceleration sensor.
Charge output type acceleration sensor generates a charge according to the acceleration.
The generated charge is converted to an AC voltage signal via a charge converter.
The module supplies a constant current to the charge converter.
The charge converter outputs the acceleration signal to the same signal wire as an AC voltage
signal.
The module measures the acceleration signal obtained by cutting the DC component from the input
signal.
Charge output type sensor

Charge converter

Acceleration module

Charge Q

Voltage V[pC/(m/s2)][mV/(m/s2)]

4 mA

22 V
Acceleration
signal[mV/pC]A charge output type acceleration sensor is lightweight and compact, and is suitable formeasurement at low or high temperatures.
However, it has high impedance and is susceptible to noise, so caution is required.
220

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
2

Measuring the Velocity and Displacement
When the acceleration mode is set, set a measurement range that will prevent overrange fromoccurring. If an overrange occurs in the acceleration signal and causes waveform distortion, a large
error will also occur in the the velocity and displacement.
When the frequency of the acceleration signal is approximately 16 Hz, the measured amplitude does
not change, even if the measurement mode is switched to Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement.
However, with other frequency domains, the amplitude of the velocity is measured at a ratio -6 dB/oct
smaller than the amplitude of the acceleration and the amplitude of the displacement is measured at aratio -12 dB/oct smaller than the amplitude of the acceleration.
Frequency 70 kHz

Amplitude
0 dB

Acceleration
Approx. 16 Hz

Velocity -6dB/oct
Displacement -12 dB/oct

Tips
The relationship between the acceleration (A), velocity (V), and displacement (D) is indicatedbelow. (f: Input signal frequency)
A (m/s2)

Acceleration
Velocity

V = A/2πf (m/s)

Displacement

D = V/2πf (m)This module passes through an analog integrator to convert the acceleration signal to velocity anddisplacement.
As indicated in the formula above, to the amplitude of the acceleration, the amplitude of the velocity isinversely proportional to the frequency of the acceleration signal, and the amplitude of the displacement
is inversely proportional to square the frequency of the acceleration signal.
When the amplitude of the acceleration is constant, the attenuation is -6 dB/oct for the velocity and -12
dB/oct for the displacement when at approximately 16 Hz.
3Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main

Input module
1ch H

Slots

L

Between channels
42 V (DC + AC peak)

2ch H
L
GND
(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

1WMPD4004444D

221

Between each channel and thechassis, to ground
42 V (DC + AC peak)9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.

Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.1. Overview
The following three major types of functions are included in the RA30-112 remote module.
Remote function for remotely controlling this product from an external device
Carrier function for AC strain module
Waveform confirmation output for confirming the voltage input module
The remote function includes both remote input for control from an external device and remote output
for performing synchronized operation with another RA3100 and this product acting as the master.
Omniace RA3100
Carrier

Hostcontroller

RA3100AC strain

RA30-112

moduleRemote input

RA30-112
Remote output

Waveform confirmation output

9.10.2. Installation
This module is installed to the input module block of this product as
described in "2.1.2. Installing Optional Modules". This module differsfrom other modules in that it can only be installed to "SLOT 9".
(Another module can be installed to "SLOT 9" if the RA30-112 is notinstalled.)

SLOT 1
SLOT 2
SLOT 3The RA30-112 can only be installed to SLOT 9.

SLOT 4SLOT 5SLOT 6SLOT 7
SLOT 8SLOT 9222

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.3. Channel setting
Tap theCH

key on the side menu to display the channel settings menu. "SLOT 9"

where the remote module (RA30-112) is installed in slot selection is displayed.
For information on functions, see "9.10.5 Measurement Setup".
(1)

(2)
(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)
(7)

(8)

(1) Slot number:

The slot number of SLOT 9.

(2) Response:

Select [High speed], [Medium speed], or [Low speed] for the response speed of theremote input signal.

(3) TRIG/EXT.1:

Select [TRIG] or [EXT.1].
Set TRIG in [TRIG] (5) and EXT.1 in [EXT.1] (7).

(4) OSC/EXT.2:

Select [OSC] or [EXT.2].
Set OSC in [OSC] (6) and EXT.2 in [EXT.2] (8).

(5) TRIG:

Sets the TRIG signal for remote input.

(6) OSC:

Select "Internal" or "External" as the carrier signal source for the AC strain module.

(7) EXT.1:

Enables/disables the state of this product set to output externally for system errors,
printer errors, and overranges. Tap to display the EXT.1/EXT.2 setting dialog.

(8) EXT.2:

1WMPD4004444D

The same as EXT.1.

223

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.4. Output terminal for waveform confirmation
A square wave is output from the output terminal of this module at 0 to 5 V and 1 kHz.
This square wave signal can be connected to the voltage input module and waveform monitored tocheck module operation.

Output terminal for waveform confirmation

9.10.5. Measurement Setup
1

Response
Select [High speed], [Medium speed], or [Low speed] for the response speed of the remote input signal.
In noisy environments, select [Low speed] to perform control with a filter.
The effective pulse width of the input signal is as follows.
For high speed response:

2

High level period

1 μs or more,

Low level period

1 μs or more

For medium speed response:High level period

1 ms or more,

Low level period

1 ms or more

For low speed response:High level period

10 ms or more,

Low level period

10 ms or more

OSC
Select the carrier signal source used for the RA3100 main unit when the AC strain module is installed.
Internal:

Use the OSC signal generated in the RA3100 main unit where this module is installed.
It can also be supplied to another RA3100 connected with synchronization.

External:

Supplies the OSC IN signal input from remote input to the implementation module.

See the connection diagram in "5 Connection Method."3

TRIG
Sets the TRIG signal for remote input.

4

OFF:

Do not use the TRIG signal for remote input.

Start trigger:

Input the TRIG signal for remote input as the start trigger.

Memory trigger:

Input the TRIG signal for remote input as the memory trigger.

EXT.1/EXT.2
These settings output the state of this product externally. When System error, Printer error, orOverrange is enabled, this is output if either one occurs.
System error:

The state where the software of this product cannot operate normally.

Printer error:

When a printer communication error, motor error, or head temperature error has
occurred, the printer cover is open, or recording paper has run out.

Overrange:

When an overrange has occurred.

224

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.6. Reference Materials
1

2

Front panel
A10

A1

A7

A1

B10

B1

B7

B1

Pin layout of IN connector
Pin
Sig name
numberPin
Sig name
numberFunction

A1

NC

B1

GND

-

A2

NC

B2

GND

-

START/A3A4

A5STOP IN( +)MARK IN( +)FEED IN
( +)

B3

B4

B5

START/

Recording start/stop input

STOP IN( -)Performs printer recording for the period where the signal is

MARK IN( -)FEED IN( -)at the low level.
Mark input
Records a mark on the recording data at the falling edge ofthis signal.
Feed (idle feeding of recording paper) input
Performs idle feeding of printer recording paper for theperiod where this signal is at the low level.
Print input

PRINT IN
( +)

B6

A7

NC

A8

SMPL IN( +)A6

PRINT IN
( -)Performs pen recording for the period where the signal is at

B7

GND

-

B8

SMPL IN
( -)

EXT

EXT

A9

TRIG IN( +)B9

TRIG IN( -)A10

OSC IN( +)B10

OSC IN( -)the low level while stopped. This signal is not received
during recording.

External sampling input
Performs sampling at the falling edge of this signal.
Trigger input
Receives external triggers at the falling edge of this signal.
OSC signal input for AC strain module
Supplies this signal to the AC strain module as the carrier
signal source.

Connector for input signal: DF02R020NA3 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)
The A series and B series are complementary. GND (B series) is the input common for A series signals.
The plugs (manufacturer model numbers) corresponding to each input signal connector are indicatedbelow.
Compatible plug: DF02P020F22A1 (soldered type), DF02P020G28A1 (pressure connected type)

NOTE
Do not control START/STOP IN, PRINT IN, and FEED IN at the same time.
1WMPD4004444D

225

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
3

Pin layout of out connectorPinnumber

Sig namePinnumberSTART/
A1

STOP OUT( +)START/
B1

Function

Sig name

Recording start/stop output

STOP OUT The low level signal is output while this product isrecording.
( -)

A2

MARK OUT( +)B2

MARK OUT Mark output
Outputs the MARK IN signal to the MARK OUT signal.
( -)

A3

FEED OUT( +)B3

FEED OUT( -)Feed (idle feeding of recording paper) output

A4

PRINT OUT
( +)B4

PRINT OUT
( -)Print output

A5

EXT SMPL
OUT

B5EXT SMPL
OUT

Outputs the FEED IN signal to the FEED OUT signal.
Outputs the PRINT IN signal to the PRINT OUT signal.
External sampling output
Outputs the EXT SMPL IN signal to the EXT SMPLOUT signal.
Trigger output (TRIG OUT)
Outputs the TRIG OUT signal to the low level when aA6

TRIG/EXT.1
OUT (+)

B6

TRIG/EXT.1
OUT (-)

trigger occurs.
External output (EXT.1 OUT)
Set to the low level when an error such as a systemerror occurs.
See "9.10.3 Channel setting".
OSC signal for AC strain module output (OSC OUT)
This output is used for synchronizing with the AC strain

A7

OSC/EXT.2
OUT (+)B7

OSC/EXT.2
OUT (-)

module installed in another RA3100.
External output (EXT.2 OUT)
Set to the low level when an error such as a systemerror occurs.
See "9.10.3 Channel setting".

Connector for output signal: DF02R014NA3 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)
The A series and B series are complementary. GND (B series) is the common for A series signals.
The plugs (manufacturer model numbers) corresponding to each output signal connector are indicatedbelow.
Compatible plug: DF02P014F22A1 (soldered type), DF02P014G28A1 (pressure connected type)226

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
4

Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module SLOT 9
IN

H
L

+5 V

OUT H
L

+5 V

Each L is shared

GND (connect to power cable with ground terminal)

Between each channel andthe chassis, to ground
42 V (DC + AC peak)

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input/output and the chassis (GND) does not exceed 42 V
(DC+ACpeak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
There is no insulation between the inputs/outputs.
L (GND) is connected internally.

1WMPD4004444D

227

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
5

Connection method

5.1 For remote control
Remote control

Host

Omniace RA3100
Terminal
block

controller

20P

20P

RA30-112
IN

Terminal block AX-PCX-10S20
Terminal block connection cable RA30-504
Omniace RA3100

Remote control

Host

20P

controller

RA30-112
IN

Remote control cable (discrete wires) RA30-506
5.2 When connecting multiple RA3100
Remote control

Remote control synchronized operation

Omniace RA3100

Host
controller

20P

RA30-112IN

OUT

Omniace RA3100
14P

20P

RA30-112
IN

Remote control cable (for connecting units) RA30-505
5.3 Carrier signal for AC strain
Carrier signal

Omniace RA3100
RA30-112

OUT 14P

OSC
Internal

Omniace RA3100

for AC strain

RA30-112
20P IN

Remote control cable

OSC(for connecting units) RA30-505

External
AC strain
moduleAC strain
module5.4 Output terminal for waveform confirmation
Omniace RA3100
RA30-112
RA30-xxx
Voltage module
5.5 When monitoring the OUT signal
Hostcontroller

Omniace RA3100
Terminal
block

20P

14P

RA30-112
OUT

Terminal block AX-PCX-10S20
Remote control cable (for connecting units) RA30-505

228

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
6Equivalent circuit

6.1 INThe equivalent circuit schematic of
START/STOP IN, MARK IN, FEED IN,
PRINT IN, EXT SMPL IN, TRIG IN, and
OSC IN.

(+)(-)

6.2 OUTThe equivalent circuit schematic of
START/STOP OUT, MARK OUT, FEED(+)

OUT, PRINT OUT, EXT SMPL OUT,
TRIG/EXT.1 OUT, OSC/EXT.2 OUT.

(-)

NOTE
Ensure that the output current from the OUT connector does not exceed 5 mA per pin.
Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.

1WMPD4004444D

229

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)

9.10.7. Options
1

Connection cables and terminal blocks
The following cables and terminal blocks are provided for signal input and synchronized connection.
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics

Terminal blockconnection cable
RA30-504

For MDR 20 pole terminal block connection
20P - 20P
Length 2 m

Terminal block
AX-PCX-10S20

20p

10p

11p

1p

Remote control cable(discrete wires)
RA30-506
Remote control cable(for connecting units)
RA30-505
2

For MDR 20 pole terminal block (for
AWG16-28)
For remote control input
Length 2 m
For connecting RA3100
20P - 14P
Length 2 m

Pin layout
Pin layout of RA30-112 input connectors and correspondence chart of remote control cables andterminal block connection cables.
RA30-112
input terminal

Combination of
AX-PCX-10S20 terminal
block and RA30-504 cable

RA30-506
Remote control cable (discrete wires)

Pin no.

Pin no.

Wire color Mark color Mark indication

NC

A1

1

GND

B1

11

NC

A2

2

GND

B2

12

START/STOP IN

A3

3

GND

B3

13

MARK IN

A4

4

GND

B4

14

FEED IN

A5

5

GND

B5

15

PRINT IN

A6

6

GND

B6

16

NC

A7

7

GND

B7

17

EXT SMPL IN(+)

A8

8

EXT SMPL IN(-)

B8

18

TRIG IN(+)

A9

9

TRIG IN(-)

B919

OSC IN(+)

A1010OSC IN(-)

B10

20

Sig name

OrangeLight grayWhite
Yellow
Pink
OrangeLight gray
White

Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black

-

Pin layout of RA30-112 OUT connectors and correspondence chart of remote control cables andterminal block connection cables.
230

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
RA30-112
OUT
connector
Pin no.

Combination of
AX-PCX-10S20 terminal
block and RA30-505 cable
Pin no.

START/STOP OUT (+)

A1

3

START/STOP OUT (-)

B1

11/13

MARK OUT (+)

A2

4

MARK OUT (-)

B2

14

FEED OUT (+)

A3

5

FEED OUT (-)

B3

15

PRINT OUT (+)

A4

6

PRINT OUT (-)

B416

EXT SMPL OUT (+)

A5

8

EXT SMPL OUT (-)

B5

18

TRIG/EXT.1 OUT (+)

A6

9

TRIG/EXT.1 OUT (-)

B6

19

OSC/EXT.2 OUT (+)

A7

10

OSC/EXT.2 OUT (-)

B7

20

Sig name

3

Cable Specifications

3.1 RA30-504 Cable

1WMPD4004444D

Shield231

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
3.2 RA30-505 Cable
Shield

3.3 RA30-506 Cable
Shield232

1WMPD4004444D

9.11.

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.11. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)

4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)

9.11.1. Overview
This four channel voltage input module samples a DC to 100 kHz signal at 16-bit 1 MS/s within themeasurement range of ±2 V to ±500 V and can perform A/D conversion. It includes an analog filter forwaveform observation. It is insulated between each channel and between input and output.

9.11.2. Setting the Input Channel<This section describes the setting switches and setting values of the RA3100 main unit. >(1) Slot number, input module type(2) Change slot:

Change the slot.

(3) Select channel:
Select the channel in the slot.
(4) Meas. ON/OFFON:(5) Color:

Measure the input signal.
Change the display color of the waveform
monitor.

(6) Coupling:

(1)
(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Switch the input signal coupling.

(7) Meas. range: Change the measurement range.

(10)

(11)

(8) L.P.F.:

Change the low-pass filter.

(12)

(13)

(10) Disp. pos.:Specify the display position.

(11) Disp. range:

Specifies the display width in the amplitude
(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

direction of each graph.
(12) Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottomof the display range.

(13) Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of
the display range.

(14) Sheet:

Assign the channel to a sheet.

(15) Graph:

Assign the channel to a graph.

(18)(16) Waveform display:
When enabled, the waveform is displayed in the waveform monitor. When disabled, thewaveform is not displayed.
(17) Zero adjust:Cancels the input offset of the input channel. Execute zero cancellation to perform moreaccurate measurement.

(18) Available measurement range/measurement value:
Displays the current available measurement range and measurement value.

1WMPD4004444D

233

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.11. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)

9.11.3. Measurement Setup
Check the slot number and channel, connect the signal to the corresponding input module, and enableMeas.

to display the input waveform on the monitor screen. Perform adjustment for the required

signal waveform while viewing the waveform.
Follow the procedure below to set the input channel.
Step 1.

Set the input coupling in with the

Coupling

key (6).

Coupling

Enables measurement of the actual input signal, including the DC and AC component.

DC

Set DC coupling when performing measurement.
Connects the channel input to GND without connecting the input signal inside the channel.

GND
Step 2.

Contents

Enables the input GND level to be checked with waveform monitoring or printer recording.

Set Meas. range according to the target for measurement.
The input sensitivity can be changed with theMeas. range

key (7) in the channel setup sub

menu. The value displayed for the measurement range (RANGE) indicates the input(measurement) maximum value and corresponds to 10 div on the waveform monitor. When thedisplay position is 50%, ±RANGE (full measurement range) is displayed.
Tap theMeas. range

key and turn the rotary knob to change the range. Turn the rotary knob

counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity and clockwise to increase the sensitivity. The following 8
measurement ranges are available.
500 V

200 V

100 V

50 V

20 V

10 V

5V

2V

Tips
When the input exceeds the measurement range, "OVER RANGE" is displayed on the bottom
right of the screen, and the main unit emits a warning beep. Reduce the sensitivity with themeasurement range so that the input signal does not exceed the range. To silence thewarning beep, disable the buzzer sound setting. For more information, see the buzzer soundsetting in "8.3.1. Environment Setup".
Beep beep!

Beep beep!

OVER RANGE

234

1WMPD4004444D

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.11. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)
Step 3.

Set the input filter. Set the low-pass filter with the

L.P.F.

key (8).

The low-pass filter of this module is a gently sloping attenuation filter that prioritizes the waveform.
Set a cutoff frequency about 10 times the effective frequency as a signal to remove theunnecessary high frequency component and noise component.
OFF
Step 4.

3 kHz

300 Hz

30 Hz

3 Hz

Set the display range and display position.
See "Description of Step 4 (setting the display range and display position (waveform display area))"in "4.2.2. Setup the input channels".
Disp. range:

The display width in the amplitude direction of the waveform display area on the
waveform monitor

Disp. pos.:Specify the position of the waveform monitor to display the specified range of the
waveform display area.

Step 5.

Set the display minimum and display maximum.
See "Description of Step 6 (setting the display maximum and display minimum (waveform display
scale))" in 4.2.2. Setup the input channels".

Step 6.

Disp. max:

Set the display upper limit value of the top of the display range.

Disp. min:Set the display lower limit value of the bottom of the display range.

Execute zero adjust.
After turning on the power, changes in the surrounding temperature as time elapses change theinternal temperature of the RA3100 main unit, and cause temperature drift inside the input module,
which leads to errors in measurements due to variation in the DC offset voltage. Execute zeroadjust to minimize these errors.
To perform zero cancellation, tap the

Zero adjustkey (17) after waiting for a warm-up period of

60 minutes.

NOTE

This function is for canceling internal offset and drift, and does not cancel the offset of the input signal.

1WMPD4004444D

235

9. Using Optional Modules – 9.11. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)

9.11.4. Reference Materials

CAUTION
Ensure that the voltage between each input and the chassis (GND) and between each channel does
not exceed 300 V(DC+ACpeak). Damage may be caused if the voltage is exceeded.
1

Input cable
The input connectors for CH1 to CH4 are insulated BNC connectors. Do not connect metallic BNC
plugs, as they may damage the connectors or cause connection problems.
Use the insulated BNC cable indicated below (RA30-507) as the signal input cables.
Recommended cables
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
Insulated BNC
600V

CAT III 300V
CAT II 600V

RA30-507

MAXIMUM RATEDVOLTAGE TO

LINE VOLTAGE(safety alligator clip)

MAXIMUM RATED

Insulated BNC cable!

Safety alligator clip
Red +RA30-507

Black -

Length 1.5 m
2Maximum rated voltage to ground
RA3100 main unit

Input module
1ch H
L
Common 2ch H
Setup
LInterface
3ch H
L
4ch H
L

Slots
±500 V

Between channels
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V
300 V (DC + AC peak)±500 V

GND(connect to power cable with ground terminal)

236

Between each channel andthe chassis, to ground
300 V (DC + AC peak)

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.1. Version Information

10.

Appendix

10.1.

Version Information

This chapter provides additional explanations of various functions.

The versions handled on the management screen of this product are as indicated below.
Name

Overview(1) Windows OS

The version of the embedded Windows 10 IoT operating system(2) Software

The version of the RA3100 software(3) Main hardware

The version of the main FPGA

(4) Printer hardware

The version of the printer FPGA

(5) Modules

The versions of the module FPGAs(6) Recorded data software

The version of the RA3100 software that recorded the data

(7) Recorded data file

The version of the RA3100 software that recorded or updated the file(8) Configuration data file

The version of the RA3100 software that created the file

・Version management screen
(1)
(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

・File management screen - Record(6)

1WMPD4004444D・File management screen - Config
(7)

(8)

237

10. Appendix – 10.2. Sampling Data Format

10.2.

Sampling Data Format

This product has two data formats: normal sampling and P-P sampling.

10.2.1. Normal SamplingWith normal sampling, the A/D value of the sampling period is recorded as data and used for waveform
reproduction and data analysis.
Sampling period

T0

T1

T2

T3

Analog input

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

T9

Time

Playback the input waveform from sampling data
If the input signal is too fast for the sampling period, the waveform reproducibility may drop and lead tothe unexpected loss of pulses.
Sampling data

Sampling period

T0

T1

T2

T3

T4

T5

T6

T7

T8

T9

Time

Raising the sampling speed improves the waveform reproducibility but increases the recorded data.
Sampling period

T0

T2

T4

T6

T8

Sampling data

T10

T12

T14

T16

T18

Time

10.2.2. P-P Sampling
P-P sampling performs sampling with the data within the sampling period as the fastest sampling (20MS/s), to detect the peak values (maximum value and minimum value) and record those peak values as
the recorded data.
This data format is suitable for the waveform playback of long-term recording, as it enables waveform
reproducibility of a wide band of data, without sudden spike noise, etc.
A disadvantage is that it cannot perform data analysis after recording (average, RMS, FFT, etc.)
Sampling period

T0

T1

T2

T3

P-P data

T4

T5

T6

238

T7

T8

T9

Time

1WMPD4004444D

10.3.

10. Appendix – 10.3. Sampling

Sampling

10.3.1. Internal Sampling
The sampling speed can be set for printer recording, SSD recording, and memory recording separately.
The maximum sampling speed differs for each recording. For information on specifications, see "12.1.1
Main Unit Basic Specifications".

10.3.2. External SamplingWith printer recording and SSD recording, external sampling is possible, where sampling is performed
synchronized to the input of an external clock signal. However, only one device can record, either printerrecording or SSD recording.
The clock signal of external sampling is input to the "EXT SMPL IN" terminal of "9.10 Remote Control
Module (RA30-112)".

10.3.3. Relationship between Sampling Speed and Chart Speed
The relationship between sampling speed and chart speed is indicated in the table below.
Sampling

Internal

External

1WMPD4004444D

Sampling speed

Chart speed

100 ms/div(1 kS/s)

100 mm/s

200 ms/div(500 S/s)

50 mm/s

500 ms/div(200 S/s)

20 mm/s

1 s/div(100 S/s)

10 mm/s

2 s/div(50 S/s)

5 mm/s

5 s/div(20 S/s)

2 mm/s

10 s/div(10 S/s)

1 mm/s

20 s/div(5 S/s)

30 mm/min

50 s/div(2 S/s)

12 mm/min

100 s/div(1 S/s)

6 mm/min

2 min/div(50 S/min)

5 mm/min

5 min/div(20 S/min)

2 mm/min10 min/div(10 S/min)

1 mm/min

EXT.

0.1 mm/pulse23910. Appendix – 10.4. Scale Conversion (Physical Quantity Conversion)

10.4.

Scale Conversion (Physical Quantity Conversion)

The scale conversion function converts the voltage values output from a sensor, etc. to a physicalquantity for direct reading.
This product has two conversion methods. Both methods perform the same conversion, as indicated in
the figure.

Method 1 Direct conversion with two point values
The Y = AX + B formula is derived by specifying the input and output values a [Xa, Ya] and b[Xb, Yb] of the two points a and b.
Method 2 Conversion with gain compensation when conversion between physical quantity and sensor
output voltage is defined
Gain A and offset B of the sensor input are defined and the formula Y = AX + B is derived.
Physical quantity
Yb

b

Ya

a
Gain A

Offset B

Example-1

Example-202-pt gain
4-20mA transmission
Two point method

Xa

Xb

When the sensor side output 4-20 mA (1 - 5 V) is 0 - 10 kg
Conversion 1:1 → 0; Conversion 2:5 → 10 (unit: kg)

Gain compensation
Vibration sensor
Sensor type

Sensitivity 4.5 N = 1 V
Gain: 4.5; Offset: 0 (unit: N)

240

Input voltage

1WMPD4004444D

10.5.

10. Appendix – 10.5. Wave Inversion

Wave Inversion

For channels with wave inversion enabled, the waveform and values are inverted. The following
functions are processed with inverted values.
Y-T waveform
X-Y waveform
FFT analysis
Digital view
CursorThumbnailSearch function
Trigger

10.5.1. Use in Conjunction with Scale Conversion
Because wave inversion only inverts the measured values, the physical quantity is derived with theformula Y = -AX + B when it is used in conjunction with "10.4 Scale Conversion". Therefore, if the offset
is not zero, the value after wave inversion will differ from the inversion of the value before wave
inversion.
Example Input voltage: 5 V; Gain: 2; Offset: 10

Measured

Wave inversion disabled

2 × 5 V + 10 = 20 V

Wave inversion enabled-2 × 5 V + 10 = 0 V

Wave inversion Inverted measured
value
processScaleconversion

Physical quantity

Tips
When wave inversion is used, the waveform is displayed upside-down, but if the gain is set to -1 inscale conversion, only the scale value is displayed upside-down.
The scale value is upside-down
Scale conversion
gain: -1

Wave inversion
enabled
The waveform is upside-down

1WMPD4004444D

24110. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

10.6.

FFT Analysis

10.6.1. Analysis Function
Enables analysis of a time scale waveform and spectrum, etc.

Tips
Treat the engineering unit as 0 dB.
(Example)

For voltage measurement

1 V = 0 dB

For RMS measurement

1 Vrms = 0 dB

Time Scale Waveform (One Signal Analysis)
The time domain waveform of the input signal.

Linear Spectrum (One Signal Analysis)
Each frequency component G of the linear spectrum is defined as G = R + jI (with R being the real
number part and I being the imaginary number part).
The frequency domain waveform of the input signal enables the amplitude and phase of each frequency
component to be understood.
R and I are the result of multiplying the window function peak compensation coefficient k.

k=

N

∑

N −1

i =0

W (i )

N: Sampling points; W(i): Window function

Real number part

Lin-RelImaginary number part

Lin-Img

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Phase

Phase

R
I

�(R2 + I 2 )20 × log�(R2 + I 2 )tan−1 (I/R)

RMS Spectrum (One Signal Analysis)
The frequency domain waveform of the input signal enables the amplitude (effective value) and phase
to be understood.
R and I are the result of multiplying the window function peak compensation coefficient k.

k=

N

∑

N −1

i =0

W (i )

N: Sampling points; W(i): Window function

Real number part

Lin-RelImaginary number part

Lin-Img

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Phase

Phase

R/√2
I/√2

�(R2 + I 2 )/√2

20 × log(�(R2 + I 2 )/√2)
tan−1 (I/R)

242

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

Power Spectrum (One Signal Analysis)
Indicates the power (squared value) of the input signal to understand the amplitude information only.
R and I are the result of multiplying the window function peak compensation coefficient k.

Nk =  N −1
 ∑i =0 W (i ) 

2

N: Sampling points; W(i): Window function

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-AmpR2 + I 2

10 × log(R2 + I 2 )Power Spectrum Density (One Signal Analysis)
Indicates the power spectrum by unit frequency ∆f.

R and I are the result of multiplying the window function peak compensation coefficient k.

Nk =  N −1
 ∑i =0 W (i ) 

2

N: Sampling points; W(i): Window function

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp(R2 + I 2 )/∆𝑓𝑓 × 𝑘𝑘1

10 × log((R2 + I 2 )/∆𝑓𝑓 × 𝑘𝑘1)

∆f = Fs/N; Fs: Sampling points; W(i): Window function
k1: Window function BW compensation coefficient
Rectangular1

Hanning

0.666

Hamming

0.731

Cross Power Spectrum (Two Signal Analysis)
The cross power spectrum derives the power between two signals. It is derived as this product of thelinear spectrum Gy of the signal to compare and the complex conjugate Gx* of the linear spectrum Gxof the base signal.
Linear spectrum of reference signal

Gx = Rx + jIx,

Linear spectrum of comparison signal

Gy = Ry + jIy

Cross power spectrum

Gyx = Gy × Gx* = (Ry + jIy)(Rx – jIx) = Ryx + jIyx

Cross power spectrum (real number part)Gx* = Rx – jIx

Ryx = (RyRx + IyIx) × k

Cross power spectrum (imaginary number part)Iyx = (RxIy – RyIx) × k

Ryx and Iyx are the result of multiplying the window function peak compensation coefficient k.

Nk =  N −1
 ∑i =0 W (i ) 

2

N: Sampling points; W(i): Window function

Real number part

Lin-RelImaginary number part

Lin-Img

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Phase

Phase

1WMPD4004444D

Ryx
Iyx

�(Ryx 2 + Iyx 2 )10 × log (𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 2 + 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 2 )tan−1 (Iyx/Ryx)243

10. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

Transfer Function (Two Signal Analysis)
The transfer function indicates the frequency characteristics of the input and output of the transfer
system.
It is derived as the ratio of the cross power spectrum Gyx and input (reference) power spectrum Gxx.
Transfer function = Hyx = Gyx/ Gxx
Real number part

Lin-RelImaginary number part

Lin-Img

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Phase

Phase

HRyx
HIyx

�𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 2 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 2

10 × log(HRyx 2 + HIyx 2 )tan−1 (HIyx/HRyx)

Coherence Function (Two Signal Analysis)
Expresses a comparison of the power caused by the input signal of the transfer system and the total
output power. It is derived from the cross power spectrum Gyx, input (reference) power spectrum Gxx,
and output (comparison) power spectrum Gyy.
Amplitude

Lin-AmpNOTE|𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺|2 /(Gxx × Gyy)

The coherence function equals 1 across the entire frequency with a single measurement. Make sure to
perform averaging of the frequency axis.

Octave Analysis
1/1 octave band or 1/3 octave band analysis can be performed.
This product derives the power spectrum first and then adds the data in each band range.
Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-AmpOct × k1

10 × log (Oct × k1)

k1: Window function BW compensation coefficient
Rectangular1

Hanning

0.666

Hamming

0.731

244

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

10.6.2. AVG process
Averaging is not performed when set unless valid settings are specified for the analysis function. The
enabled/disabled state of averaging for different analysis settings is indicated in the table.
Analysis
Time scale waveform

Linear spectrum

RMS spectrum

Power spectrum
Power spectrum density

Cross power spectrum

Transfer function

Coherence function
1/1 octave analysis
1/3 octave analysis

AVG method
Frequency
Time axis
axis

Y axisAmplitude

LinearEnabledDisabled

Disabled

Real number part

Lin-RelDisabled

Disabled

Disabled

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabled

Phase

Phase

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Real number part

Lin-RelDisabled

Disabled

Disabled

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabled

Phase

Phase

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledAmplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledReal number part

Lin-RelDisabled

Disabled

Disabled

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabled

Phase

Phase

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Real number part

Lin-RelDisabled

Disabled

Disabled

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabled

Phase

Phase

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledDisabled

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledAmplitude

Lin-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabledLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

Disabled

EnabledEnabled

Simple Arithmetic Average
The various elements of the analysis results are averaged using the formula indicated below.
N

SN = (1/N) � YK
K=1

1WMPD4004444D

Peak

245

10. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

Exponentially Weighted Average
The averaging process for the frequency component of the analysis results, which performs averaging
by exponentially weighting each element to average.
(Example) When the number of additions N = 3
E1 = Y1
E2 = (1 - α) E1 + αY2
E3 = (1 - α) E2 + αY3
α: Weighted average constant α = 1 / N

Frequency Axis Peak Hold
Retains the maximum value of each frequency component.

246

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.6. FFT Analysis

10.6.3. Units of Analysis Results

The units of the analysis results are indicated below.
Analysis

X axis

Unit

Time scale waveform

Time

s

Other analysis

Frequency

Hz

Analysis
Time scale waveform

Linear spectrum

RMS spectrum

Power spectrum
Power spectrum density

Cross power spectrum

Transfer function

Coherence function
1/1 octave analysis
1/3 octave analysis

1WMPD4004444D

Y axis

Unit

Amplitude

Lineareu

Real number part

Lin-ReleuImaginary number part

Lin-Imgeu

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

db

Phase

Phase

deg

Real number part

Lin-ReleuImaginary number part

Lin-Imgeu

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

db

Phase

Phase

deg

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu2

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Ampdb

Amplitude

Lin-Amp

eu2/HzLogarithmic amplitude

Log-Ampdb

Real number part

Lin-Releu2

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

eu2

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu2

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

db

Phase

Phase

deg

Real number part

Lin-RelNo unit

Imaginary number part

Lin-Img

No unit

Amplitude

Lin-AmpNo unit

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Amp

db

Phase

Phase

deg

Amplitude

Lin-AmpNo unit

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Ampdb

Amplitude

Lin-Ampeu

Logarithmic amplitude

Log-Ampdb

247

10. Appendix – 10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

10.7.

Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

When the Web server function is enabled, you can use the Web browser on a computer or other device
to remotely operate, configure, and view the screens of the RA3100.

10.7.1. Computer System Requirements
Item

Description

Memory1 GB or more of free space

Display

Resolution 1920 × 1080 or higher

Web browser

Microsoft Edge

version 79.0.309.65 or later

10.7.2. Preparations(1) Connect the RA3100 and computer with a LAN cable.
(2) Configure the network settings of the RA3100 to enable connection with the computer.
(3) Enable the Web server function of the RA3100.

10.7.3. Connection Method
Start the Web browser on the computer and enter "http://" followed by the IP address of the RA3100.

Example When the IP address of the RA3100 is 192.168.0.1
When connection with the RA3100 is complete, the [Remote] screen isdisplayed in the Web browser.

Tips
If authentication settings are enabled in the Web server
function of the RA3100, enter the user name and password
to sign in when connecting. Connection is only possible byentering the user name and password set in the RA3100.

248

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

10.7.4. Remote Screen
The [Remote] screen is displayed when connection is complete or when the

Remotebutton isclicked. It enables you to perform remote operations on and view the screens of the RA3100.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)
(5)

(6)

(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Save:

Saves an image file (in the PNG format) of the RA3100 screen to thecomputer.

(2) Reload:

Sets the update speed of the RA3100 screen.
Select [Fastest], [Fast], [Normal], or [Slow] for the response speed of theremote input signal.

(3) Info:

Switches to the [Info] screen.

(4) Remote:

Switches to the [Remote] screen.

(5) RA3100 screen:

Displays the RA3100 screen.
You can remotely operate the RA3100 using mouse operations or keyboard
operations on the screen. See "10.7.6. Remotely Operating the RA3100 froma Web Browser".

(6) TIME OUT:

Displayed when a problem occurs with HTTP communication.

(7) RA3100 name:

Displays the PC name of the RA3100.

(8) RA3100 state:

Displays the state of the RA3100 (Measuring, During record, etc.)(9) RA3100 operation panel:

Enables you to perform RA3100 panel operations.
COARSE

key:

Standard mode on the rotation knob

PRINT(S)key:

PRINT key

PRINT(L)key:

Press and hold PRINT key

FINE

TRIG

1WMPD4004444D

key:

Fine adjustment mode on the rotation knob

key:

TRIG key

START

key:

START key

STOP

key:

STOP key249

10. Appendix – 10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

Tips

There is no limit to the number of computers that can connect to the RA3100, but it may take some time
for the screen to update when the network is busy. Use a maximum of one computer when Reload is set
to Fastest, two computers when set to Fast, three computers when set to Normal, and five computerswhen set to Slow.

10.7.5. Info Screen
The [Info] screen is displayed when connection is complete or when theInfobutton is clicked.

It enables you to check the main unit information of the RA3100 and configure the time and othersettings.
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

(1) Sync:

Sync the time of the RA3100 with the time of the computer.
* There may be a difference between the times.

(2) PC time:

Displays the time of the computer displaying the Web browser.

(3) RA3100 time:

Displays the time of the RA3100.

(4) RA3100 main unit information:
Displays the serial number of the RA3100, the various versions, and the module
configuration.

250

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

10.7.6. Remotely Operating the RA3100 from a Web Browser
You can remotely operate the RA3100 screen on a Web browser using mouse operations and the Ctrl,
Shift, and Alt keys combined with the mouse wheel.
ActionScreen Operation

Mouse Operation
Left-click the mouse to operate the screen of the RA3100.
Left-click a setting item to change the border of the item to orange and change thesetting value using a mouse wheel operation.

Change setting(mouse wheel)

For example, select [Color] to change the color or select [Disp. pos.] to change thevalue of the display width ratio.

Right-click a setting item to display the dialog corresponding to that setting item.
Selection Palette Dialog
Select a setting value to reflect the setting and close the dialog. To cancel thechanges, click outside the dialog.

Change setting(dialog)
Numeric Value Input Dialog
Enter the numeric value using button operations on the screen or keyboard input
operations. When performing keyboard input, press the [Enter] key to reflect thesettings and close the dialog.

Change X axis

Ctrl key + mouse wheel up:

Zoom inscale of waveform Ctrl key + mouse wheel down:
Change Y axis

Zoom out

Shift key + mouse wheel up:

Zoom inscale of waveform Shift key + mouse wheel down:

Zoom out

Move in waveform

Mouse wheel up:

Move left

X axis direction

Mouse wheel down:Move rightMove in waveform

Alt key + mouse wheel up:

Move up

Y axis direction

Alt key + mouse wheel down:Move down

You can move the specified cursor line with mouse wheel operations.
Move cursor

Mouse wheel up:

Move left

Mouse wheel down:Move right

You can directly drag the cursor A or B mark to move it.
Press the z key in conjunction with a mouse wheel operation to make the update stepFine adjustment

smaller (perform fine adjustment).
ExampleTo zoom the X axis of the waveform with fine adjustment:z key + Ctrl key + mouse wheel up

1WMPD4004444D

251

10. Appendix – 10.7. Connecting to This Product via a Web Browser

10.7.7. Switching the Web Browser Display Language
The display language of the [Remote] screen and [Info] screen automatically switches according to thelanguage set in the Web browser. The supported languages are Japanese, English, Korean, andTraditional Chinese, and English is displayed if another language is set.

Tips

The screen of the RA3100 is displayed in the language set in the main unit.

252

1WMPD4004444D

10.8.

10. Appendix – 10.8. Downloading the Data of this Product via FTP

Downloading the Data of this Product via FTP

If the FTP server function is enabled, FTP client software can be used to download recorded data,
image data, and configuration data.

10.8.1. Preparations(1) Connect the RA3100 and computer with a LAN cable.
(2) Configure the network settings of the RA3100 to enable connection with the computer.
(3) Enable the FTP server function of the RA3100.

10.8.2. Download Method
In this example, the Explorer of Windows 10 is used.
(1) Start the Explorer on the computer and enter "ftp://" followed by the IP address of the RA3100.
ExampleWhen the IP address of the
RA3100 is 192.168.0.1

Tips
If authentication is enabled, the logon screen is displayed.
Enter the user name and password configured in theauthentication settings.

(2) Drag the files and folders you want to download anddrop them at the destination.

Tips
Configuration data is located in the Env folder, recorded data is located in the Record folder, and image
data is located in the ScreenShot folder.
Folders and files preparing for recording may exist in the Record folder.
The file update date/time may differ from that displayed on the client side.
A maximum of eight clients can connect to the FTP server at a time.

1WMPD4004444D

253

10. Appendix – 10.9. Transferring Data

10.9.

Transferring Data

When the data transfer function is enabled, the sample data indicated in ”10.9.2 Sampling Data” isforwarded at the specified transfer period to the PC connected to the RA3100 via a LAN cable.

10.9.1. Procedure(1) Connect the RA3100 and PC with a LAN cable.
(2) Configure the network settings of the RA3100 to enable connection with the PC.
(3) Enable the data transfer function of the RA3100.
(4) Connect the PC to the RA3100 via TCP or UDP.
(5) After connecting the RA3100 and the PC, the sampling data starts transferring according to the setting of[Transfer mode].
Always:When a connection is established between the RA3100 and the PC, the sampling data
starts transferring.

When recording: The sampling data is transferred when recording.
Manual:The transfer process starts and stops with user instructions. This is used by setting[Data transfer] to [Manual control] on the main unit screen or by using the "E29:
Manual control of data transfer" communication command.

For information on the port numbers, see "12.2.11.3 List of Network Port Numbers Used".

NOTE
The data transfer process may be interrupted if RA3100 operations are performed while the data istransferring.

254

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.9. Transferring Data

10.9.2. Sampling Data
Sampling data refers to the multiple-channel measurement data for one sample.

10.9.2.1.

Data Format

Sampling data is in the binary (little endian) format. The data format is indicated below.
4Byte

Variable length

2Byte

Time stamp

Measurement data block

Measurement status

Name

Type

Data length Remarks

Time stamp

Unsigned

4Byte

Indicates the relative time. Set to 0 when data transfer is

32-bitenabled. When [Transfer data] is set to One-shot, this is

Integerincremented by one for each item of sampling data. When
[Transfer data] is set to Continuous, this is incremented by one
for each sampling run. Therefore, the values will benoncontinuous if decimation is used.
This can be turned on or off using [Time stamp] in 【Datatransfer】.

Measurement Differs
data block

Variable

The measurement data of channels with measurement

according to the length

enabled for each sampling run. The data length differs

measurement

according to the data format of the sampling and the number

dataof channels with measurement enabled.
For details, see "10.9.3 Measurement data block”.

Measurement Unsigned
Status16-bitInteger

2Byte

Each bit indicates the status of the RA3100 and the input
signal of the RA30-112 remote control module, etc as 0 or 1.
Bit0: Trigger

Indicates that a trigger has occurred

Bit1: MarkIndicates that a mark has occurred

Bit2: FeedIndicates the input of an RA30-112

Bit3: Print

Indicates the input of an RA30-112

FEED IN signal
PRINT IN signal
Bit4: During record

Indicates that data is being
recorded

Bit 5 to bit 15

1WMPD4004444D

255

System reserved

10. Appendix – 10.9. Transferring Data

10.9.3. Measurement data block
A measurement data block is a collection of the measurement data from channels with measurement
enabled for each sampling run.

10.9.3.1.

Measurement Data

Measurement data is two bytes of binary data. Measurement data can be divided into the analog
channel data of a module such as an analog input module and the logic channel data of a logic module.
The format of the measurement data also differs according to the data format.
For information on the data format, see ”10.2 Sampling Data Format”.
Analog channel data:
The measurement data of an analog input module, expressed as a signed two-byte AD count value(integer).
This is one item of measurement data with the data format set to NORMAL sampling.
2Byte
AD count value
For P-P sampling, it is two items of measurement data (the minimum value and maximum value of the
AD count values).
2Byte

2Byte

AD count value (min)AD count value (max)For information on converting AD count values to physical quantities, see "10.12 Converting AD
Count Values to Physical Quantities”.
Logic channel data:
The logic module values express one signal as one bit, and two-byte measurement data hasmeasurement values for CHA and CHB. If measurement is enabled for either CHA or CHB, the data has
the measurement values for both channels.
The signal order from bit 0 is CHA-CH1, to CHA-CH2, up to CHB-CH8 in bit 15.
This is 0 or 1 (the level) for 16 channels if the data format is set to NORMAL sampling.
2Byte
Level
CHB

CHA

CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1
Bit15

Bit0

For P-P sampling, the data includes two items of measurement data, which are the 0 or 1 (the level) for
each sampling period and a flag indicating whether the 0 or 1 changed within the sampling period.
2Byte

2Byte

Level
CHB
CH8
Bit15

Flag
CHA

CH1 CH8CHB
CH1 CH8
Bit0 Bit15

256

CHA
CH1 CH8

CH1
Bit0

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.9. Transferring Data

10.9.3.2.

Order and Data Length of Measurement Data

The order and data length of the measurement data differs according to the data format of the sampling
and the channels of measurement.
An example of the following module configuration is indicated below.
Example) If modules are mounted to the RA3100 with the following configuration
Slot

Slot

ChannelNotation

Measurement1RA30-101

CH1

S1-CH1

Enabled

CH2

S1-CH2

Enabled

CH1

S2-CH1Disabled

CH2

S2-CH2

EnabledCHA

S3-CHA

EnabledCHB

S3-CHB

Disabled

---

---

---

2

RA30-101

3

RA30-105

4 to 9Not mounted

When the data format is set to NORMAL sampling:
The measurement data of channels with measurement enabled is output in order. Logic channel data
has both CHA and CHB values if measurement is enabled for either CHA or CHB.
2Byte

2Byte

2Byte

S1-CH1

S1-CH2

S2-CH22Byte
S3-CHA

S3-CHBThe data length is derived with the following formula.
Data length (in bytes) = number of analog channel measurements× 2 (bytes)*+ number of logic channel measurements* × 2 (bytes)

Logic modules are counted in slots, with each item of measurement data having both CHA andCHB values.

The data length of the configuration example is as follows.
3 (channels) × 2 (bytes) + 1 (slot) × 2 (bytes) = 8 (bytes)

When the data format is set to P-P sampling:

The measurement data of channels with measurement enabled is output in order. Analog channel datais ordered with the minimum value before the maximum value. Logic channel data is ordered with thelevel before the flag and has both CHA and CHB values if measurement is enabled for either CHA or
CHB.
2Byte

2Byte

2Byte

2Byte

2Byte

2Byte

S1-CH1 min

S1-CH1 max

S1-CH2 min

S1-CH2 max

S2-CH2 min

S2-CH2 max

2Byte

2Byte

S3-CHA-CHB level

S3-CHA-CHB flag

The data length is derived with the following formula.

*

Data length (in bytes) = number of analog channel measurements× 2 (bytes) × 2+ number of logic channel measurements* × 2 (bytes) × 2

Logic modules are counted in slots, with each item of measurement data having both CHA andCHB values.

The data length of the configuration example is as follows.
3 (channels) × 2 (bytes) × 2 + 1 (slots) × 2 (bytes) × 2 = 16 (bytes)
1WMPD4004444D

257

10. Appendix – 10.10. Remote Control

10.10. Remote Control

This section describes the timing for using the remote control module (RA30-112) to remotely control
this product from an external device. For details on the pin layout, etc., see ”9.10 Remote Control
Module (RA30-112)”.

10.10.1. Starting/Stopping Recording
Recording starts when the Low level signal is input to the START/STOP IN of the remote control module.
However, depending on the state of this product, recording may not start when a Low level signal is
input or recording may not start immediately and instead start after the processing of this product iscomplete.
If recording does not start
Recording does not start if a Low level signal is input while this product is starting up.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to START/STOP IN while this product is starting up
Input signal
H
START/STOP IN

LPower ON
START

RA3100 state*

STOP

(1)

START

(2)

STOP
(3)

(4)

(2)

Recorded data*

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Starting up, (2) Measuring, (3) Recording, and (4) Saving recording.
If recording starts after processing is complete
If a Low level signal is input to START/STOP IN while this product is in the state where it is saving
recording, printing, or stopping printing, recording starts after processing is complete.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to START/STOP IN while this product is stopping recording
Input signal
H

START/STOP IN

L
START

RA3100 state*(1)

STOP START
(2)

(3)

STOP
(2)

(3)

(1)

Recorded data*

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Measuring (2) Recording, and (3) Saving recording.
258

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.10. Remote Control

10.10.2. Starting/Stopping Pen Recording
Pen recording starts when the Low level signal is input to the PRINT IN of the remote control module.
However, depending on the state of this product, pen recording may not start when a Low level signal is
input or pen recording may not start immediately and instead start after the processing of this product iscomplete.
If pen recording does not start
Pen recording does not start if a Low level signal is input while this product is starting up, recording, orsaving recording.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to PRINT IN while this product is starting up
Input signal
H
PRINT IN

L
Power ON
START

RA3100 state*(1)

Recording paper
*

STOP

START

(2)

STOP
(3)

(4)

(2)

(no recording)

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Starting up, (2) Measuring, (3) Printing, and (4) Stopping printing.
If pen recording starts after processing is complete
If a Low level signal is input to PRINT IN while this product is in the state where it is printing, or stopping
printing, recording starts after processing is complete.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to PRINT IN while this product is stopping printing
Input signal
H
PRINT IN

L
START

RA3100 state*(1)

STOP START
(2)

(3)

STOP
(2)

Recording paper*

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Measuring, (2) Printing, and (3) Stopping printing.

1WMPD4004444D

259

(3)

(1)

10. Appendix – 10.10. Remote Control

10.10.3. Starting/Stopping Feeding
Feeding (idle feeding of recording paper) starts when the Low level signal is input to the FEED IN of theremote control module. However, depending on the state of this product, feeding may not start when a
Low level signal is input or feeding may not start immediately and instead start after the processing of
this product is complete.
If feeding does not start
Feeding does not start if a Low level signal is input while this product is starting up.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to FEED IN while this product is starting up
Input signal
H
FEED IN

L
Power ON
START

RA3100 state*(1)

Recording paper
*

STOP

START

(2)

STOP
(3)

(2)

(Idle feeding)(No idle feeding)

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Starting up, (2) Measuring, and (3) Feeding.
If feeding starts after processing is complete
If a Low level signal is input to FEED IN while this product is in the state where it is saving recording* or
stopping printing, feeding starts after processing is complete.
*For real-time printing.
Example: If a Low level signal is input to FEED IN while this product is saving recording

START/STOP IN H
or PRINT IN L
H
FEED IN

L
START

RA3100 state*(1)

STOP START
(2)

(3)

Recording paper
*

STOP
(4)

(1)

(Idle feeding)

The states of the RA3100 are (1) Measuring, (2) Recording or printing, (3) Saving recording or stopping
printing, or (4) Feeding.
260

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.11. Relationship between AD Count Value and Measured Value

10.11. Relationship between AD Count Value and Measured Value
The "AD count value" refers to the measured value of the analog input module after A/D conversion.
The AD count value is a signed 16-bit integer.
Input

A/D conversion

value

process

AD count value

Conversion process

Measured value(-32000 to +32000)

for measurement(-500 V to +500 V, etc.)

Measured value+500V
0V-500 V-320000This value is generally calculated based on the following
formula.
Measured value =AD count value
x measurement range
32000

RA30-101/500 V range, the measured value+32000AD count value
Relationship between AD Count Value andequals (+12800/32000) × 500 [V] = +200 [V]Measured Value

Example When the AD count value is +12800 with the

The calculation formulas for the measured values of each module and measurement target are
indicated in the table below.
ModuleMeasurement target

AD count value

RA30-101 Voltage-32000 to +32000

RA30-102 Voltage-32000 to +32000

RA30-103 Voltage-32000 to +32000

RA30-104 Voltage-32000 to +32000

Thermocouple (TC)RA30-106 Platinum resistanceCalculation formula

Measured value =-32000 to +32000

AD count value
32000
x measurement range

temperature detector
RA30-107

DC
RMS-32000 to +32000

PeriodFrequency
Rotation speed

Measured value =-32000 to +32000

AD count value + 32000
64000
x measurement range

Pulse width
Duty cycle-32000 to +32000 Measured value =AD count value + 32000
64000
x 100 [%]

Measured value =RA30-108
Power freq.

-32000 to +32000

AD count value
32000

x deviation + measurement range* Deviation =20 (with measurement range at 50 Hz/60 Hz)
40 (with measurement range at 400 Hz)
AD count value

Freq. deviation-32000 to +32000 Measured value =Pulse count-32000 to +8000 Measured value = AD count value + 32000

1WMPD4004444D

261

64000

x 100 [%]

10. Appendix – 10.11. Relationship between AD Count Value and Measured Value
ModuleMeasurement target

AD count value

Calculation formula
Measured value = (AD count value + 32000)

RA30-108

Pulse integ.

-32000 to 18000

Voltage-32000 to +32000

Acceleration
RA30-109 Velocity-32000 to +32000

Displacement
RA30-113 Voltagex

Measured value =Measurement range
50000
AD count value
32000

x measurement range-32000 to +32000

262

1WMPD4004444D

10. Appendix – 10.12. Converting AD Count Values to Physical Quantities

10.12. Converting AD Count Values to Physical Quantities
Use the following formula to convert AD count values to physical quantities.
(Formula)
Physical quantity (unit) = AD count ✕ gain + offset

The unit, gain, and offset are obtained with the I09 command for reading the physical quantity
calculation coefficient or the <ToPhysical> tag of the recorded information XML file.
Item

Description

Retrieved to
I09 command<ToPhysical> in XML file

Gain

Value multiplied to AD count

A1: Gain<Gain>

OffsetValue added to AD count

A2: Offset<Offset>

Unit

Unit of physical quantity

A3: Unit<Unit>

Example) When the AD count is 12800 and the I09 response is as follows,
Gain:1.5625E-02

Offset

:

0E+00

Unit

:

V

Physical quantity = 12800 ✕ 1.5625E-02 + 0E + 00 = 200 [V]

1WMPD4004444D

263

11. Maintenance – 11.1. Managing/Handling Recording Paper and Printer Recorded Data

11.

Maintenance

The frame must not be removed from this product other than by our service engineers, as this product isa precision device.
This section describes the maintenance of this product.

11.1. Managing/Handling Recording Paper and Printer Recorded Data
11.1.1. Replacing Recording Paper and Monitoring Remaining Paper
Use the chart recording paper specified by A&D. Use of a chart that is not recommended may cause
failure in printing or shorten the life of the thermal head.
Red is printed on the recording paper when the recording paper is running low. The remaining paper
monitor (PAPER) is displayed on the side menu of the monitor. Follow these to replace the recording
paper.
For information on the replacement method, see "2.1.3. Paper Loading".
Remaining Paper Monitor Operations<After replacing recording paper><During use>

<No paper remaining>

Reset the remaining paper monitor after replacing the recording paper. Press and hold

PAPER

(remaining paper monitor) on the side menu to display the dialog box for resetting.
Tap

Reset to 30 m

for a 30 m paper roll (YPS-106 or YPS-108) or

Z-fold paper (YPS-112), and then tap

Reset to 200 m

for a 200 m

CLOSE .

Reset to 30 m

Reset to 200 m

264

1WMPD4004444D

11. Maintenance – 11.1. Managing/Handling Recording Paper and Printer Recorded Data

11.1.2. Storing Recording Paper
Storing Recording Paper before Recording
Avoid storing recording paper in high temperature or high humidity environments. Take care as storing it
in a high temperature environment for an extended period of time will cause the white background tochange color.
When storing recording paper, remove it from the main unit and insert it in a plastic bag, or as-is if it isstill in its original packaging, and then store it in a dark location with a temperature of 25°C or less andhumidity of 70% RH or less.
Do not expose it to sunlight for extended periods of time. Take care when performing measurement or
storage outdoors, as exposing it to light for an extended period of time will cause the white backgroundto change color.

Storing Recording Paper after Recording
Avoid storing recorded data in high temperature or high humidity environments or exposing it to sunlightor strong light for an extended period of time, as it may lose color or the white background may change
color.
When storing recording paper for an extended period of time after recording, file it in a dark location witha temperature of 25°C or less and humidity of 70% RH or less. When using a file folder, make sure that
it is made of a material that does not include plasticizer (such as polyethylene or polypropylene).
If the recording paper touches the following materials or products, the printing surface may change
color, lose color, or exhibit otherwise poor color performance.
Vinyl chloride products, organic compounds, adhesive tape, pencil erase, rubber mats, magic markers,
felt-tip pens, correction fluid, carbon, diazo photosensitive paper, hand cream, hairdressing products,
cosmetic products, or leather products such as a wallet
Recorded data that has colored cannot be removed by rubbing or wetting it. However, do not rub therecorded data part, as rubbing the recording paper strongly will cause it to color due to the frictionalheat.

11.1.3. Printer Block Errors
The state of the following three items is monitored for the
printer block to control recording. If an error occurs during
recording, the error is displayed on the monitor andrecording ends.
Existence of recording paper
Printer cover lock state
Thermal head temperature

NOTE

The thermal head temperature may be high after performing
printer recording for an extended period of time, which cancause an error. Take the installation location, printing density,and recording speed into consideration so that no error
occurs.

1WMPD4004444D

265

Printer error dialog box

11. Maintenance – 11.2. Backing Up Recorded Data

11.2.

Backing Up Recorded Data

This product records measured data on the internal SSD. Make sure toperiodically perform maintenance (data backup or deletion) on the SSD, because
failing to do so may prevent measurement from being performed due toinsufficient space.

The SSD remaining capacity monitor (SSD) is displayed on the side menu of themonitor, and maintenance can be performed based on that display.
For information on backing up recorded data and deleting it from the SSD, see“Recording” of "8.4.1 File Management ".
<SSD remaining capacity monitor>
Displays the remaining capacity of the internal SSD in the indicator.
Maintenance procedure
Step 1.

Copy the recorded data to back up to external media using the export function.

Step 2.

Delete unnecessary recorded data.

11.2.1. Internal SSD Errors
The life of the internal SSD of the recording device greatly varies
according to the number of times data has been overwritten.
The health of the SSD can be checked in [Remaining life] and[Health] inSSDon the [Maintenance] screen.

When the life remaining is close to 0%, please contact our sales
representative to replace the SSD.

11.3.

Display Cleaning

When the surface of the display is dirty, wipe it clean with a soft, dry cloth or gauze dampened withethanol.

266

1WMPD4004444D

11.4.

11. Maintenance – 11.4. Thermal Head Cleaning/Life

Thermal Head Cleaning/Life

11.4.1. Cleaning
When recording has been performed for an extended period of time, material such as dust or printing
waste may adhere to the thermal head thermocouple. This may cause printing to become unclear andreduce the image quality. In this case, follow the procedure below to clean the thermal head.
Step 1.

Open the printer cover by pulling the lever of the printer block up.

Step 2.

The thermal head can be seen in the top inside of the printer block. The thermocouple is at a line
4.4 mm from the thermal head edge. Clean that line area.

Step 3.

Gently wipe it clean with a cotton bud or gauze dampened with ethanol. The recording paper colors
when exposed to ethanol, so it is recommended that you remove it from the stock area before
cleaning.

Step 4.

Load the recording paper after the thermal headdries.
Lever
Thermal head (gold part)
Platen roller

11.4.2. Life
The wear resistance of the thermal head is about 30 km (approximately 1,000 rolls of YPS106 recording
paper) or about 30 million printing pulses. Recording quality may not be able to be maintained after that. In
this case, please contact our sales representative to replace the thermal head (at an extra cost).

11.5.

Platen Roller MaintenanceForeign material or dust adhering to the platen roller may cause damage to the thermal head or may
cause printing to become unclear and reduce the image quality. In this case, gently wipe the platenroller clean using gauze dampened with ethanol.

11.6.

Power Outages

If a power outage occurs or the power cable becomes disconnected during recording, the internal SSD
may become damaged and unable to be accessed. An UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is
recommended to be used.

11.7.

Battery Replacement

The life of the backup battery for the internal clock is about 10 years (at 23°C). If the clock resets every
time the power is turned on, the battery may need to be replaced.
In this case, please contact our sales representative.

1WMPD4004444D

267

11. Maintenance – 11.8. Fan Replacement

11.8.

Fan Replacement

If the internal fan stops due to failure, the internal temperature of this product will rise and may cause
damage to other devices inside this product. The state of the fan can be checked inFanon the[Maintenance] screen.
If an error occurs, please contact our sales representative for a repair.

11.9.

Cautions for Disposing This ProductTake care of the following when disposing of this product.

WARNING
This product includes a coin lithium battery (primary cell) for backup purposes.
When disposing of this product, please contact an A&D sales representative or distributor (see the endof this document for details).
Follow national and regional laws when disposing of this product.

11.10. Troubleshooting and Inspection

If this product does not operate normally after performing the indicated countermeasure or a repair isrequired, output an OS info report file as indicated in (6) in "8.4.2 Maintenance" and contact our sales
representative.
Symptom

Possible cause

Countermeasure

The power cord is not connected

Connect the power cord properly and turn on theto the connector properly.

power switch

The power does notturn on.
Nothing is displayed

The fuse for this product cannot be replaced by
the customer because it is located inside the

The fuse has blown.

main unit. Please contact our sales

on the screen.

representative if the fuse may be blown.
The screen is set to turn off

Press any key to turn on the screen.

automatically.
The touch panel oroperation panel keys
do not respond.

This product is recording.

Perform the operation again after pressing stop

The start LED is on.

on the operation panel to stop measurement.

The SCREEN LOCK or KEY

Switch OFF the SCREEN LOCK or KEY LOCKLOCK is switched ON.
There is no recording paper.

on the side of this product.
Load recording paper.

The printer cover is open.

Close the printer cover.
Use this product in a location at a temperature

Printer recording is

The thermal head is at an

not performed.

abnormally high temperature.
Real-time waveform printing is

between 0 and 40°C. Do not continuously print
solid black areas.
Enable real-time waveform printing in the

disabled in the recording settings. recording settings and start recording.
There is no free space remaining
Recording is noton the SSD.

performed.

The recorded data has exceeded
1,000 items.

268

Delete unnecessary recorded data.
Delete unnecessary recorded data.

1WMPD4004444D

11. Maintenance – 11.10. Troubleshooting and Inspection
Symptom
Memory recording
cannot be replayed.

Possible cause

Countermeasure

Memory data is not saved

Cause a manual trigger using the TRIG key on

because the trigger is not

the operation panel.

enabled.
The recording mode is set to
trigger start or time start.

Recording does notExternal sampling recording isstart when theenabled.

START

key ispressed.

Recording paper has not been
loaded.

recording cannot start unless a pulse signal is
Load recording paper.
Switch OFF the KEY LOCK on the side of thisproduct.

The media has not beenFormat the media.

Data cannot be saved formatted.
to the specified

There is insufficient free space on

media.

the media.
The media is set to read-only.
The format of the media is invalid.

recognized.

Press the start key after inputting the signal, as
input to the remote terminal.

KEY LOCK is switched ON.

The media is not

Disable the START trigger.

The media is damaged.

Delete unnecessary files or use new media.
Disable the read-only setting of the media.
Use the FAT16, FAT32, NTFS, or exFAT filesystem to format the media.
Use other media.

The device cannot be recognized
as removable media.

Use other media.

The communicationinterface cannot be
used to configure
settings and control

The communication parameter

Match the address and communication

settings do not match.

parameters.

operation.
This product does
not shut down with
the

POWER

switch.

1WMPD4004444D

Switch OFF the KEY LOCK on the side of thisKEY LOCK is switched ON.

product.

The main unit software is unable

Press and hold theto detect switch operations.

power turns off.

269

POWER

switch until the12. Specifications – 12.1. General Specifications

12.

Specifications

12.1.

General Specifications

12.1.1. Main Unit Basic Specifications
Item
Input block

Recording device

Recording function

Sampling speed

Specifications
Number of module slots

9 slots

Analog input

Maximum 36 channels

Logic input

Maximum 144 channels

Internal SSD

256 GB

Internal memory

4 GBInternal printer

216 mm thermal printerSSD recording

Directly recording to internal SSD

Memory recording

Recording high-speed phenomena to memory

Printer recording

Directly recording input signals to printerSSD recording

1 MS/sto

10 S/min

Memory recording

20 MS/sto10 S/min1 kS/s (100 mm/s)

to10 S/min (1 mm/min)

Printer recording
Sampling accuracy±10 ppm (max)At all available temperature ranges

Thermal printerPrinter block

Display block

Recording width

216 mmRecording speed

100 mm/s to 1 mm/min

Chart speed accuracy

Within ±2 % (25 °C, 65 % RH)

Recording paper

219 mm x 30 m

Paper roll

(YPS-106, YPS-108)

219 mm x 200 m

Z-fold paper(YPS-112)

12.1" XGA TFT color LCD (1024 x 768 dots)
With electrostatic capacitive touch panel (supporting two point multi-touch)
Operation panel key

Operation panel

Lock function
Interfaces

1, 2, 5 series

POWER Power on/off
START

Start recording

STOP

Stop recording

TRIG

Forced trigger

PRINT

Start printer recording/screen copy

Rotary knob

Change measurement range or waveform position, etc.

Key lock

Operation panel key lock

Screen lockTouch panel key lock

LAN, USB, SD, COM, DVI-D
For details, see "12.2.10. Interface Specifications".

270

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.1. General Specifications

12.1.2. General Specifications
Item

Specifications
Rated power voltage

AC 100 to 240 V

Allowed range of variation AC 90 to 264 V
in power voltage
Rated power frequency

50/60 Hz

Allowed range of variation 47 to 63 Hz
in power frequency
PowerWithstand voltage

Between power and case1500 V AC for 1 minuteInsulation resistance

Between power and case

100 MΩ or more at 500 VDCPower consumption

For printer recording

300 VA (maximum printing
state)

When recording is stopped 80 VA
For standby

5 VA (power cord connected
and power off)

Power fuse
Locations for use

Internal (not replaceable)
Indoor, Pollution Degree 2 *1, elevation 2000 m or lower

Warmup time

60 minutes or longer

OperatingTemperature

0 to 40 °C

environment

Humidity

35 to 85 RH% (without condensation)

Storage environment

Temperature-20 to 60 °C

Humidity

20 to 85 RH% (without condensation)

Sine wave vibration
Vibration resistanceVibration frequency

10 to 55 Hz

Vibration level

20.0 m/s2, 3 axis, 20 cycles each

Random vibration
Vibration frequency

5 to 500 Hz

Acceleration rms value X, Y axis 6.5 m/s2, Z axis 10.2 m/s2, 1 hour each
Backup battery life

Approx. 10 years (ambient temperature 23°C), for clock backup
Safety standards

EN61010-1
EN61010-2-30

Standards

Overvoltage Category II (CAT II) *2
Measurement Category *3
Dependent on specifications of installed
modules

EMC

EN61326-1 Class A

Dimensions

Approx. 394 mm (W) x 334 mm (H) x 199 mm (D) *Excluding protrusions

Mass

9.5 kg or less (main unit only)

Warranty period

1 year*1

The Pollution Degree indicates the level of pollution that can exist in the ambient environment.
Pollution degree 1:

No pollution or only dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has noinfluence.

Pollution degree 2:

Only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporaryconductivity caused by condensation is to be expected.

Pollution degree 3:

Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-conductive pollution occurs whichbecomes conductive due to condensation which is to be expected.

Pollution degree 4:

The pollution generates persistent conductivity caused by conductive dust or byrain or snow.

1WMPD4004444D

271

12. Specifications – 12.1. General Specifications*2

The Overvoltage Category (Installation Category) indicates how much overvoltage (impulse voltage)
from an AC power supply an electrical device can withstand. Overvoltage Category II (CAT II) is suitablefor devices powered by wire from the switchboard of a building.

*3

The Measurement Category categorizes a testing or measurement circuit according to the type of main
power circuit intended to be connected for testing or measurement, and differs according to the modules
installed to this product. Use this product within the Measurement Category that meets the module
specifications.
CAT II:

Applies to testing and measurement circuits directly connected to the point of use(power outlet or similar location) of a low voltage main power supply system.

CAT III:

Applies to testing and measurement circuits connected to the switchboard of the low
voltage main power supply system in a building.

CAT IV:

Applies to testing and measurement circuits connected to the source of the low
voltage main power supply system in a building.

No category (O):Applies to circuits not directly connected to a main power supply.
Switchboard

Devices directly powered by switchboard

Devices not
Devices powered

directly connectedby outlet

to main power

CAT IIOPower outlet
CAT IVO:

CAT III

Other circuits not directly connected to main power

CAT II :Measurement Category II

CAT III :Measurement Category III

CAT IV :Measurement Category IV

272

1WMPD4004444D

12.2.

Functional Specifications

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.1. Measurement Function
Item
Measurement modes

Specifications
R&D mode
MFG mode

For research and development
For manufacturers

The recording modes are indicated below.
(1) Standard(2) Start time(3) Start trigger
Mode(4) Interval (N times) *1(5) Start time + Start trigger(6) Start trigger + Interval (N times) *1(7) Start time + Interval (N times) *1(8) Start time + Start trigger + Interval (N times) *1(9) Window recording

Recording device

Recording to SSD, memory, or printer, and recording to various recording
devices at the same timeY-T waveformY-T waveform with amplitude on vertical axis and time on
horizontal axis

X-Y waveform
Display format

Up to four sets of X-Y waveforms with a user-defined
analog input channel specified for the X axis (horizontal)
and Y axis (vertical).

FFT waveform

FFT analysis waveform with maximum two channels

Digital data

Displays data with numeric values

Sampling speed

Differs according to recording device.

Maximum recording time

100 days

Maximum number of

1,000

recorded items*1

Interval time setting range: <Recording time + 1 minute> to <one day>

1WMPD4004444D

273

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.2. SSD Recording
Item

Specifications

Function

Records input data directly to the internal SSD.

Recording device

Internal SSD

256 GB

Analog36 ch (max)Logic

144 ch (max)NORMAL data

Samples and records data at the set sampling speed.

P-P data

Records the two peak values (max/min) of the data within

Number of channels
Data format

the set sampling speed period sampled at 20 MS/s.
1 MS/s to 10 S/min
Sampling speed

500 kS/s (max) for P-P data
The speed can be set to 1, 2, or 5 series

External sampling*1 Synchronization clock: 250 kHz or less
Information data
Recorded data
Window recording

Records information related to the recorded data, such as the version of thisproduct, module configuration, channel settings, data format, and recording time.
Records input data and event data (trigger information, marks).
Records the last data specified at the recording time when recording stops.
Cannot be used in conjunction with memory recording or printer recording.
Y-T waveform

Display position changes via swiping and pinch in/pinch
out operations to enlarge/reduce.

Playback processing

FFT Analysis

When the recorded data is NORMAL, FFT analysis
function processing is possible.

X-Y Waveform

When the recorded data is NORMAL, X-Y processing ispossible, sampling 1 kS/s or below.

*1

Available when the optional remote control module is installed.

12.2.3. Memory Recording
Item
Function

Specifications
Records to the internal memory with high-speed sampling.
Internal memory

2 GW *1

Record blocks

Divided into 1 to 200 user-defined blocks(number of memory
Recording device

divisions)
PointsThe number of data items per channel that can be recorded toa recording block
2 kW to 2 GW (selected in step 1-2-5)
Channels x points x blocks ≤ 2 GW

Number of channels

Analog36 ch (max), 18 ch at 20 MS/s

Logic

144 ch (max)Data format

NORMAL data

Sampling speed

20 MS/s to 10 S/min The speed can be set to 1, 2, or 5 series

Information data
Recorded data
Playback processing*1

Records information related to the recorded data, such as the version of this product,
module configuration, channel settings, data format, and recording time.
Records input data and trigger information.
Y-T waveform

Display position changes via swiping and pinch in/pinch out
operations to enlarge/reduce.

W (word) refers to a unit of data. 1 W = 2 bytes
274

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.4. Printer Recording
Item

Specifications

Function

Records the input signal to recording paper.

Recording driveInternal printerThermal printer144 chThe total analog and logical channels that can record to the
SSD simultaneously

48 ch

Number of printerThe total number of analog and logical channels that canrecord to recording paper simultaneously, channel for printing

recording channels

to recording paper can be selected with sheet settings,and allchannels can be printed with the playback function
Data format

P-P data

Recording speed
External sampling *1

100 mm/s to 1 mm/min

1, 2, or 5 series,

Synchronization clock: 500 Hz (50 mm/s) or less
0.1 mm/pulse
Waveform amplitude

8 dots/mm

direction
Recording resolution*1

Time axis direction

100 S/div

Printing resolution

20 dots/mm

100 mm/s

40 dots/mm

50 mm/s, external sampling *1

80 dots/mm

20 mm/s or less

Available when the optional remote control module is installed.

12.2.5. Trigger Function[Basic trigger function]
Item

Specifications

TriggerStart trigger

Start trigger for recording operation

function

Memory trigger

Trigger for memory recording

Analog input signal *2
Level trigger

Trigger when an analog signal transects (rises above/falls below)

Window trigger

the set threshold
INTO WIN:

Trigger when the analog signal enters theupper/lower limit range

Trigger type

OUT WIN:

Trigger when the analog signal leaves theupper/lower limit range

Logic input signal *2
Bit pattern trigger

Logic signal bit pattern judgment trigger

Forced trigger

When the trigger key of the operation panel is pressed

External trigger *1

When the external trigger input signal becomes active *1

This function generates a trigger if the trigger conditions continue to be established for the
Trigger filter

specified period of time (to ensure that a trigger is not generated by noise, etc.)
Filter time

0 to 100 s*1

Available when the optional remote control module is installed.

*2

Analog input and logical input triggers (triggers from input channels) are collectively referred to aschannel triggers.

1WMPD4004444D

275

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications[Start trigger]
Item

Trigger source

Specifications
Channel trigger, forced trigger, external trigger

Channel trigger specified number of channels

1 ch[Memory trigger]
Item
Trigger source

Specifications
Channel trigger, forced trigger, external trigger

Channel trigger specified number of channels

18 channel

AND/OR setting available

12.2.6. Waveform Monitor Function
Item
Display screen

Specifications
MEASURE

Displays the state waveform of the input signal

PLAYBACK

Playback the memory, SSD, or printer recorded data

Y-T waveform, X-Y waveform, FFT waveform
Enables waveform display for an arbitrary analog signal and logic signal
Enables 48 channel/sheet signal display
Waveform type

Y-T waveform

Enables a maximum of four X-Y waveform sets to be

X-Y waveform

displayed

FFT waveform

Enables FFT analysis results to be displayed for a
maximum of two channels

Y-T waveform display
20 div x 20 div
Display width

Time axis (T axis)
Amplitude axis (Y axis)
Display area

Sheet
Number of graphs

1 div = 100 samples
1 div = 1/10 RANGE (with display range at 100%)
Specifies the display position, display range, display
maximum, and display minimum

Enables waveform screens to be managed as three waveform screens (display
channel sets)
1 to 18
Numeric value display

Numeric value display of input signal

Scale

Scale display of amplitude axis

Grid

Grid display of waveform area

Trigger/markDisplays detected trigger/markCursor

Displays two cursors
Displays the signal information (position and value) ofDisplay functions

the cursors, information on the differences between
cursors, maximums, minimums, and averages

TRIG.SYNC

Pen position

Displays the signal amplitude position

Zero position

Displays the signal zero position

Time display

Displays the time on the bottom of the display area

Pinch in/out

Enlarges/reduces the display waveform

Updates the waveform of memory recording in synchronization with a trigger
The trigger point is in the center of the waveform monitor

276

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.7. X-Y Waveform
Item
Data selection
X-Y axis

Specifications
SSD recorded data

Data format: Normal data

X axis channel:

User-defined analog channel

Y axis channel:

User-defined analog channel
Four waveforms can be set

Sampling speed

1 kS/s (max)Select single screen or

Display format

quad screen
SingleDisplays four sets of X-Y waveforms on a single screen

Quad

Displays a separate X-Y waveform on each of four screens

Pen up

Pauses measurement

Pen down

Resumes measurement

Clear
Refresh graph

Display functions

1WMPD4004444D

The pen up operation can be performed for one waveform at atime or all waveforms at once
The pen down operation can be performed for one waveform at
a time or all waveforms at once

Clears the displayed

The clear operation can be performed for one waveform at a

waveformtime or all waveforms at once

Redraws the X-Y waveform between cursors A and B on the Y-T waveform.
Dot/line

Renders the X-Y waveform with dots or lines

Scale

Input signal scale display of X axis and Y axis

Grid

Grid display of waveform area

Pen position

Displays the input signal position

Zero position

Displays the signal zero position

Pinch in/out

Enlarges/reduces the waveform277

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.8. FFT Analysis
Item

Specifications

Data selection

SSD recorded data

Sampling points

Set the analysis sampling points: Select 1000, 2000, 5000, or 10000 points

Frequency range
Analysis range selection
Window function

Data format: Normal data

500 kHz (max), the frequency range is calculated as 0.5 x the sampling
speed
Selects the analysis range using two cursors.
Supports amplitude gain using a window function. Hanning, hamming,
rectangularTime scale waveform, linear spectrum, RMS spectrum, power spectrum,

Analysis function

power spectrum density, 1/1 octave analysis, 1/3 octave analysis,
cross power spectrum, transfer function, coherence function

Analysis count2

Display format

Single/Dual

X axis scale

Time, linear frequency, log frequency, 1/1 octave, 1/3 octave

Y axis scale
Manual scale

Amplitude, linear real part, linear imaginary part, linear amplitude, log
amplitude, phase
Manually sets the X axis and Y axis display area
Time simple averaging, frequency simple averaging, frequency exponential

Averagingweight averaging,frequency axis peak hold, None

Average number of additions 1 to 10
Peak value display
CursorPinch in/out

Identifies a maximum of 10 local maximums or global maximums from theanalysis results.
Displays two cursors for each analysis and displays the X value and Y valueof each cursor.
Enlarges/reduces the FFT analysis results with pinch in/pinch out operations.

278

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.9. Setup/Record management
Item

Specifications

Recording Setup
Mode

Nine type recording mode display and selection.

Data name

Data name, automatic numbering.

Recording time

Recording time setting for one time, maximum time settable fromremaining SSD capacity

Start time
RecordingSet the recording start time

Interval time

Set the Interval time and number of recordings

Printer

Enable/disable printer recording when performing measurement,
sheet selection, enable/disable real-time waveform printing during
measurement.

SSD

Enable/disable SSD recording when performing measurement.

MemoryEnable/disable memory recording when performing measurement,
record blocks, points, endless mode, pre-trigger settings.

Thumbnails

Sets the channels to displayed in the thumbnails on the monitor
and the compression ratio for the display from 1/10 to 1/100.

Common

Displays and configures a list of common settings set in modules andthe input module installed in this product.
Display items:

Channel number, module type.

Display items and settings:

CH name, measurement, color, display
position, display range, display
maximum, and display minimum.

Conversion

List of physical conversion for the installed analog input module.
Display items and settings: Conversion method (2-pt /gain),

Channel List

conversion value (conversion 1,
conversion 2), unit.
Sheet

Channel registration to Sheet and Graph, Wave display and Wave
inversion list view and settings.
Display items and settings:

Sheet, Graph, Wave display, Wave
inversion

List by input module Displays and configures a list of the settings unique to each
type
Sheet

module. Each item can be configured individually or together.

Graph

Settings regarding the division of Y-T waveforms and graph previews.

SHEET1 to SHEET3

List of registered channels and channel registration to sheets 1 to 3

Printing

Print settings for the header, annotation, footer, grid, date, dataname, time axis, and recording speed printed at the same time as
the printer printing

Printer

Text settings

Inputs and imports/exports text for printing headers, annotations,and footers
60 characters for the text (in the paper feed direction) x 86 lines(waveform amplitude direction)

1WMPD4004444D

279

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications
Item

Specifications

Recording setup Other setup

Chart speed

Sets a user-defined chart speed. Six speed settings can be set.

X axis notation

Sets the label notation of the X axis scale on the waveform
screen. Three types can be set.

Output recording info Sets whether to output an XML format file of the recording info to
XML file

the recorded data.

PC nameSets the name of the main unit using 15 characters or less. This
name is used for identification purposes on the network and inrecorded data.

Environment

Display

Language

EnglishTime zone

Sets the time zone (regional standard time).

Date and time

Sets the current date and time.

Display brightness

Sets the brightness of the LCD display.

Buzzer soundSwitches the overrange buzzer on or off

Grid

Switches the grid lines of the waveform screen on or off.

Trigger line

Switches the trigger lines of the waveform screen on or off.

Mark line

Switches the mark lines of the waveform screen on or off.

Search result line

Switches the search result line of the waveform screen on or off.

Follow cursor

Sets whether to follow the cursor when the cursor moves outside

TRIG key

Sets the operation performed when the TRIG key on the operation

the waveform monitor.

Main unit setup Other setup

panel is pressed.
RecordingLists or deletes the data recorded to this product, restores therecording setup, and imports/exports data.

File management

Image

Lists, deletes, and exports image data recorded to this product.

Setup

Lists or deletes the configuration recorded to this product, restores
settings, and imports/exports data.

12.2.10. Interface Specifications
Item
LAN

USB

SD

COM

DVI-D

Specifications
Supported standard

IEEE802.3 (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T)

connectors

RJ-45

Number of ports

1

Supported standard

USB3.0connectors

Type-A

Number of ports2

Supported standard

SD standard (SD/SDHC/SDXC supported)

connectors

Slot for SD memory cards

Number of ports

1

Supported standard

EIA-574

connectors

D-Sub9Number of ports

1

Supported standard

DVI-D (dual link not supported)

connectors

DVI-D

Number of ports

1280

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.11. Communication Setup
12.2.11.1. COM
Item
RS-232C

Specifications
Baud rate

300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400,
57600, 115200, 230400, 460800 bps

Data bits

8 bit

Stop bits

1, 2 bit

ParityNone, Odd, Even, Mark, Space

Flow control

None, XON/XOFF, Hardware (CTS/RTS)

Function

Communication commands

12.2.11.2. LAN
Item
NetworkSpecifications
Connection method

IPv4

Function

Communication commands, Web server, FTP server, datatransfer

HTTP

Enables RA3100 screen and key operations via a Web
browser.

Web server

Authentication

Restricts login via a user name and password

Access restrictions

Restricts RA3100 operations from a Web Browser

Screen refresh speed

Refresh speed of the RA3100 screen in the Web browser

Save screen

Saves the screen of the RA3100 to the PC in the PNG
formatFTP server

Time synchronization

Synchronizes the date and time of the RA3100 with a PC

File transfer

File transfer of recording/image/configuration data

Authentication

Restricts login via a user name and password

Access restrictions

Read only

Maximum number of8connections

Data transfer

Data transfer

Realtime transfer of measurement data to a PC *1

Transfer period

100 msTransfer conditions

Always, linked with recording, or manual operation

Protocols

TCP and UDP

Transfer dataOne-shot: The one latest item of sample data
Continuous: Measurement data synchronized with thesampling speed

Decimation

1/1 to 1/1000 *2

Maximum number of1connections*1 MFG mode only
*2 Continuous transfer data only

1WMPD4004444D

281

12. Specifications – 12.2. Functional Specifications

12.2.11.3. List of Network Port Numbers Used
Port Number

Protocols

function

Remarks

20

TCP

FTP server

For file transfer

21

TCP

FTP server

For control

80

TCP

Web server (HTTP server)

3000

TCP

Communication commands

3100

TCP or UDP

Data transfer

12.2.12. Other Setup (Maintenance/Operation History/Version Management)
ItemSpecifications

SSD check

SSD life remaining, health check, and loading test

Fan check

Displays the state of the internal cooling fan

LCD check

LCD screen check and pixel defect check

Brightness check

LCD back light brightness control check
Prints a test patter from the printerPrinter

Printer state check: System, motor, head temperature, printer cover, recording
paper

BuzzerControls the buzzer on/off to check the buzzer

Panel keys

Press the panel keys to check whether they operate normally

Panel key LED

Turns the panel LEDs on/off to check whether they operate normally

Initialize

Returns the settings of this product to the factory defaults.

Operation history display

Displays the history of the past 100 operations.

Version management

Displays the serial number and version of this product and the version
information of each module

282

1WMPD4004444D

12.3.

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

Module Specifications

12.3.1. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101)
Item

Specifications

Number of input channels 2 ch
Input connectors
Input format
Coupling

Insulated BNC
Unbalanced input(insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)
AC/DC/GND

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1%

Measurement range

100, 200, 500 mV(RANGE)1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 V (the measurement range is ±RANGE)

Measurement probability±0.3 % of RANGE (23 °C ±5 °C, DC coupling, L.P.F. 3 Hz, after zero adjust)Temperature coefficient±(400 ppm of RANGE)/°C
DC coupling

Frequency characteristics

DC to 100 kHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. and A.A.F.
disabled)

AC coupling

0.3 Hz to 100 kHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. and A.A.F.
disabled)

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

3 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 3 kHz, OFF (-1.6 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Secondary bessel

Cutoff frequency

20, 40, 80, 200, 400, 800, 2k, 4k, 8k, 20k, 40 kHz, OFF,with 0.4 times the sampling speed of SSD recording set forthe cutoff frequency. When 200 kS/s or higher, A.A.F. is

Anti-aliasing filter (A.A.F.)

disabled.
Attenuation
Input conversion noise
A/D conversion
Common mode rejection
ratio
Maximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage-66 dB or less at 1.5 times the cutoff frequency

1 mVp-p max (0.1 V range, input short circuit)
A/D resolution

16 bits

Sampling rate

1 MS/s80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz)±500 V peakto ground

300 V (DC + AC peak)Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Usage environment
Storage environment

Temperature:

CAT II

0 to +40 °C, humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without

condensation)
Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without
condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

1WMPD4004444D

283

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.2. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102)
Item

Specifications

Number of input channels 4 ch
Input connectors
Input format

Insulated BNC
Unbalanced input(insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)

Coupling

DC/GND

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1 %Measurement range(RANGE)1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 V (the measurement range is ±RANGE)

Measurement probability±0.2 % of RANGE (23 °C ±5 °C, DC coupling, L.P.F. 3 Hz, after zero adjust)Temperature coefficient±(400 ppm of RANGE)/°C

Frequency characteristics DC coupling

DC to 100 kHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. disabled)

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

3 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 3 kHz, OFF (-1.6 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Secondary bessel shape

Input conversion noise

5 mVp-p max (1 V range, input short circuit)

A/D conversion
Common mode rejection
ratio
Maximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage to

A/D resolution

16 bits

Sampling rate

1 MS/s80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz)±200 V peakground300 V (DC + AC peak)Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between input terminals and chassis, between channels)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

CAT II

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

284

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.3. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103)
Item

Specifications

Number of input channels 2 ch
Input connectors
Input format

Insulated BNC
Unbalanced input(insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)

Coupling

AC/DC/GND

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1%

Measurement range

100, 200, 500 mV(RANGE)1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 V (the measurement range is ±RANGE)

Measurement probability±0.5 % of RANGE (23 °C ±5 °C, DC coupling, L.P.F. 5 Hz, after zero adjust)Temperature coefficient±(500 ppm of RANGE)/°C

Frequency characteristics
Low-pass filter(L.P.F.)
Input conversion noise
A/D conversion

DC coupling

DC to 5 MHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. disabled)

AC coupling

6 Hz to 5 MHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. disabled)

Cutoff frequency

5 Hz, 50 kHz, 500 kHz, OFF (-3 dB ±1 dB)

2 mVp-p max (0.1 V range, input short circuit)
A/D resolution

14 bits

Sampling rate

20 MS/sCommon mode rejection

80 dB or higher (50/60

ratio

Hz)

Maximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage to±500 V peakground300 V (DC + AC peak)Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

CAT II

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

1WMPD4004444D

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)285

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.4. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104)
Item

Specifications

Number of input channels 2 ch
Input connectors

NDIS4109: EPRC07-R9FNDISInput format

Balanced differential input (insulation between channels and between channels
and chassis)

Compatible bridge
resistance120 Ω to 350 Ω

Gauge ratio

Fixed to 2.00

Bridge power

0.5, 2 Vrms sine wave 5 kHz

Balance adjustment range Resistance±2 % (10000 (μm/m=με)) or less

Capacity
Balance adjustment
precision

2000 pF or less

±0.3% of RANGE or lessTemperature coefficient± (400 ppm of RANGE)/°C

Measurement range

Bridge power at 2 Vrms

(RANGE)

Bridge power at 0.5 Vrms 2000, 4000, 8000, 20000, 40000, 80000 (μm/m=με)

Nonlinearity±0.1% of RANGE or less

500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000, 20000 (μm/m=με)

Frequency characteristics DC to 2 kHz ±10% or less
Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

OFF, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz (-3 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Secondary Butterworth

Internal calibrator±1 to 9999 (μm/m=με)

Input conversion noise

5 (μm/m=με) p-p max

Precision ±0.5 % of RANGE or less (23°C ±5 °C)(500 (μm/m=με) range, BV = 2 Vrms, 120 Ω bridge)
A/D conversion

A/D resolution

16 bitSampling rate

100 kS/s

Auto balance function

Cancel imbalance in the strain gauge bridge.

Simple bridge check

Enables bridge edge short circuits and some bridge edge and cable open circuits
to be detected.

Maximum rated voltage toground100 V (DC + AC peak)Withstand voltage

AC 300 V, one minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C,

humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) × 223 mm (D) × 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN 61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN 61326-1, Class A

286

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.5. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105)
Item

Specifications

Number of input channels 16 ch
I/O connectors
Input format

8 ch x 2 ports
Single input, common input (non-insulated), insulation between input signals andchassisInput range

0 to 24 V
1.4 V (High level 1.8V or more, Low level 1.0 V or less)

Voltage detection

Threshold

2.5 V (High level 3.0V or more, Low level 2.0 V or less)
4 V (High level 4.6V or more, Low level 3.4 V or less)

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1 %2 kΩ (Open 2.0 kΩ or more, Short 250 Ω or less)Contact detection

Threshold9 kΩ (Open 9.0 kΩ or more, Short 3.0 kΩ or less)
Load current

Response pulse

2 μs or more

Sampling rate

1 MS/sMaximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage toground5 kΩ (Open 5.0 kΩ or more, Short 1.5 kΩ or less)
0.5 mA (typ) @ load resistance 0 to 18 kΩ

DC 30 V
42 V (DC+ACpeak)Withstand voltage

AC 300 V, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Power output for options+5 V (±5 %)Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassStandards

1WMPD4004444D

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Approx. 250 g
SafetyEN61010-1

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

287

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.6. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106)
Item
Specifications
Number of input channels 2 ch
Removable socket (front panel)
Input connectors
Temperature sensor connector coupling wire: 0.2 SQ to 1.5 SQ (AWG24 to
AWG16)
Unbalanced input (insulation between channels and between channels andInput format
chassis)Input impedance
5 MΩ or higher
Thermocouple (TC) type
K, E, J, T, N, R, S, B, C (JIS C1602:2015)
Adaptive sensor
Platinum resistance
Pt100, Pt1000 (JIS C1604:2013)
temperature detector (RTD)
16 bits
A/D resolution
A/D conversion
High speed (1.5 ms), Medium speed (100 ms),
Data update rate
Low speed (1 s)
Thermocouple (TC)
Reference junction
Internal/external switching mode
compensation method
Internal contact±1 °C (23 °C ±5 °C) ±1.5 °C (full temperature range)
compensation
temperature
Switchable on/off
LFD
Measureme Measurement
TypeMeasurement probability
nt range
range (°C)
K
200 °C-200 to 200-200 to 0 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +2 °C)
600 °C-200 to 600
0 to 1370 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +1 °C)
1370 °C-200 to 1370
E
200 °C-200 to 200-200 to 0 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +2 °C)
600 °C-200 to 600
0 to 1000 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +1 °C)
1000 °C-200 to 1000J
200 °C-200 to 200-200 to 0 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +2 °C)
400 °C-200 to 400
0 to 1100 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +1 °C)
1100 °C-200 to 1100
T
100 °C-100 to 100-200 to 0 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +2 °C)
200 °C-200 to 200
0 to 400 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +1 °C)
Measurement range
400 °C-200 to 400(RANGE)N
200 °C-200 to 200-200 to 0 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +2 °C)
Measurement
600 °C-200 to 600
0 to 1300 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +1 °C)
probability
1300 °C-200 to 1300
R
200 °C
0 to 200
0 to 400 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3.5 °C)
1000 °C
0 to 1000
400 to 1760 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3 °C)
1760 °C
0 to 1760
S
200 °C
0 to 200
0 to 400 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3.5 °C)
1000 °C
0 to 1000
400 to 1700 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3 °C)
1700 °C
0 to 1700
B
600 °C
400 to 600
400 to 1800 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3 °C)
1000 °C
400 to 1000
1800 °C
400 to 1800
C
600 °C
0 to 600
0 to 400 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3.5 °C)
1200 °C
0 to 1200
400 to 2300 °C, ±(0.1 % of RANGE +3 °C)
2300 °C
0 to 2300(Measurement
probability
x 0.1)/°C
Temperature coefficient

288

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item

Specifications

Platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD)
Measurement method
Measurement current

Three wire method
Switch between 0.5 mA and 1 mA (when Pt100)
Fixed to 0.1 mA (when Pt1000)
Type

Measurement range(RANGE)
Measurement
probability

Measurement Measurement

Measurement probability

range

range (°C)

200 °C-200 to200

400 °C-200 to400

850 °C-200 to850-200 to 850 °C,

200 °C-200 to200±(0.1 % of RANGE +0.5 °C)

400 °C-200 to400

850 °C-200 to

850

Pt100

Pt1000Temperature coefficient (Measurement probability x 0.1)/°C
Common mode rejection

50/60 Hz

ratio

resistance (100 Ω or less)Maximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage to

Signal source

100 dB (refresh data: low speed, medium speed)
80 dB (refresh data: high speed)

30 Vpeakground300 V (DC + AC peak)Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassStandards

1WMPD4004444D

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Approx. 300 g
SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A289

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.7. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107)
Item
Number of input
channelsSpecifications
2 ch

Input connector

Safety banana terminal

Input format

Balanced differential input (insulation between channels and between channels andchassis)Coupling

AC/DC/GND

Meas. mode

DC mode (voltage measurement)/RMS mode (effective value measurement)

Input impedance

4 MΩ ±1 %Response time (RMS High speed

100 ms ±10 % or lessmode)

Medium speed

250 ms ±10 % or less

Low speed1000 ms ±10 % or less*1

All of the above are rise 0 % → 90 % of RANGE and fall 100 % → 10 % of
RANGE

Measurement range DC mode:

2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 V(RANGE)(the measurement range is ±RANGE)RMS mode:2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 Vrms
(the measurement range is RANGE*2)

Crest factor:

2 (with 2 to 500 Vrms range), 1.4 (with 1000 Vrms range)*2 The maximum measurement range is 700 Vrms at 1000 Vrms
Measurement

DC mode:probability

RMS mode:±0.3 % of RANGE (DC coupling, L.P.F. 3 Hz)

DC coupling
AC coupling±0.3 % of RANGE±0.5 % of RANGE (10 Hz to 1 kHz, sine wave input,
with low speed response)±0.5 % of RANGE (40 Hz to 1 kHz, sine wave input,
with medium speed response)±0.5 % of RANGE (100 Hz to 1 kHz, sine wave input,
with high speed response)±1.5 % of RANGE (1 kHz to 10 kHz, sine wave input)*3
Temperature
coefficient

All of the above are at 23 °C ±5 °C, after zero adjust is executed± (300 ppm of RANGE)/°C

Frequency

DC coupling

DC to 100 kHz (-3 dB to +1 dB) (DC mode, with L.P.F. disabled)

characteristics

AC coupling

1 Hz to 100 kHz (-3 dB to +1 dB) (DC mode, with L.P.F. disabled)

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

3 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 3 kHz, 30 kHz, OFF (-1.6 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Secondary vessel

Input conversion
noise
A/D conversion
Common mode
rejection ratio
Maximum allowed
input voltage

20 mVp-p max (2 V range, input short circuit)
A/D resolution

16 bitSampling rate

1 MS/s80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz)±1000 V peak

290

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item
Maximum rated
voltage to ground

Specifications
1000 V (DC + AC peak)

CAT II

600 V (DC + AC peak)

CAT III

Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Storage environment Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)
Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) × 223 mm (D) × 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, class A

1WMPD4004444D

291

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.8. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108)
Item
Number of input
channelsSpecifications
2 ch

Number ofmeasurement

4 chchannels

CH1: Meas. mode, CH3: CH1 input volt
CH2: Meas. mode, CH4: CH2 input volt

Input connectors

Insulated BNC

Input format

Unbalanced input (insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)

Coupling

AC/DC/GND

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1 %Measurement mode

Period, Frequency, Rotation speed, Pulse width, Duty cycle, Power freq., Freq.
deviation, Pulse count, or Pulse integ.

Input voltage

Measurement
range (RANGE)
Measurement
probability

1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, or 500 V±3 % of RANGE (23 ±5 °C, DC coupling, L.P.F. 300 Hz)

Measurable range ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±10, ±200, or ±500 V
Period mode

Measurement

1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 or

500 msrange (RANGE) 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100 s
Measurement±0.5 % rdg (1 ms RANGE)

probability±0.3 % rdg (2 ms RANG)±0.1 % rdg (5 ms RANGE)±0.05 % rdg (10 ms to 100 s RANGE)

Measurable range 5 μs to 100 s
Frequency mode

Measurement

2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, or 500 Hz

range (RANGE) 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, or 500 kHz
Measurement±0.5 % rdg (200 kHz RANGE)

probability±0.3 % rdg (100 kHz RANGE)±0.1 % rdg (50 kHz RANGE)±0.05 % rdg (2 Hz to 20 kHz RANGE)

Measurable range 0 to 200 kHz
Rotation speed mode Measurement

10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, 10000, 20000 rpm,

range (RANGE) 50000 rpm, 100, 200, 500, 1000 krpm
Measurement
probability±0.05 % rdg

Measurable range 0 to 1000 krpm
Pulse width mode

Measurement

1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, or 500 ms

range (RANGE) 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or 100 s
Measurement±0.25 % rdg (1 ms RANGE)

probability±0.15 % rdg (2 ms RANGE)±0.05 % rdg (5 ms to 100 s RANGE)

Measurable range 2.5 μs to 100 s (minimum pulse width 2.5 μs)

292

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item
Duty cycle mode

Specifications
Measurement
range (RANGE)
Measurement
probability

100 % (20 Hz), 100 % (200 Hz), 100 % (2 kHz), 100 % (20 kHz)
±0.25 % (1 kHz) to ±5 % (20 kHz) of 100 % (20 kHz) RANGE*±5% × input frequency/20 kHz±0.05 % (100 Hz) to ±1 % (2 kHz) of 100 % (2 kHz) RANGE*±1% × input frequency/2 kHz±0.05 % (10 Hz) to ±1 % (200 Hz) of 100 % (200 Hz) RANGE*±1% × input frequency/200 Hz±0.05 % (1 Hz) to ±1 % (20 Hz) of 100 % (20 Hz) RANGE*
Measurable duty
cycle range
Measurable±1% × input frequency/20 Hz

0 to 100 %1 kHz to 20 kHz：

frequency range

100% (20 kHz) RANGE (minimum pulse width 2.5 μs)
100 Hzto

2 kHz：

100% (2 kHz) RANGE (minimum pulse width 5 μs)
10 Hz

to 200 Hz：

100% (200 Hz) RANGE (minimum pulse width 50 μs)
1 Hz

to 20 Hz：

100% (20 Hz) RANGE (minimum pulse width 500 μs)
Power freq. mode

Measurement

50 Hz (30 to 70 Hz)

range (RANGE) 60 Hz (40 to 80 Hz)
400 Hz (360 to 440 Hz)
Measurement±0.002 % rdg (50 Hz RANGE)

probability±0.003 % rdg (60 Hz RANGE)±0.005 % rdg (400 Hz RANGE)

Freq. deviation mode Measurement
range (RANGE)
Measurement
probability±50 % (center frequency range 6.6 Hz to 13.2 kHz)
±0.05 % rdg

Measurable range 3.3 Hz to 19800 Hz
Pulse count mode

Measurement

40000

range (RANGE) *Measurement
probability

Gate time 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, or 60 s

±0.003 % rdg

Measurable range 16.6666 mHz to 200 kHz (minimum pulse width 2.5 μs)
Pulse integ. mode

Measurement50, 100, 200, or 500 k

range (RANGE) 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, or 2000 M
Measurement
probability±0.002 % rdg

Measurable range 5 mHz to 200 kHz (minimum pulse width 2.5 μs)

1WMPD4004444D

293

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item
ThresholdSpecifications
Voltage range

1 V RANGE：-0.4 to+0.4 V variable (0.01 V increments)

2 V RANGE:-0.8 to+0.8 V variable (0.02 V increments)

5 V RANGE:-2to+2 V variable (0.05 V increments)

10 V RANGE:-4to+4 V variable (0.1 V increments)+8 V variable (0.2 V increments)

20 V RANGE:-8to

50 V RANGE:-20

to +20 V variable (0.5 V increments)

100 V RANGE:-40

to +40 V variable (1 V increments)

200 V RANGE:-80

to +80 V variable (2 V increments)

500 V RANGE:-200

to +200 V variable (5 V increments)

Hysteresis

1 to 10% of RANGE (1% increments)

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

300 Hz, 3 kHz, 30 kHz, OFF (-1.6 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

characteristics

Secondary vessel

A/D conversion

A/D resolution

12 bitSampling rate

1 MS/sResponse speed
Deceleration stop
process function

OFF, 1 to 1000 ms (1 ms increments)
If the pulse input is interrupted. calculates the deceleration state in real-time, andgradually sets the measured value to 0 or overrange.
Supports measurement in the Period mode, Frequency mode, Rotation speed mode,
Pulse width mode, Duty cycle mode, Power freq. mode, and Freq. deviation mode.

Pulses per revolution Pulses / Rev.: 1 to 100
Specify the pulse count per revolution. Available in the Rotation speed mode.
Pulse polarity

Select the polarity of the pulse (positive or negative).
Available in the Pulse width mode, Duty cycle mode, Freq. deviation mode, Pulse
count mode, and Pulse integ. mode.

Integrated auto reset Automatically resets the measured data of the Pulse integ. mode.
(Auto reset)

The count is reset when recording starts (Start) and when the range upper limit isreached (Over). OFF, Start, Over, Start & Over can be selected.

Integrated manual
reset (Reset)
Pulse average

Manually resets the measured data of the Pulse integ. mode.
Number for pulse average: 2 to 4096

processing

Available in the Period mode, Frequency mode, Rotation speed mode, Pulse width

functionmode, Duty cycle mode, Power freq. mode, and Freq. deviation mode.

Smoothing function

OFF, 2 to 100
Available in the Period mode, Frequency mode, Rotation speed mode, Pulse widthmode, Duty cycle mode, Power freq. mode, and Freq. deviation mode.

Maximum allowed
input voltage
Maximum rated
voltage to ground±500 Vpeak
300 V (DC + AC peak)

CATⅡ

Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between channels and between channels and chassis)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Storage environment Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)
Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) × 223 mm (D) × 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, class A
294

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.9. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109)
Item
Number of input
channelsSpecifications
2 ch

Input connectors

BNC (metallic)

Input format

Unbalanced input (insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)

Measurement modeOFF, Acceleration, Velocity, Displacement

Sensor supply power 4.2 mA ±5 %, 22.5 V ±5 %Measurement range *(RANGE)All the values below are when using a sensor incorporating a preamp. Whenusing a charge output type acceleration sensor, the sensor sensitivity is the
charge converter gain multiplied by the sensor sensitivity of the charge output
type acceleration sensor.
The measurement range differs according to the sensor sensitivity.

Acceleration

1, 2, 3.16, 5, 10, 20, 31.6, 50, 100, 200, 316, 500 m/s2
1, 2, 3.16, 5,10, 20, 31.6, 50 km/s2

Velocity

Sensor sensitivity

Measurement range

0.100 to 0.250 mV/(m/s2)

500 m/s2 to 50 km/s2

0.251 to 0.500 mV/(m/s2)

200 m/s2 to 20 km/s2

0.501 to 1.000 mV/(m/s2)

100 m/s2 to 10 km/s2

1.001 to 2.500 mV/(m/s2)

50 m/s2 to 5 km/s2

2.501 to 5.000 mV/(m/s2)

20 m/s2 to 2 km/s2

5.001 to 10.000 mV/(m/s2)

10 m/s2 to 1 km/s2

10.001 to 25.000 mV/(m/s2)

5 m/s2 to 500 m/s2

25.001 to 50.000 mV/(m/s2)

2 m/s2 to 200 m/s2

50.001 to 100.000 mV/(m/s2)

1 m/s2 to 100 m/s2

10, 20, 31.6, 50, 100, 200, 316, or 500 mm/s
1, 2, 3.16, 5, 10, 20, 31.6, 50, 100, 200, 316, or 500 m/s
Sensor sensitivity

1WMPD4004444D

Measurement range

0.100 to 0.250 mV/(m/s2)

5 m/s to 500 m/s

0.251 to 0.500 mV/(m/s2)

2 m/s to 200 m/s

0.501 to 1.000 mV/(m/s2)

1 m/s to 100 m/s

1.001 to 2.500 mV/(m/s2)

500 mm/s to 50 m/s

2.501 to 5.000 mV/(m/s2)

200 mm/s to 20 m/s

5.001 to 10.000 mV/(m/s2)

100 mm/s to 10 m/s

10.001 to 25.000 mV/(m/s2)

50 mm/s to 5 m/s

25.001 to 50.000 mV/(m/s2)

20 mm/s to 2 m/s

50.001 to 100.000 mV/(m/s2)

10 mm/s to 1 m/s

295

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item

Specifications

Measurement range Displacement 100, 200, 316, or 500 μm(RANGE)1, 2, 3.16, 5, 10, 20, 31.6, 50, 100, 200, 316, or 500 mm
1, 2, 3.16, or 5 m

Measurement
probability

Sensor sensitivity

Measurement range

0.100 to 0.250 mV/(m/s2)

50 mm to 5 m

0.251 to 0.500 mV/(m/s2)

20 mm to 2 m

0.501 to 1.000 mV/(m/s2)

10 mm to 1 m

1.001 to 2.500 mV/(m/s2)

5 mm to 500 mm

2.501 to 5.000 mV/(m/s2)

2 mm to 200 mm

5.001 to 10.000 mV/(m/s2)

1 mm to 100 mm

10.001 to 25.000 mV/(m/s2)

500 μm to 50 mm

25.001 to 50.000 mV/(m/s2)

200 μm to 20 mm

50.001 to 100.000 mV/(m/s2)

100 μm to 10 mm

Acceleration±1% rdg

Velocity±2% rdg

Displacement ±3% rdg*

All of the above values are at 23 °C ±5 °C, with an 80 Hz sine wave, and L.P.F.
A.A.F. disabled

Temperature± (300 ppm of RANGE)/°C

coefficientFrequency

Acceleration

5 Hz to 20 kHz (-0.5 dB to +0.5 dB)

characteristics

1.5 Hz to 50 kHz (-1 dB to +1 dB)
1 Hz to 70 kHz (-3 dB to +1 dB)
Velocity

15.9 Hz (0 dB ±1 dB) to 1.59 kHz (-40 dB ±1 dB)
Characteristics: -6 dB/oct

Displacement 15.9 Hz (0 dB ±1 dB) to 159 Hz (-40 dB ±1 dB)
Characteristics: -12 dB/oct*

All of the above are with L.P.F. disabled

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

OFF, 20 Hz, 200 Hz, 2 kHz, 20 kHz（-3 dB ±1 dB）(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Tertiary Butterworth

Anti-aliasing filter

Cutoff frequency

OFF, 20, 40, 80, 200, 400, 800, 2k, 4k, 8k, 20k, 40 kHz with 0.4(A.A.F.)times the sampling speed of SSD recording set for the cutoff
frequency. When 200 kS/s or higher, A.A.F. is disabled.
Attenuation-66 dB or less, at 1.5 times the cutoff frequency

Input conversion

5 m/s2 p-p max (acceleration 500 m/s2, sensor sensitivity 0.1 mV/(m/s2), input shortnoise

circuit)A/D conversion

A/D resolution

16 bitSampling rate

1 MS/s296

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Item

Specifications

RMS calculation

Responsefunction

speedHigh speed: 300 ms ±10 % or lessMedium speed: 600 ms ±10 % or less
Low speed: 2.4 s ±10 % or less*

All of the above are rise 0 % → 90 % of RANGE and fall 100 %→ 10 % of RANGE, with the acceleration mode

Measurement ±1% rdg (10 Hz to 1 kHz, at low speed)probability±1% rdg (30 Hz to 1 kHz, at medium speed)±1% rdg (50 Hz to 1 kHz, at high speed)±1.5% rdg (1 kHz to 5 kHz)

Envelope calculation
function
TEDS
Common mode
rejection ratio
Maximum rated
voltage to ground
Usage environment

Band pass filter (1 kHz to 20 kHz) → absolute value modulation → low-pass filter (1 kHz)IEEE 1451.4 Class 1 compliant (template ID: 25, sensor sensitivity automatically set)
80 dB or higher (50 Hz/60 Hz)
42 V (DC + AC peak)
Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Storage environment Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)
Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) × 223 mm (D) × 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

1WMPD4004444D

297

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.10. Remote Control Module (RA30-112)
Item

Specifications

input connectors

Half pitch connector 20 pin

Output connectors

Half pitch connector 14 pin

External input

Function: Controllable via external signal

Control signals

START/STOP, MARK, FEED, PRINT, TRIG

Input level

High level: 2.1 V to 5.0 V, Low level: 0 V to 0.5 V (active low)

Response speed

Switch between high speed/medium speed/low speed* External sampling input (EXT SMPL IN) is not supported
For high speed response:High level period 1 μs or more, low level period 1 μs or more

Effective pulse width

For medium speed response:High level period 1 ms or more, low level period 1 ms or more
For low speed response:High level period 10 ms or more, low level period 10 ms or more

Maximum allowed
input voltage
Feed

30 V
Recording paper idle feeding speed of 50 mm/sec
Function: Externally output external input control signal

External output

Control signals

START/STOP and TRIG are the OR output with the external input signal
and output signal from the RA3100 main unit
START/STOP, MARK, FEED, PRINT, TRIG, EXT.1/EXT.2 (outputs the state of thisproduct externally)

Output level

High level: 3.8 V to 5.0 V, Low level: 0 V to 0.5 V (active low)

Output current

Maximum 5 mA (per pin)

Output pulse width(RA3100 main unit
output signal)
External sampling input
Input level

START/STOP, FEED, PRINT: Active output during operation period
TRIG, MARK, for high speed response:

1 μs

For medium speed response:

1 ms

For low speed response: 10 ms
Synchronization possible via external sampling signal(simultaneous SSD and printer recording not possible)
High level: 2.1 V to 5.0 V, Low level: 0 V to 0.5 V

Effective pulse width 2 μs or more
SSD recording
Maximum input
frequency
External sampling
output: 250 kHzPrinter recording : 500 Hz
Output external sampling input signal

High level: 3.8 V to 5.0 V, Low level: 0 V to 0.5 V
Output level: Synchronization signal generator for using AC strain
Synchronization signal Function
for AC strain

Carrier wave

input/output

Synchronization : Synchronization possible with other RA3000 product including RA30-112

Output terminal for

Function:: 0 V to 5 V, square wave, 5 kHz

waveform confirmation Square wave signal output for confirming the operation of the voltage input module
Output level0 V to 5 V (±1 %)Output frequency

1 kHz (±1 %)Duty ratio
Withstand voltage

50% (±5 %)AC 300 V, 1 minute (input, between output and chassis)
298

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications
Maximum rated voltage
to ground

42 V (DC+ACpeak)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 250 g

Standards

1WMPD4004444D

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

SafetyEN61010-1

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A299

12. Specifications – 12.3. Module Specifications

12.3.11. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113)
Item
Number of input
channels
Input connectors
Input format

Specifications
4 ch
Insulated BNC
Unbalanced input(insulation between channels and between channels and chassis)

Coupling

DC/GND

Input impedance

1 MΩ ±1 %Measurement range(RANGE)2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 V (the measurement range is ±RANGE)

Measurement probability ±0.2 % of RANGE (23 °C±5 °C, DC coupling, L.P.F. 3 Hz, after zero adjust)Temperature coefficient ±(400 ppm of RANGE)/°C
Frequency

DC coupling

DC to 100 kHz (-3 dB to 1 dB) (with L.P.F. disabled)

Low-pass filter

Cutoff frequency

3 Hz, 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 3 kHz, OFF (-1.6 dB ±1 dB)(L.P.F.)

Characteristics

Secondary bessel shape

Input conversion noise

10 mVp-p max (2 V range, input short circuit)characteristics

A/D conversion
Common mode rejection
ratio
Maximum allowed input
voltage
Maximum rated voltage
to ground

A/D resolution

16 bits

Sampling rate

1 MS/s80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz)±500 V peak
300 V (DC + AC peak)

CAT II

Withstand voltage

AC 3 kV, 1 minute (between input terminals and chassis, between channels)

Usage environment

Temperature: 0 to +40 °C,

Storage environment

Temperature: -20 to +60 °C, humidity: 20 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

Dimensions

Approx. 140 mm (W) x 223 mm (D) x 20 mm (H)

MassApprox. 300 g

Standards

SafetyEN61010-1, EN61010-2-030

EMC

EN61326-1, Class A

humidity: 35 to 85 %RH or less (without condensation)

300

1WMPD4004444D

12.4.

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

Exterior

12.4.1. Main Unit Exterior

394

199

410
334

1WMPD4004444D

301

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.2. 2ch Voltage Module (RA30-101) Exterior

302

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.3. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-102) Exterior

1WMPD4004444D

303

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.4. 2ch High Speed Voltage Module (RA30-103) Exterior

304

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.5. 2ch AC Strain Module (RA30-104) Exterior

1WMPD4004444D

305

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.6. 16ch Logic Module (RA30-105) Exterior

306

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.7. 2ch Temperature Module (RA30-106) Exterior

1WMPD4004444D

307

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.8. 2ch High Voltage Module (RA30-107) Exterior

308

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.9. 2ch Frequency Module (RA30-108) Exterior

1WMPD4004444D

309

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.10. 2ch Acceleration Module (RA30-109) Exterior

310

1WMPD4004444D

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.11. Remote Control Module (RA30-112) Exterior

1WMPD4004444D

311

12. Specifications – 12.4. Exterior

12.4.12. 4ch Voltage Module (RA30-113) Exterior

312

1WMPD4004444D

13.

13.1.

13. Optional Parts – 13.1. List of Cables

Optional Parts
List of Cables

Name (type)

Shape/characteristics
AC 125 V system
PSE, UL/CSA standard
Length 2 m

AC power cable
1KO6165-200

Insulated BNC
Insulated BNC cable(alligator clip)
RA30-507

Safety alligator clip
Red +Black Length 1.5 m

Remarks
RA3100 main unit
Japan,
United States
CanadaRA30-101
RA30-102
RA30-103
RA30-108
RA30-113
Analog input

NDIS conversion cable(RA30-508)

NDIS4109↕
NDIS4102
Length 0.6 m

RA30-104

8 channel logic cable(IC clip)
RA30-501

For logic input
20P - 4 CH × 2
Common GND
Length 1.5 m

RA30-105

8 channel logic cable(alligator clip)
RA30-502

For logic input
20P - 4 CH × 2
Common GND
Length 1.5 m

RA30-105

8 channel logic cable(round connector
conversion)
RA30-503

For 1539S connection
20P - 4 CH × 2
Common GND
Length 0.3 m

RA30-105High voltage alligatorclip
RA30-509-01

Alligator clips
RA30-107
Red × 1; Black × 1
Standard: CAT III 1000 V

High voltage connection
cable
RA30-509-02

Safety banana plug
Red × 1; Black × 1
RA30-107
Length: 2 m
Standard: CAT III 1000 V

High voltage extension
cable
RA30-509-03

Safety banana
plug/socket
Red × 1; Black × 1
RA30-107
Length: 2 m
Standard: CAT III 1000 V

Terminal blockconnection cable
RA30-504

For MDR 20 terminal
block connection
20P - 20P
Length 2 m

RA30-105
RA30-112

Remote control cable(for connecting units)
RA30-505

For connecting RA3100
20P - 14P
Length 2 m

RA30-112

1WMPD4004444D

313

13. Optional Parts – 13.2. List of Probes/Clamp Meters
Name (type)

Shape/characteristics

Remarks

Remote control cable(discrete wires)
RA30-506

For remote control input
20P - discrete wire
Length 2 m

RA30-105
RA30-112

Temperature sensor
connector
RA30-555

Top cable cover
Bottom cable coverTwo sets of cable ties

RA30-106

Terminal block
AX-PCX-10S20

For MDR 20 poleterminal block (for
AWG16-28)

RA30-105
RA30-112

Safety banana sockets
Insulated BNC※1

BNC adapter
0243-3021

RA30-101
RA30-102
RA30-103
RA30-108
RA30-113
Analog input*1 When more than one 4 channel voltage module (RA30-102 or RA30-113) is mounted next to each other,cannot be installed for all channels.

13.2.

List of Probes/Clamp Meters

Name (type)

Shape

Floating

Remarks

4 inputs

voltage probe

RA30-105(1539S)

Voltage variation probe

1 input(1540S: AC 100/120 V)

RA30-105(1543S: AC 220/240 V)

314

1WMPD4004444D

13.3.

13. Optional Parts – 13.3. Accessory

Accessory

Name (type)

Name

Shape

Z-fold paper adapter

RA30-551

Z-fold paper box

RA30-552

Dedicated delivery box

RA23-183

Carrying case

13.4.

Remarks

Including RA12-301

List of Spare Parts

Model

Name

RatingRemarks

Paper roll
YPS106

Recording paper

219.5 mm x 30 m

0511-3167 (5 rolls)

5 rolls/box
Paper roll
219.5 mm x 30 m
YPS108

Recording paper

Perforated

300 mm pitch

0511-3166 (5 rolls)

Remaining display print: 300 mm pitch 99 to 00
5 rolls/box
Z-fold paper
YPS112

Recording paper

219.5 mm x 200 m
1 book/box

5633-1794 Recording paper holder 2 per set

1WMPD4004444D

folded width 300 mm

Remaining display print: 669 to 000 per page315

0511-3182

Software License Information
The software embedded in this product uses software components owned by third parties.
The license information for the software components embedded in this product is indicated below.
SIL Open Font License
Copyright 2014-2021 Adobe (http://www.adobe.com/), with Reserved Font Name 'Source'. Source is atrademark of Adobe in the United States and/or other countries.
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative fontprojects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide afree and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they
are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative
works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the
fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license andclearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the CopyrightHolder(s).
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or inwhole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font
Software to a new environment.

"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed
to the Font Software.

316

1WMPD4004444D

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, touse, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
1)

Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may besold by itself.

2)

Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any
software, provided that each copy contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machinereadable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the
user.

3)

No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written
permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary
font name as presented to the users.

4)

The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used topromote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.

5)

The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under thislicense, and must not be distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under
this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.

TERMINATIONThis license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT,TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

1WMPD4004444D

317

MEMO

318

1WMPD4004444D

Omniace
RA3100Instruction Manual

1WMPD4004444D

5th Edition

A&D Company, Limited

3-23-14 Higashi-Ikebukuro, Toshima-ku, Tokyo 170-0013, JAPAN
Telephone: [81] (3) 5391-6132
Fax: [81] (3) 5391-1566

A&D ENGINEERING, INC.

47747 Warm Springs Blvd, Fremont, California 94539, U.S.A.
Tel: [1] (800) 726-3364
Weighing Support:[1] (888) 726-5931

Inspection Support:[1] (855) 332-8815

A&D INSTRUMENTS LIMITED

Unit 24/26 Blacklands Way, Abingdon Business Park, Abingdon, Oxfordshire
Telephone: [44] (1235) 550420
Fax: [44] (1235) 550485

OX14 1DY

United Kingdom

A&D AUSTRALASIA PTY LTD

32 Dew Street, Thebarton, South Australia 5031, AUSTRALIA
Telephone: [61] (8) 8301-8100
Fax: [61] (8) 8352-7409

A&D KOREA Limited

한국에이.엔.디(주)OOO A&D RUS

OOO "ЭЙ энд ДИ РУС"서울특별시 영등포구 국제금융로6길33 (여의도동) 맨하탄빌딩 817 우편 번호 07331( 817, Manhattan Bldg., 33. Gukjegeumyung-ro 6-gil, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 07331 Korea )전화: [82] (2) 780-4101
팩스: [82] (2) 782-4264

Почтовый адрес:121357, Российская Федерация, г.Москва, ул. Верейская, дом 17Юридический адрес: 117545, Российская Федерация, г. Москва, ул. Дорожная, д.3, корп.6, комн. 8б
( 121357, Russian Federation, Moscow, Vereyskaya Street 17 )тел.: [7] (495) 937-33-44
факс: [7] (495) 937-55-66

A&D Instruments India Private Limited

D-48( D-48, Udyog Vihar, Phase- , Gurgaon - 122016, Haryana, India ): [91] (124) 4715555: [91] (124) 4715599

A&D SCIENTECH TAIWAN LIMITED. A&D台灣分公司 艾安得股份有限公司

台湾台北市中正區青島東路 5 號 4 樓
( 4F No.5 Ching Tao East Road, Taipei Taiwan R.O.C. )Tel : [886](02) 2322-4722
Fax : [886](02) 2392-1794

A&D INSTRUMENTS (THAILAND) LIMITEDบริษัท เอ แอนด์ ดี อินสทรูเม ้นท์ (ไทยแลนด์) จํากัด

168/16 หมูท่ ี่ 1 ตําบลรังสิต อําเภอธัญบุรี จังหวัดปทุมธานี 12110 ประเทศไทย
( 168/16 Moo 1, Rangsit, Thanyaburi, Pathumthani 12110 Thailand )Tel : [66] 20038911